Littelfuse Protection Relays

Littelfuse Protection Relays
PROTECTION
RELAYS &
CONTROLS
CATALOG
Protection Relays & Controls Catalog
Ground-Fault Protection • Motor & Pump Protection • Feeder Protection
Arc-Flash Protection • Custom Products • Generator Protection & Controls
Engine Controls & Diagnostics • Alarm Monitoring
We Are The GLOBAL EXPERTS in
Electrical Safety and Productivity
Global Resources for A Global Market
From mining installations in Chile to semiconductor fabrication plants
in Taiwan, customers trust Littelfuse electrical safety products and
services to keep systems running and workers protected.
Our innovation, proven technical expertise, broad portfolio of
products and services and global resources enable us to provide
objective, comprehensive solutions for each unique application.
Littelfuse Locations
Littelfuse World Headquarters
8755 West Higgins Road, Suite 500
Chicago, IL 60631
USA
Tel: 1-800-832-3873
Fax: 1-847-787-5190
Email: techline@littelfuse.com
Littelfuse Startco
3714 Kinnear Place
Saskatoon, SK S7P 0A6
Canada
Tel: (306) 373-5505
Fax: (306) 374-2245
Email: info@startco.ca
Littelfuse Selco
Betonvej 10
DK- 4000 Roskilde
Denmark
Tel.: + 45 - 70 26 11 22
Fax: + 45 - 70 26 25 22
Email: selco@littelfuse.com
Littelfuse Selco ME L.L.C
P.O. Box 52898
Dubai
United Arab Emirates
Tel.: + 971 - 4 3413660
Fax: + 971 - 2 3413770
Email: selco.ae@selco.com
We Improve Electrical Safety and Increase Productivity
For All Harsh Environments
For decades Littelfuse has been helping customers improve their electrical systems. In
addition to well-designed products, our technical expertise brings years of experience and
product design support to your application.
Mining
We can provide immediate access to specialized technical resources, online references or
field application support. This catalog outlines the Littelfuse line of protection relays,
custom products, generator and engine controls, and alarm monitors, plus the technical
capabilities we offer for your application.
Petrochemical, Oil and Gas
Marine
Power Generation
Pipelines and Transportation
Aggregate and Cement
Pulp and Paper
Water and Wastewater
Safety
Cost
Downtime
Shock Hazard
Fault Damage
Replacement Time
Injury to Personnel
Equipment Replacement
Nuisance Tripping
Arc-Flash Hazards
Calibration Costs
Intermittent Faults
Open-CT Hazards
Compliance Citations
Unreliable Protection
Failed Resistors
Motor Rewinds
Calibration Time
Shore-to-Ship Power
Data Centers
Semiconductor Equipment
Hospitals
Alternative Energy
How to use this catalog
Choose your preferred product-selection method from the examples below.
By Product Category & Part Number: Table of Contents.......................................... Pg 2-3
MOTOR AND PUMP PROTECTION
PGR-6100 Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay............................. 42
PANEL
POWER
PUMP
PROTECTION
GENERATION
SHOP
MARINE
INDUSTRY
GENERAL
INDUSTRIAL
ELECTRIC
UTILITY
By Application................................................................................................................. Pg 4-7
By Feature Set.................................................................................................................. Pg 8-9
FEATURE
(IEEE #)
PGR-6100
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
a
Overload (49, 51)
Unbalance (current) (46)
Phase loss (current) (46)
PGR-6130
PGR-6150
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
By Product Category & Common Questions: Product Selection Guide............. Pg 10-15
motor protection
ADVANCED
Comprehensive Protection for
Medium-Voltage Motors
Voltage Protection
and Starter Control
NO
MPU-32
pg. 46
YES
MPS
pg. 48
By Keyword or Part Number: Alphanumeric Index........................................... Pg 159-160
Accessories
pg 116
Adapter Cables
pg 120
Alarm Monitors
pg 100
Arc-Flash Protection
C6200
pg 56
88-89
Protection Relays & Controls
Table of Contents
4 motor and pump protection
Find the right product for your application
Prevent damage to motors caused by overloads, jams, phase loss or unbalance,
heat from non-electric sources, heavy start-ups and excessive operational
cycles. Dynamic thermal curves, as well as integrated protection, metering, and
data-logging functions extend motor life and maximize process efficiency.
Ground-Fault & Motor Protection Typical Applications......................... 4
Ground-Fault & Motor Protection Typical Product Usage...................... 5
Generator/Engine Control Typical Applications..................................... 6
Generator/Engine Control Typical Product Usage.................................. 7
Product Feature Comparison................................................................8-9
Product Selection Guide..................................................................10-15
POWR-GARD® Product Portfolio......................................................16-17
Alphanumeric Index.....................................................................159-160
PGR-6100
PGR-6130
PGR-6150
MPU-32
MPS
MPU-32-X69X
MPS-469X
PGR-6800
1 Ground-fault protection
Create safer working environments and reduce incidents of Arc Flash without
affecting the uptime of critical operations. Vital in manufacturing and processing
environments, sensitive ground-fault relays with advanced filtering will detect
breakdown in insulation resistance without nuisance trips. Breakdown in
insulation resistance can be caused by moisture, vibration, chemicals and dust.
5 feeder protection
Protect feeder circuits from overcurrents, earth faults, phase loss and other
detrimental conditions in critical applications and processes. They provide
essential data for predictive and preventive maintenance, extending the life of
equipment, enhancing safety and maximizing efficiency.
Ungrounded DC System
SE-601
DC Ground-Fault Monitor.................................................. 19
FPU-32 Feeder Protection Unit........................................................... 53
FPS
Feeder Protection System.................................................54-55
AC/DC Grounded System
EL731
AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay.......................20-21
6 arc-flash protection
Ungrounded AC Systems
PGR-3100Ground-Fault Indication System....................................... 22
PGR-3200Ground-Fault Protection System....................................... 23
Rapidly detects developing Arc-Flash incidents and sends a trip signal to
interrupt power before significant damage occurs.
Solidly-Grounded Systems
T3200 Double Insulation Monitoring Relay................................. 24
SE-502 Ground-Fault Ground-Continuity Detector........................ 25
SE-701 Ground-Fault Monitor....................................................... 26
SE-703 Earth-Leakage Monitor..................................................... 27
SE-704 Earth-Leakage Monitor..................................................... 28
T2800 Earth-Fault Relay............................................................... 29
D0100, D0900 Arc-Flash Protection Relay...........................................57
PGR-8800 Arc-Flash Protection Relay............................................ 58-59
7 GROUND-FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTION
The first product on the market to provide UL 943C, Class C and D shock protection
for personnel in industrial facilities.
Industrial Shock-Block GFCI.................................................................. 61
2 TRAILING CABLE PROTECTION
8 Generator & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
Continuously monitor the integrity of the ground conductor to protect portable
equipment from hazardous voltages caused by ground faults.
These Single-Function, compact and cost-efficient relays are
typically used on low-voltage applications. DIN rail-mountable,
easy to operate, install and commission. The wide-range power
supply for AC and DC make these relays universal.
SE-105, SE-107 Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor...................... 31
SE-134C, SE-135 Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor...................... 32
SE-145
Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor...................... 33
PGR-4300
G2000
G3000
G3300
T2000
T2100
T2200
T2300
T2400
T2500
T2700
T2900
T3000
T3100
T3300
3 Resistance grounding/Ngr Monitoring
Overcome many of the issues experienced with solidly-grounded and
ungrounded electrical systems. High-resistance grounding eliminates
the Arc-Flash hazard associated with the first ground fault, transient
overvoltages, and allows for continuous operation during a ground fault.
SE-325
SE-330, SE-330HV
SE-330AU
NGR Series
PGN Series
Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor................... 35
Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor............... 36-37
Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor..................... 38
Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Packages............... 39
Pulsing High-Resistance-Grounding System..... 40
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
www.littelfuse.com
Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay...................... 42
Electronic Overload Relay........................................... 43
Motor Protection System.......................................44-45
Motor Protection Unit............................................46-47
Motor Protection System.......................................48-49
Motor Protection Relay Retrofit Kit............................ 50
Motor Protection System Retrofit Kit......................... 50
Pump Protection Relay................................................ 51
2
Generator Ground-Fault Relay............................................ 63
Power Relay........................................................................ 64
Frequency Relay................................................................. 65
Voltage Relay..................................................................... 66
Reverse Power Relay.......................................................... 67
Excitation Loss Relay.......................................................... 68
Overcurrent Relay............................................................... 69
3-Phase Short-Circuit Relay............................................... 70
3-Phase Dual Overcurrent Relay........................................ 71
Overcurrent and Short-Circuit Relay.................................. 72
Power Relay........................................................................ 73
3-Phase Differential Relay................................................. 74
Frequency Relay................................................................. 75
Voltage Relay..................................................................... 76
Voltage Relay..................................................................... 77
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays & Controls
9 generator control
Synchronizing, frequency control, load sharing, power management and more
for marine, emergency or power generation applications.
Overview ............................................................................................ 109
Panel Mount Adapters........................................................................ 110
DIN-Rail Adapters............................................................................... 111
Watertight Covers & Enclosures........................................................ 111
Basic
T2600 Dual Current Relay................................................................. 79
T4500 Auto Synchronizer.................................................................. 80
T4800 Load Sharer............................................................................ 81
T4900VAR Load Sharer.................................................................... 82
T5000 Paralleling Relay..................................................................... 83
E7800 Motorized Potentiometer....................................................... 84
T7900 Electronic Potentiometer........................................................ 85
M8100 Synchroscope......................................................................... 86
T8400 Blackout Limiter..................................................................... 87
15 current transformers
CT Selection Guide ............................................................................ 113
Current Transformers...................................................................114-115
Ground-Reference Modules................................................................ 117
High-Tension Couplers........................................................................ 117
Relay Testing Equipment.................................................................... 117
Input Modules..................................................................................... 118
Remote Indication & Meters.......................................................118-119
Sensing Resistors............................................................................... 119
Terminations & Adapters.............................................................120-121
Controls & Diagnostic Accessories.................................................... 121
C6200 FlexGen Generator Control................................................88-89
Advanced
S6000, S6100, S6500, S6610 SIGMA Generator Control..............90-91
10 engine control
Control and protection for gen-sets, marine propulsion, pump
and compressor engines. Communication interfaces for RS485 Modbus RTU
and CAN J1939 are available.
Engine Control......................................................................... 93
Shut-down Unit...................................................................... 94
Engine Control and Monitoring Unit...................................... 95
Shut-down Unit...................................................................... 96
The EngineEye diagnostic unit helps improve the efficiency and
performance of combustion engines by measuring and analyzing the
engine combustion process. It utilizes a handheld high-precision cylinder
pressure indicator and a pressure sensor.
Monitor a wide range of alarms in industrial, power generation,
petrochemical and marine applications. Both digital and analog signals can
be monitored. External communication via RS485 Modbus RTU is available.
M1000 Alarm Monitor..................................................................... 101
M3000 Alarm Monitor..................................................................... 102
M4200 Alarm Monitor..................................................................... 103
M4500, M4600, M4700 Alarm Indicators......................................... 104
H4000, H4100, H4200 HMI Panels................................................... 105
13 software
Software ............................................................................................ 107
8
11
12
13
Alphanumeric Index.....................................................................159-160
3
7
10
19 Alphanumeric Index
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
6
Our custom-built portable power centers, distribution panels
and substations are products of choice for leading mining
companies. Littelfuse Startco manufactures rugged products
that are built to withstand the harshest conditions and are fully tested
to ensure they meet the most stringent mining requirements.
Glossary of Terms............................................................................... 129
Ground-Fault Protection...................................................................... 132
Motor Protection................................................................................. 137
Arc-Flash Protection ........................................................................... 139
Current Transformer Application........................................................ 141
Resistance-Grounding Conversion...................................................... 142
Generator Control............................................................................... 144
Engine Control .................................................................................... 145
Engine Diagnostics ............................................................................ 146
Alarm Monitoring ............................................................................... 147
Wiring Diagrams..........................................................................148-155
ANSI/IEEE Device Numbers/Marine Certifications............................ 156
NGR and CT Sizing Charts.................................................................. 156
Protection Relay Quick Reference Guide............................................ 157
Controls Quick Reference Guide......................................................... 158
12 Alarm MONITORING
4
9
18 Protection Overview
E5000 Handheld EngineEye Unit....................................................98-99
3
17 custom products/relay-related elec. equip.
Portable Power Centers..................................................................... 123
Mining Machine Controls................................................................... 124
Soft Starters........................................................................................125
Power Take-Off Panels........................................................................126
Electrical/Modular Buildings..............................................................127
11 engine diagnosTICs
2
5
16 Additional accessories
Standard
M2000
M0600
M2500
M2600
1
14 mounting adapters
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
14
15
16
17
18
19
Protection Relays & Controls
Typical applications
Ground-Fault Protection Relays
Application
Common Problems
Product Protection Category (Pg no.)
GENERATORS
Insulation breakdown due to vibration and corrosion
Ground Fault (pg 18)
Resistance Grounding (pg 34)
Arc-Flash (pg 56)
TRANSFORMERS
Overloading and overvoltage
Resistance Grounding (pg 34)
Feeder (pg 52)
SWITCHGEAR
& MCCs
Highest average downtime (IEEE 493-1997)
Ground Fault (pg 18)
Motor (pg 41)
Feeder (pg 52)
Resistance Grounding (pg 34)
Arc-Flash (pg 56)
Switchboards &
PANELBOARDS
Low-level leakage current undetected by typical OCPDs
Ground Fault (pg 18)
DRIVES
Switching frequencies cause nuisance tripping
Ground Fault (pg 18)
Motor (pg 41)
Arc-Flash (pg 56)
MOTORS & PUMPS
Winding faults due to overloading, water, dust and vibration
Ground Fault (pg 18)
Motor (pg 41)
Arc-Flash (pg 56)
FEEDER
CIRCUITS
Temperature and mechanical stress lead to severe damage
Ground Fault (pg 18)
Feeder (pg 52)
Portable
Equipment
Movement causing broken conductors and failed insulation
Ground Fault (pg 18)
Feeder (pg 52)
Arc-Flash (pg 56)
Grounding
Resistors
Open-circuit resistors due to corrosion or loose connections
Resistance Grounding (pg 34)
Motor & Feeder Protection Relays
Application
Common Problems
Product Protection Category (Pg no.)
SWITCHGEAR
& MCCs
Highest average downtime (IEEE 493-1997)
Ground- Fault (pg 18)
Motor (pg 41)
Feeder (pg 52),
Resistance Grounding (pg 34)
Arc-Flash (pg 56)
DRIVES
Switching frequencies cause nuisance tripping
MOTORS & PUMPS
Winding faults due to overloading, water, dust and vibration
FEEDER
CIRCUITS
Temperature and mechanical stress lead to severe damage
Ground Fault (pg 18)
Feeder (pg 52)
PORTABLE
EQUIPMENT
Cable failure due to overloading
Motor (pg 41)
Feeder (pg 52)
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
4
Ground Fault (pg 18)
Motor (pg 41)
Arc-Flash (pg 56)
Ground Fault (pg 18)
Motor (pg 41)
Arc-Flash (pg 56)
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays & Controls
Typical product application
Ground-Fault Protection
A
Solidly
Grounded
SE-701
Resistance
Grounded
SE-330
TRAILING CABLE Protection
UnGrounded
B
PGR-3100
SE-135
A
C
B
SE-135
SE-701
EL731
VFD
SE-145
PGR-4300
Battery Charger
SE-601
A Single-Load Application
Ground-Check GF Relay
SE-135 (pg 32)
Ground-Check GF Relay System
SE-145 (pg 33)
B Multiple-Load Application
A Service Entrance
Solidly Grounded GF Relay
SE-701 (pg 26)
Resistance-Grounded GF Relay
SE-330 (pg 36)
Ungrounded GF Relay
PGR-3100 (pg 22)
B Loads
Variable Frequency GF Relay
EL731 (pg 20)
GF Relay
SE-704 (pg 28)
DC GF Relay
SE-601 (pg 19)
C Generator Ground-Fault Protection
Generator GF Relay
PGR-4300 (pg 63)
MOtor & pump Protection Feeder Protection
A
FPS
FPU-32
B
A Feeder Protection
PGR-6150
MPS
Feeder Protection Relay
FPS (pg 54)
Feeder Protection Relay
FPU-32 (pg 53)
B Motor Protection
Standard Motor Protection RelayPGR-6150 (pg 44)
Advanced Motor Protection Relay MPS (pg 48)
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
5
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Protection Relays & Controls
Typical applications
Alarm Monitoring
Why are these Monitors necessary?
Alarm panels for monitoring of critical processes in marine, off-shore and land based applications. Analog or digital inputs for
monitoring of for instance current, temperature or pressure. Indication of alarms. Logging of alarm and events.
Application
Common functions
Product Category (Pg no.)
Machinery Alarm Systems
Exhaust gas temperature monitoring on internal combustion
engines, bearing temperature or coolant temperature monitoring.
Marine Alarm Systems
Water Ingress Detection; Ballast Water Monitoring
Process Automation
Pump Control; Flow Control
Storage Facility Monitoring
Ambient Condition Monitoring
Alarm Monitoring (pg 100)
Engine Controls
Why are these Controls necessary?
The Engine Controls product group includes equipment for start, stop, monitoring and protection of internal combustion engines.
Application
Common functions
Marine Propulsion Engines
Engine Control and Safety Systems
Marine Auxiliary Engines
Engine Control and Safety Systems
Genset Engines
Control and protection of generator sets
Product Category (Pg no.)
Engine Control (pg 92)
Engine Diagnostics
Why are these Diagnostics necessary?
Monitoring of engine condition for preventive maintanence and optimization.
Application
Common functions
Product Category (Pg no.)
Large Marine and Power Station
Internal Combustion Engines
Cylinder Pressure Analyzer, MIP
Engine Diagnostics (pg 97)
Generator Controls
Why are these Controls necessary?
This product group covers equipment for synchronization of Parallel Running Generators, Load Sharing and Power Management.
Application
Common functions
I. Marine
Generators
Synchronizing, Load Sharing, Generator Protection, Speed/Voltage Control, Engine
Control, Alarm and Safety Systems
II. REMOTE POWER
STATIONS
Synchronizing, Load Sharing, Generator Protection, Speed/Voltage Control, Engine
Control Systems
Generator Protection (pg 62)
III. Grid parallel
generators
Synchronizing, Load Control, Power Factor Relation, Generator Protection, Speed/
Voltage Control, Engine Control Systems
Engine Control (pg 92)
IV. Container
gensets
Synchronizing, Load Sharing, Generator Protection, Speed/Voltage Control, Engine
Control Systems
V. Emergency
Generators
Generator Protection, Speed/Voltage Control,
Engine Control Systems
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Product Category (Pg no.)
6
Generator Control (pg 78)
Engine Diagnostics (pg 97)
Alarm Monitoring (pg 100)
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays & Controls
Typical product application
GRID CONNECTION: III + V
Open & Closed Transition
GRID PARALLELER: III
with Local Bus
ISLAND MODE: I + II + IV
One or Multiple Generators
A
H4000
M1000
H4000
B
M4200
H4000
M3000
M3000
T/G-LINE
T/G-LINE
T/G-LINE
C6200
C6200
C6200
S6000
C6200
S6100
C
M2000
M2500
GEN.
A Alarm Monitoring & Annunciation
Alarm Monitor
M1000 (pg 101)
Alarm Monitor
M3000 (pg 102)
Alarm Monitor
M4200 (pg 103)
HMI PanelH4000 (pg 105)
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
M2500
GEN.
GEN.
B Generator Protection & Control
M2500
GEN.
GEN.
C Engine Control & Diagnostics
Generator Protection Relays
T/G-Line (pg 79-87) Basic Generator Controls
T/G-Line (pg 79-87) Standard Generator Controls C6200 (pg 88)
Advanced Generator Controls S6000 (pg 90)
Advanced Generator ControlsS6100 (pg 90)
7
M2500
Engine Control
M2000 (pg 93)
Engine Control/Monitor M2500 (pg 95)
Engine Diagnostics
E5000 (pg 98)
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Protection Relays & Controls
Feature Comparisons
Use the feature tables below and the Product Selection Guide on pages 10-15 to choose the appropriate protection relay or monitor for your application.
Arc-Flash Relays
Ground-Fault Protection Relays
Cable monitoring
on sensor inputs
USB
a
DC supply
AC supply
Data logging
a
Digital input
No. of open collector outputs
Common alarm output†
Siren output
a a
a a
LCD display
Configure from PC
Configure from DIP switches/
jumper
Configure from front panel
a
a
a
a a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
8
MODBUS-RTU (RS485)
LED dimming
LED synchronizing
Panel linking Remote reset
Sensor monitoring
Insulation monitoring of
supply voltage
Monitoring of supply voltage
M4780
No. of inputs
M4700
Indicator panel
M4600
Alarm panel
M4500
a
a
a
a
a
a
M4200
a
a
a
a
a
a
FEATURE
M3000
a
a
a
a
Alarm Monitors
M1000
a a a
a a a
a a
a a
Fiber optic sensors
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
FPS
a
FPU-32
a a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
PGR-6800
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a a
Point sensors
a
a a a aa a
‡
MPS
‡
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
Current detection
PGR-8800
‡
FEATURE
D0900
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
D0100
‡
MPU-32
a
a
a
a
a
a
SE-330
SE-330HV
SE-330AU
a a a a aa
a
a a a a aa
a a a
a a aa
aa
a
a a
a a aa
a
a
a a aa
a
a a
aaa
a a a
a
PGR-6150
a
PGR-6130
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
PGR-6100
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
Overload (49, 51)
Unbalance (current) (46)
Phase loss (current) (46)
Phase reverse (current) (46)
PTC overtemperature (49)
Undercurrent (37)
Jam
Overcurrent (50, 51)
Failure to accelerate
RTD temperature (38, 49)
Starts per hour (66)
Differential (87)
Reduced overcurrent setting
Phase loss (voltage) (47)
Phase reverse (voltage) (47)
Unbalance (voltage) (47)
Overvoltage (59)
Undervoltage (27)
Power factor (55)
Overfrequency (81)
Underfrequency (81)
Starter control
Breaker control
Underspeed (14)
Integrated CTs
Off-line insulation monitoring
Metering and data logging
Communications
Conformal coating
10-year warranty
SE-325
a
a a
a a a a a aa a
Motor & Feeder Protection Relays
FEATURE (IEEE #)
SE-145
SE-134C
SE-135
SE-105
SE-107
T2800
a
a
a a
SE-701
SE-703
SE-704
a a
SE-502
‡
T3200
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
PGR-3200
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
PGR-3100
EL731
Detects GF via voltage
Detects GF via current
Detects DC GF
Adjustable GF pickup
Adjustable time delay
Remote reset
Analog output
Fail-safe option
Harmonic filtering
CT-Loop monitoring
Insulation monitoring
Ground-check monitoring
Grounding-resistor monitoring
PTC/RTD overtemperature
Communications
Conformal coating
SE-601
FEATURE
a a a
a a a a a a a
10
24
8
6
8
20
20
a a* a a a a a
10 14 4
1oc 1oc 2dryc
1dryc 1oc 1dryc
a
a a a
a
a
a
a a
a a a
a
a
a
a a a
a a a
a
a
a
a
1dryc‡ 1dryc‡
1dryc‡ 1dryc‡
a a
a
*Both analog and digital input.
†oc=open collector; dryc=dry contact
‡Optional
NOTE: Tables are for reference only and include standard and optional configurations.
Please see the respective catalog page for exact product specifications.
IEEE Device Numbers are shown in parenthesis after the applicable features.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays & Controls
Feature Comparisons
Use the feature tables below and the Product Selection Guide on pages 10-15 to choose the appropriate control and protection for your generator or engine.
00
Engine Controls
Generator Protection & Single-Function Relays
a
aa
aa
aa
a
aa
a aa
aaaa a
a
aaaaaaaaaa
Engine Diagnostics
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
NOTE: These tables are for reference only and include standard and optional configurations.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
a
S6610
a
S6100
a
S6000
a
C6200
T8400
aaaaa
M8100
T7900
E7800
T5000
T4900
T4800
T4500
T2600
3 phase true RMS measurement
Overcurrent
Short circuit
Overload
Reverse power (32)
Excitation loss (40)
Overfrequency (81)
Underfrequency (81)
Overvoltage (59)
Undervoltage (27)
ROCOF (81)
Vector shift
Preferential load trip
Synchronizing (25)
Check synchronizer (25)
Active load sharing [kW]
Reactive load sharing [kVAR]
Power factor regulation
Dead bus monitoring/
black out limiter
Load depending start/stop
(PM)
Large consumer control (PM)
Dynamic grid-parallel
operation control
MODBUS RTU
(RS485 interface)
Motorized potentiometer
Electronic potentiometer
Dead bus closure
a a
a a a
a
a a
a
a
a
a
a a a
a
Generator Controls
FEATURE (IEEE #)
Start/stop
Digital sensor inputs
Analog sensor inputs
Cable monitoring on fuel/
stop solenoid output
Graphical display
CAN J1939
USB
SD card slot
Pick-up input
M2600
a
a
M2500
a
FEATURE (IEEE #)
M2000
T3300
T3100
T3000
a
a
T2900
a
a
a
aa
a
a
T2700
a
T2500
a
T2400
T2300
T2200
T2100
T2000
G3300
G3000
Overload
Overcurrent
Undercurrent (37)
Short circuit
Reverse power (32)
Overfrequency (81)
Underfrequency (81)
Overvoltage (59)
Undervoltage (27)
Excitation loss (40)
Earth fault
Differential current relay (87)
Insulation monitoring relay
Single phase measurement
3-phase measurement
Conformal coating
G2000
PGR-4300
FEATURE (IEEE #)
Features
USB
Color LCD
PC software included
Upgradable
a
a
a
a
Temperature compensation
Calibration-check
integration
Connecting sensor ports
Pressure graph
Basic Advanced Professional
E5000
E5000,
E5000, E5100,
& E5100
E5100
E5200 & 5300
& E5200
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
1
2
5
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
*
MIP mode
a
a
a
a
a
a
Misfire analysis
pmax
p/time
a
pmax bar graph
a
a
a
aaa
a
a
a
a
p/alpha
*
dp/alpha
*
p/V
*
Pressure sensor
a
a
Crank-angle sensor
Maximum engines
(memory)
Maximum cylinders/
engine (memory)
5
10
20
20
20
20
Maximum number of
strokes (memory)
30
30
30
*Possible with a crank angle sensor E5300.
9
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Select product category
STEP 1
Product Selection Guide
Ground-Fault Protection
UnGrounded
DC
Detect &
Limit
Ground Faults
Low-Level
Ground-Fault
Protection
for VFDs or
DC Applications
Ensure Ground-Conductor Continuity
for Portable Equipment and
Submersible Pumps and
Detect Ground Faults
Detect
Ground Faults &
Reduce Potential
for Arc Flash
Locate Ground Fault &
Reduce Transient
Overvoltage
Select the needed features in each category
STEP 2
Ground-conductor monitoring
& ground-fault protection
Solidly
Grounded AC
UnGrounded
AC
AC/dc
NO
YES
YES
Convert
System to
Resistance
Grounding
NO
Convert
System to
Resistance
Grounding
Ground-Fault Protection
for Generators
Detect Insulation
Breakdown
YES
Dual Channel
NO
This is the recommended product
for your application
STEP 3
TRAILING CABLE
Protection
YES
YES
NO
NO
Cable Voltage
<5 kV
Ground-Fault
Trip Level
Detect Ground
Fault by Phase/
Ground Voltage
Measurement
Wide
Range
Number of
Trailing Cables
10 mA5A
Single
Three
cable
trailing
or dual
cables
termination
YES
SE-601
pg. 19
EL731
pg. 20
PGR-3200
pg. 23
T3200
pg. 24
PGR-3100
pg. 22
Ground-Fault Protection Relays
>5 kV
SE-502
pg. 25
SE-701 SE-704
pg. 26
pg. 28
SE-105
SE-107
pg. 31
SE-134C
SE-135
pg. 32
Trailing Cable Relays
10
SE-145
pg. 33
Product Selection Guide
Feeder
Protection
RESISTANCE GroundING
STANDARD
RESISTANCE-GROUNDED AC
Neutral-Grounding Resistance (NGR)
Continuity Monitoring
Implement
Low-Resistance
Grounding
Implement
High-Resistance
Grounding
Current Protection
& Metering
IEEE/IEC
Overcurrent
advanced
Current & Voltage
Protection &
Metering IEEE/IEC
Overcurrent
Pulsing, Digital Filtering,
Communications,
or Software
NO
YES
Identify
Faulted Feeder
YES
use in combination
SE-330 & SE-701
pg. 36 & 26
NO
SE-330
pg. 36
SE-325
pg. 35
PGN-1000
pg. 39
PGN-3000
pg. 40
FPU-32
pg. 53
FPS
pg. 54
Feeder Protection Relays
Resistance-Grounding Systems
11
Select product category
STEP 1
Product Selection Guide
BASIC
GroundFault
Protection
and Insulation
Monitoring
STANDARD AdvancedRetrofits
Protection
for
Low-Voltage
Motors
(<1000 V),
Integrated CTs
Multi-Function
Protection for
Low-Voltage
Motors
(<1000 V),
Integrated CTs
Select the needed features in each category
Typically
<75 hp
STEP 2
ARC-FLASH
PROTECTION
MOtor & pump Protection
Pre-wired,
Plug & Play
Replacement
for
Obsolete
Relays
Sensor Health Monitoring
NO
Typically
>50 hp
Voltage Protection
and Starter Control
Undercurrent
Protection for
Pump Applications
NO
Comprehensive
Protection for
Medium-Voltage
Motors,
Reduced
Arc-Flash Risk
Arc-flash detection
Overcurrent
Detection
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
Power Supply
This is the recommended product
for your application
STEP 3
DC
AC
optional display
PGR-6100
pg. 42
PGR-6130 PGR-6800
pg. 43
pg. 51
PGR-6150
pg. 44
MPU-32
pg. 46
MPS
pg. 48
Motor & Pump Protection Relays
12
MPU-32-X69X
MPS-469X
pg. 50
D0100
pg. 53
D0900
pg. 53
PGR-8800
pg. 54
Arc-Flash Relays
Product Selection Guide
00
engine control
GENERATOR & Single-function
protection
Current
Voltage
Power
Misc.
Start/stop & monitoring
Single & Dual
Channel
Overcurrent,
Short-Circuit
Under&
OverVoltage
Forward
&
Reverse
Power
Frequency,
Excitation
Loss,
Differential
J1939 Communication
back-up for marine safety system
Speed Detection via Pickup
NO
YES
Analog Sensor Inputs
YES
PGR-4300
T2200
T2300
T2400
T2500
pg. 63,
69-72
G3300
T3100
T3300
pg. 66,
76, 77
G2000
T2000
T2700
pg. 64,
67, 73
G3000
T2100
T2900
T3000
pg. 65, 68,
74, 75
M2500
pg. 95
Generator & Single-Function Protection
Speed Detection via
Tacho Relay
NO
M2000
pg. 93
Engine Control
13
NO
YES
NO
M2600
pg. 96
YES
M0600
pg. 94
STEP 1
Select product category
STEP 2
Select the needed features in each category
STEP 3
This is the recommended product
for your application
Product Selection Guide
Generator Control
Basic
Load
Depending
Start/Stop
Relay
Synchronization
Manual
T2600
pg. 79
T5000
M8100
pg. 83,
86
Automatic
T4500
pg. 80
STANDARD
Load
Sharing
Active
Load
(kW)
Reactive
Load
(kW)
T4800
pg. 81
T4900
pg. 82
Blackout
Clearance
Motorized Electronic
Potentio- Potentiometers
meters
Flexible, Integrated
Protection & Control
Synchronizing Synchronizing
& Load
& Load
Sharing (kW) Sharing (kW)
T8400
pg. 87
E7800
pg. 84
T7900
pg. 85
C6200
FlexGen
Basic
+ C6500
pg. 88
Generator Control
14
Grid Parallel
Mode, Island
Mode, Load
Depending
Start & Stop,
Marine Power
Management
C6200
FlexGen
Advanced
+ C6500
pg. 88
Product Selection Guide
alarm MONITORING
engine diagnostics
CYLINDER PRESSURE ANALYZER
Advanced
Crank Angle Measurement
Separate Protection and Control
YES
NO
Complete Marine
Power
Generator
Management
Generator
Protection
(incl. emergency
Protection
& Controls
& harbor
generator control)
Σ
ΣSG A
ALARM PANELS
Analog Sensor Signal
YES
Bus Communications
NO
YES
NO
Bus
Communications
Top Dead Center
Correction
NO
Indicator panels
NO
YES
YES
GMA
Σ I MA
Σ I MA
S6000
SIGMA
+S6500
pg. 90
S6000
SIGMA
+S6100
+S6500
pg. 90
S6000
SIGMA
+S6100
+S6500
+S6610
pg. 90
E5000.1000 E5000.2000 E5000.3000
EngineEye EngineEye EngineEye
Basic
Advanced Professional
pg. 98
pg. 98
pg. 98
Engine Diagnostics
15
M3000
pg. 102
M1000
pg. 101
M4200
pg. 103
M4780
pg. 104
Alarm Monitoring
M4500
M4600
M4700
pg. 104
Littelfuse POWR-GARD Fuses...
®
Experts in Circuit Protection.
As the global leader in circuit protection, Littelfuse
POWR-GARD Electrical Business Unit has over 5,000
fuses, fuse blocks and fuse holders for the electrical
market—specifically designed to enhance the safety of
installation and allow compliance with international codes
and standards. Littelfuse provides well designed products,
quality manufacturing and experienced support to assist you
in attaining the best circuit protection for your application.
Littelfuse can provide immediate access to specialized
technical resources, online references or application support
in the field. Be sure to request the Littelfuse POWR-GARD ®
Catalog for all of our industrial fuse and fuse block products
and the technical capabilities we offer for your application.
Download our full-line
POWR-GARD® Fuse Products Catalog
For more information on
our complete line of circuit
protection products or
to download our full-line
industrial fuse POWR-GARD
catalog, contact us at
www.littelfuse.com
POWR-GARD® Fuses and other
circuit protection products
UL Class Fuses
Solar Fuses
Indicating Fuse Blocks
Touch-SAfe Fuse Holders
Medium Voltage Fuses
Semiconductor Fuses
Electronic Fuses
Automotive Fuses
800-TEC-FUSE
OEM Custom Products
Suppression Products
Pre-Engineered Panels
16
Protecting People
and Equipment
Expanding our Product
Offering for an Evolving
Global Market
Littelfuse is committed to serving
our customers around the world
and helping improve safety in your
application. Our product line is always
expanding to meet your needs. For the
newest circuit protection products,
datasheets and technical information
visit: www.littelfuse.com
17
Protection Relays
Ground-fault protection
Ungrounded DC System
SE-601 DC Ground-Fault Monitor....................................................... 19
AC/DC Earthed System
EL731 AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay................................20-21
Ungrounded AC Systems
PGR-3100 Ground-Fault Indication System......................................... 22
PGR-3200 Ground-Fault Protection System........................................ 23
Solidly-Grounded Systems
T3200 Two-Channel Insulation-Monitoring Relay.............................. 24
SE-502 Ground-Fault Ground-Continuity Detector.............................. 25
SE-701 Ground-Fault Monitor.............................................................. 26
SE-703 Earth-Leakage Monitor............................................................ 27
SE-704 Earth-Leakage Monitor............................................................ 28
For More Information…
and to download our White Paper on
Ground-fault Protection with VFDs,
visit
www.littelfuse.com/technicalcenter
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
T2800 Earth-Fault Relay...................................................................... 29
18
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Ungrounded DC System
SE-601 Series (PGR-2601)
DC Ground-Fault Monitor
1
Features & Benefits
Features
Adjustable pickup
(1 - 20 mA)
Adjustable time delay
(50 ms - 2.5 s)
Selectable contact
operating mode
BENEFITS
Ten settings provide a wide range of
low-level protection
Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection or
delayed response
Form A and Form B output contacts for operation of
separate annunciation and trip circuits
Provides means for connecting to a meter
(PGA-0500) or a control system
Retains trip state when de-energized to simplify
troubleshooting
Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating
modes allow connection to shunt or undervoltage
breaker coil
Microprocessor based
No calibration required saves on maintenance cost
Output contacts
Analog output
(0 - 5 V)
Non-volatile trip
Memory
Simplified Circuit Diagram
+
A
SE-GRM SERIES
UNGROUNDED
SUPPLY
GROUND-REFERENCE
MODULE
Accessories
-
A
SE-601
L1
(DC Ground-Fault Monitor)
SE-GRM Series Ground-Reference Module
Required accessory, used to connect the
SE-601 DC Ground-Fault Monitor to the
DC bus.
PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter
Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays
ground-fault current as a percentage of 22 mA.
L2
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 148.
Specifications
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
CONTROL POWER
SE-601-OD
24 Vdc
SE-601-OT
48 Vdc
SE-601-OU
120/240 Vac/Vdc
accessories
Requirement
Page
SE-GRM SERIES
Required
117
PGA-0500
Optional
119
PMA-55
Optional
110
PMA-60
Optional
110
IEEE Device Numbers
DC Overcurrent Relay (76G)
Input Voltage
See ordering information
Dimensions
H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5")
Trip Level Settings
1-20 mA
Trip Time Settings
0.05 -2.5 s
Output Contacts
Isolated Form A and Form B
Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe
Test Button Local
Reset Button
Local and remote
Analog Output
0-5 V
Conformally Coated
Consult factory
Approvals
CSA certified, UL Listed, CE (European Union),
C-Tick (Australian)
Warranty
5 years
Mounting
DIN, Surface (standard)
Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter)
Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
19
www.littelfuse.com/se-601
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
Description
The SE-601 is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for
ungrounded dc systems. It provides sensitive ground-fault
protection without the problems associated with nuisance
tripping. Ground-fault current is sensed using an SE-GRM
Series Ground-Reference Module—a resistor network that
limits ground-fault current to 25 mA. The SE-601 is used
on ungrounded dc systems ranging from industrial 24Vdc control circuits to 1000-Vdc solar and transportation
systems.
Protection Relays
Earth-Leakage Protection–Grounded AC or DC Systems
EL731 Series
AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay
Description
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
1
The EL731 is a microprocessor-based AC/DC Sensitive
Earth-Leakage Relay that offers complete coverage for all
frequencies from 0-15,000 Hz. Two CT’s are required for the
entire frequency range, or one CT can be used for only lowor high-frequency detection. An RTD/PTC sensor input
allows over-temperature protection. The EL731 offers
metering capabilities, password-protected alarm and trip
settings and optional network communications. It is used to
add low-level ground-fault protection to variable-speed
drives, and to dc currents.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
CT1 A
CT2
A
A
GROUNDED
AC SUPPLY
CT1
B
GROUNDED
C
DC SUPPLY
–
EL731 SERIES
L1
A
+
EL731 SERIES
(AC/DC Sensitive
Earth-Leakage Relay)
L1
L2
(AC/DC Sensitive
Earth-Leakage Relay)
L2
AC Mode
DC Mode
For detailed wiring diagram, see adjacent page and page 148.
Accessories
Ordering Information
Ordering
Number
control
power
EL731-00-00
120/240 Vac/Vdc
None
EL731-01-00
120/240 Vac/Vdc
DeviceNet™
EL731-02-00
120/240 Vac/Vdc
Profibus®
EL731-03-00
120/240 Vac/Vdc
Ethernet
EL731-04-00
120/240 Vac/Vdc
Modbus
EL731-10-00
48 Vdc & 24 Vac
None
EL731-11-00
48 Vdc & 24 Vac
DeviceNet™
EL731-12-00
48 Vdc & 24 Vac
Profibus®
EL731-13-00
48 Vdc & 24 Vac
Ethernet
EL731-14-00
48 Vdc & 24 Vac
Modbus
EL731-20-00
24 Vdc
None
EL731-21-00
24 Vdc
DeviceNet™
EL731-22-00
24 Vdc
Profibus®
EL731-23-00
24 Vdc
Ethernet
EL731-24-00
24 Vdc
Modbus
www.littelfuse.com/acdc
A
Communications
EFCT Series Earth-Fault Current Transformer
Required zero-sequence current transformer
specifically designed for low level detection.
AC700-CUA Series
Communication Adapter
Optional network-interface and firmwareupgrade communications adapters field-install
in EL731.
AC700-SMK DIN-rail & Surface-mount
Adapter
EL731 plugs into adapter for back-plane
mounting.
20
accessories
requirement
page
EFCT Series CT
One Required
114
AC700-CUA Series Com. Unit
Optional
121
AC700-SMK Surface-Mount Kit
Optional
111
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Earth-Leakage Protection–Grounded AC or DC Systems
1
Features
BENEFITS
Adjustable pickup (30-5,000 mA)
Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of low-level protection and system coordination
Frequency range (0-90 Hz, 20-15,000 Hz)
Operate in either AC or DC mode or both. Use single or combined ranges. Separate metering.
32-char OLED display
Earth-leakage metering, setup and programming
Local LED indication
Visual Trip, Alarm, CT connection indication
CT-Loop monitoring
Alarms when CT is not connected
Analog output (4-20 mA)
Connect to DCS. Allows connection to an optional meter (PGA-0500) or control system
Adjustable time delay
Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination
Alarm and trip settings
Detect a deteriorating condition before damage occurs
Temperature-sensor input
Drive or motor temperature protection
Output contacts
3 programmable: Operate 2 alarm and 1 trip circuit
Network communication
Optional connection to plant network.
Harmonic filtering
Eliminates nuisance tripping due to harmonic noise
Microprocessor based
No required calibration saves maintenance cost
Universal power supply
Allows operation in application where one side of PT is faulted, provides flexibility for
numerous applications
Wiring Diagram
LINE 1
Specifications
OPTIONAL
NETWORK
COMM
14 L1
AC/DC SENSITIVE
EARTH-LEAKAGE RELAY
EL731
LINE 2/N
L2/N 15
GND
K1
20
FAULT
19
18
K2
21
22
23
K3
24
25
11 S21
16
26
20-15000 HZ CT
NC 17
10 S22
TC 5
TC
RTD/PTC TB 4
TB
TA 3
TA
9 SH2
8 S11
7 S12
DC-90 HZ CT
13 RST
TC
RTD
t˚
+t˚
TB
TA
SUPPLY
6 SH
REMOTE
RESET
PTC
ANALOG
OUT
AB 2
+–
TERMINATION
AA 1
12 GND
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
21
IEEE Device Numbers AC ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N),
DC ground fault (79G),
PTC overtemperature (49),
RTD temperature (38, 49)
Supply Voltage
120/240 Vac/Vdc, 24 Vdc,
48 Vdc/24 Vac
Trip Level Settings
30-5,000 mA AC and DC
Alarm Level Settings
30-5,000 mA AC and DC
Trip Delay
0.05-2 s
Output Contacts
3 Form C (programmable)
Contact Operating Mode Fail-safe & non-fail-safe
Reset
Front panel and remote
Freq. Response, CT1
0-90 Hz
Freq. Response, CT2
20-15,000, 190-15,000, 20-90 Hz;
selectable
Current Transformer
EFCT-x series
CT Detection
Open & short detection
Terminals
Plug-in, wire clamping,
24 to 12 AWG (0.2-2.5 mm2)
Communications
Ethernet/IP, DeviceNet™, Profibus ®,
Modbus (optional)
Analog Output
4-20 mA (selectable 0-5 A or
0-100% trip-level setting)
Conformal Coating
Standard feature
DimensionsH 48 mm (1.9”); W 96 mm (3.8”);
D 129 mm (5.0”)
Approvals
UL Listed, CSA, C-Tick (Australian)
5 years
Warranty
Mounting
Panel; Surface and DIN (with optional
AC700-SMK)
www.littelfuse.com/acdc
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
Features & Benefits
Protection Relays
Ground-Fault Protection – Ungrounded AC System
PGR-3100 Series
Ground-Fault Indication System
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
1
Description
The PGR-3100 indicates the presence of voltage on each
phase of a three-phase system. The LEDs on the panel
illuminate when voltage is present. When a ground-fault
occurs, the voltage on the faulted phase reduces to ground
potential, causing the LEDs for the faulted phase to dim
and the LEDs for the unfaulted phases to become brighter.
Ungrounded ac systems are required by the National
Electrical Code (NEC®) Article 250.21(B) and the Canadian
Electrical Code Part 1, Section 10-106 (2) to have ground
detectors, such as the PGR-3100, installed on the system.
External potential transformers (PTs) can be used to step
down system voltage, allowing the PGR-3100 to be applied to
any system voltage. PTs are not required for system voltages
up to 600 Vac. Also available mounted in NEMA 4 enclosure.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Features & Benefits
UNGROUNDED
SUPPLY
A
Features
B
NEC® and CEC
B Code
compliant
C
BENEFITS
Meets National Electrical Code (NEC®) Article
250.21(B) and Canadian Electrical Code Part 1,
Section 10-106 (2) requirements for ungrounded
systems
Phase LEDs
Indicates presence of a ground fault and the
faulted phase as well as phase-to-ground
voltage on an energized bus
Redundant LEDs
Redundant long-life LEDs (two per phase) to
ensure reliability
Lamp test button
Verifies LEDs are operating
PGR-3100
(Ground-Fault
Indication System)
L1
Specifications
Input Voltage
Up to 600 Vac 50/60 Hz
2
Indicator Off Voltage
< 30 Vac line to ground
DimensionsH 88.9 mm (3.5”);
W 108 mm (4.3”);
D 54 mm (2.1”)
Test ButtonLocal
Approvals
CSA certified, UL Listed
Conformally Coated
Standard feature
Warranty
5 years
MountingPanel
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
MOUNTING
PGR-3100
Panel mount
PGR-3100-PNL-00
Wall-mount enclosure style
www.littelfuse.com/
www.littelfuse.com/pgr-3100
22
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Ground-Fault Protection – Ungrounded AC System
PGR-3200 Series
Ground-Fault Protection System
1
The PGR-3200 can also be used on a grounded system to
monitor the insulation for damage, while the power system
is de-energized. The mode-of-operation terminals (27-28)
are connected to the circuit breaker or contactor auxiliary
contacts to toggle the relay off when the contactor or breaker
is closed.
Features & Benefits
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Features
A
NEC® and CEC Code
compliant
B
Output contact
(50 kΩ)
C
Output contact
(10 kΩ)
Analog output
(0 - 1 mA)
DIN-rail or surface
mount
A
L2
(Ground-Fault
Protection System)
A
PGH Series High-Tension Coupler
A PGH Series high-tension coupler is required
for systems between 1,300 V and 6,000 V.
PGA-0510 Analog Ohm Meter
Optional PGA-0510 Analog Meter allows
for metering of insulation resistance.
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 148.
Ordering Information
Specifications
Ordering Number
Control power
PGR-3200
240 Vac
PGR-3200-120
120 Vac
accessories
requirement
page
PGH Series
Required >1,300 V
117
PGA-0510
Optional
119
IEEE Device Numbers
Undervoltage Relay (27)
Ground Detector Relay (64)
See ordering information
Input Voltage
DimensionsH 75 mm (3”); W 100 mm (3.9”); D 110 mm (4.3”)
Resistance RatingsInsulation warning (30 k Ω and 50 k Ω)
Insulation alarm (10 k Ω)
Contact Operating ModeNon-fail-safe
Test ButtonLocal
Reset Button
Local and remote
Output Contacts
Two Form C
Analog Output
0-1 mA
Conformally Coated
Consult factory
Warranty
5 years
Mounting
DIN, Surface
Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. To convert to a resistance
grounded system, see the neutral-grounding-resistors packages on pages 39 and 40.
Also see system overview section starting at page 128.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Flexible options for ease of installation
Accessories
PGR-3200
L1
BENEFITS
Meets National Electrical Code (NEC®) Article
250.21(B) and Canadian Electrical Code Part 1,
Section 10-106 (2) requirements for ungrounded
systems
Form C output contact for alarming when the
insulation resistance is below 50 kΩ
Form C output contact for tripping when the
insulation resistance is below 10 kΩ
Provides means for connecting to an optional
meter (PGA-0510) or control system
23
www.littelfuse.com/pgr-3200
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
Description
The PGR-3200 detects ground faults by continuously
monitoring the insulation integrity of ungrounded electrical
systems. The relay monitors the insulation for damage and
assists with predictive maintenance and troubleshooting of
developing ground faults by providing two warning and an
alarm level. The PGR-3200 operates on one- or three-phase
ungrounded systems up to 6 kV.
Protection Relays
Insulation Monitoring
T3200 Series
Two-Channel Insulation-Monitoring Relay
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
1
Description
The T3200 Insulation-Monitoring Relay is designed for
continuous insulation monitoring on three-phase insulated
networks on board ships. The relay continuously monitors
two systems galvanically separated from each other, e.g.
the busbar and the lighting system, or two busbar systems.
The unit features two output relays for alarm purposes and
two analog outputs for instrument reading. Instruments are
available from Littelfuse Selco as standard-sized switchboard
instruments. The T3200 carries the CE label and has been
approved by major marine classification societies.
Features & Benefits
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Features
L1
L2
L3
1
2
3
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
5
6
7
8
9
10
SYS. 1
T3200
(Double Insulation
Monitoring Relay)
13
15
11
SYS. 1
SYS. 2
SYS. 2
COM
INS. 1
INS. 2
Visual indication of power,
Provides quick and concise status information
pick-up, and output trip
E2323
(Megaohmmeter)
A
–
+
18
19
20
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
1-3 Terminals
230 V
–
T3200.0020
T3200.0030
T3200.0050
450 V
480 V
110 V
400 V
415 V
100 V
T3200.0060
127 V
120 V
Dimension
page
E2323.0010 Megaohmmeter
96 x 96 mm
115
E2333.0010 Megaohmmeter
144 x144 mm
115
Accessories
A
www.littelfuse.com/t3200
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
Combined monitoring of
2 independent systems
Economic solution and occupying less space in
the switch panel
Available with separate
24 Vdc supply
Safe operation. Maintains protection regardless
of system voltage failure
Galvanic isolated inputs
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
DIN-rail or screw- mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
Easy installation
InsulationLevel 0-5 MΩ
Delay 1-10 sec.
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
80-110%
Consumption
Max. 2 VA
Frequency Range
45-65Hz
Measuring Voltage
15 Vdc
Instrument Output
0-1 mA
Instrument Resistance Max. 100 Ω
Output relays
Normally de-energized; non-fail-safe
Contact Ratings
AC: 400 V, 2 A, 250 VA; DC: 110 V, 2 A, 100 W
Overall Accuracy
±5% of preset value
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.75”); W 100 mm (3.94”); D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
Other voltages are available on request.
accessories
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply (up
to 690 Vac)
Specifications
2-3 Terminals
T3200.0010
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfils marine class
requirement)
E2323 Megaohmmeter
Flush mounted units designed for connection
with the T3200 for instrument readings.
24
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Ground-Fault Ground-Continuity Detection
SE-502 Series
Ground-Fault Ground-Continuity Detector
1
The SE-502 Ground-Fault Ground-Continuity Detector provides
Class-A GFCI trip level and trip times for personnel protection.
As little as 5 mA of ground-fault current can be detected, and the
internal neutral-grounding resistor limits the maximum ground-fault
current to 100 mA. The SE-502 can be used on both energized and
de-energized systems, and will continuously monitor neutral
continuity, detect a load-side grounded neutral, and is capable of
ground proving. These features make the SE-502 ideal for use with
120/208 V portable generators and in heat-trace applications.
Features & Benefits
Features
Sensitive 5 mA groundfault detection
Internal neutralgrounding resistor
Simplified Circuit Diagram
120/208 V
Generator
Neutral-to-ground
connection monitoring
On- and off-line
monitoring
A
G
B
120-V
Loads
Output contacts
C
N
Specifications
IEEE Device Numbers
Ground (Earth) Detector Relay (64)
Lockout Relay (86)
Open-Neutral Detector Relay (95)
Input Voltage
120 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Dimensions
H 75 mm (3.0")
W 100 mm (4.0")
D 113 mm (4.4")
Trip Level Settings
5 ± 0.9 mA
Trip Time Settings
Class A GFCI to 25 ms maximum
Contact Operating Mode Trip: fail-safe or non-fail-safe
Alarm: fail-safe
Reset Button
Standard feature plus remote input
Output Contacts
Two Form C
Warranty
5 years
Mounting
DIN, Surface
SE-502 SERIES
(Ground-Fault
Ground-Continuity Detector)
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Control power
SE-502-01
120 Vac
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
BENEFITS
Can be used with an appropriate breaker to
provide Class A GFCI people protection
Limits maximum ground-fault current to 100 mA,
creates a safer system and elminates arc-flash
ground-fault hazards
Can detect a hazardous ungrounded condition and
trip or alarm
Can detect a ground fault when the system is
energized or de-energized
Two Form C output contacts for alarming or
tripping purposes
25
www.littelfuse.com/se-502
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
Description
Protection Relays
Ground-Fault Protection–Grounded Systems
SE-701 Series (PGR-5701)
Ground-Fault Monitor
Description
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
1
The SE-701 is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for resistanceand solidly-grounded systems. In addition to common systems, it is
uniquely suited for use on systems with significant harmonic content.
The SE-701 can provide main-plant protection, feeder-level protection,
or individual-load protection. Proper current transformer selection
provides the desired pickup range. The output contacts can be
connected for use in protective tripping circuits or in alarm indication
circuits. The analog output can be used with a PLC or a meter.
Features & Benefits
Features
BENEFITS
Adjustable pickup
(1-99%)
Adjustable time delay
(50 ms - 2.5 s)
Analog output
(0 - 5 V)
Trip setting based on input CT primary, allows use with
any CT. Minimum 50 mA with EFCT Series.
Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system
coordination
Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for
operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits
Allows for connecting an optional meter (PGA-0500) or a
control system
CT-Loop monitoring
Alarms when CT is not connected
Selectable DFT or peak
detection filtering
Compatible with variable-speed drives
Harmonic filtering
Eliminates nuisance tripping
Non-volatile trip
memory
Retains trip state while de-energized to simplify
troubleshooting
Microprocessor based
No calibration required, saves on maintenance cost
Allows operation in application where one side of PT is
faulted, provides flexibility for numerous applications
Output contacts
Simplified Circuit Diagram
CT A
A
GROUNDED B
SUPPLY
C
Universal power supply
Accessories
A
SE-701 SERIES
L1
(Ground-Fault Monitor)
L2
B
Ground-Fault Current Transformer
Required current transformer model depends on
application. We offer a variety of sensitive CTs with
5- and 30-A primaries.
PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter
Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays
ground-fault current as a percentage of the CT
primary rating.
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 149.
Ordering Information
Specifications
Ordering Number
control power
SE-701-0D
12/24 Vdc
SE-701-0T
48 Vdc
SE-701-0U
120/240 Vac/Vdc
SE-701-03
24 Vac
accessories
requirement
page
Current Transformer
Required
114
PGA-0500
Optional
119
PMA-55, PMA-60
Optional
110
SE-EFVC Voltage Clamp
Optional
See website
Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory.
www.littelfuse.com/
www.littelfuse.com/se-701
IEEE Device Numbers
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
Input Voltage
See ordering information
Dimensions
H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5")
Trip Level Settings
1-99% CT-Primary Rating
Trip Time Settings
0.05-2.5 s
Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe
Harmonic Filtering
Standard feature
Test Button
Standard feature
Reset Button
Standard feature
CT-Loop Monitoring
Standard feature
Output Contacts
Isolated Form A and Form B
Approvals
CSA certified, UL Listed, CE (European Union),
C-Tick (Australian)
Analog Output
0-5 V
Conformally coated
Consult factory
Warranty
5 years
Mounting
DIN, Surface (standard)
Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter)
26
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Ground-Fault Protection–Grounded Systems
SE-703 Series
Earth-Leakage Monitor
1
Features & Benefits
Features
Adjustable pickup
(25 - 500 mA)
Adjustable time delay
(50 - 500 ms)
Analog output
(0 - 5 V)
CT-Loop monitoring
BENEFITS
Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of low-level
protection and system coordination
Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system
coordination
Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for
operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits
Allows for connecting an optional meter (PGA-0500) or
control system
Alarms when CT is not connected
Selectable contact
operating mode
Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes
allow connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil
Harmonic filtering
Non-volatile trip
memory
Microprocessor based
Universal
power supply
Eliminates nuisance tripping
Retains trip state while de-energized to simplify
troubleshooting
No calibration required, saves maintenance cost
Allows operation in application where one side of PT is
faulted, provides flexibility for numerous applications
Output contacts
Simplified Circuit Diagram
CT A
GROUNDED
SUPPLY
A
B
C
Accessories
SE-703 SERIES
L1
(Earth-Leakage Monitor)
A
EFCT Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer
Required zero-sequence current transformer
specifically designed for low-level detection.
B
PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter
Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays groundfault current as a percentage of the set-point or 5 A.
L2
Ordering Information
Specifications
Ordering Number
control power
SE-703-0D
12/24 Vdc
SE-703-0T
48 Vdc
SE-703-0U
120/240 Vac/Vdc
SE-703-03
24 Vac
accessories
requirement
page
EFCT Series
Required
114
PGA-0500
Optional
119
PMA-55, PMA-60
Optional
110
SE-EFVC Voltage Clamp
Optional
See website
Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
IEEE Device Numbers
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
Input Voltage
See ordering information
H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5")
Dimensions
Trip Level Settings
25-500 mA
Trip Time Settings
50-500 ms
Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe
Harmonic Filtering
Standard feature
Test Button
Standard feature
Reset Button
Standard feature
CT-Loop Monitoring
Standard feature
Output Contacts
Isolated Form A and Form B
CSA certified, UL Listed, CE (European Union),
Approvals
C-Tick (Australian)
Compliance
AS/NZS 2081:2002
Analog Output
0-5 V
Conformally coated
Consult factory
5 years
Warranty
Mounting
DIN, Surface (standard)
Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter)
27
www.littelfuse.com/se-703
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
Description
The SE-703 is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for resistanceand solidly-earthed systems. It offers sensitive ground-fault detection as
low as 25 mA and can be used on systems with significant harmonic
content. The SE-703 provides feeder-level protection or individual-load
protection. The output contacts can be connected for use in protective
tripping circuits or in alarm indication circuits. The analog output can be
used with a PLC or a meter. The SE-703 is specifically designed to be
Australian AS/NZS 2081 compliant.
Protection Relays
Ground-Fault Protection–Grounded Systems
SE-704 Series (PGR-4704)
Earth-Leakage Monitor
Description
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
1
The SE-704 is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for resistanceand solidly-grounded systems. It offers very sensitive ground-fault
detection as low as 10 mA and can be used on systems with
significant harmonic content. The SE-704 provides feeder-level
protection or individual-load protection. The output contacts can be
connected for use in protective tripping circuits or in alarm indication
circuits. The analog output can be used with a PLC or a meter.
Features & Benefits
Features
Adjustable pickup
(10 mA - 5 A)
Adjustable time delay
(30 ms - 2.0 s)
Analog output
(0 - 5 V)
CT-Loop monitoring
BENEFITS
Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of low-level
protection and system coordination
Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system
coordination
Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for
operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits
Allows for connecting an optional meter (PGA-0500) or
control system
Alarms when CT is not connected
Selectable contact
operating mode
Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes
allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil
Harmonic filtering
Non-volatile trip
memory
Microprocessor based
Universal
power supply
Eliminates nuisance tripping
Retains trip state when de-energized to simplify
troubleshooting
No calibration required saves maintenance cost
Allows operation in application where one side of PT is
faulted, provides flexibility for numerous applications
Output contacts
Simplified Circuit Diagram
CT
A
A
GROUNDED
SUPPLY
B
C
Accessories
A
SE-704 SERIES
L1
(Earth-Leakage Monitor)
L2
B
SE-CS30 Series Ground-Fault Transformer
Required zero-sequence current transformer
specifically designed for low level detection. Flux
conditioner is included to prevent saturation.
PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter
Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays groundfault current as a percentage of the set-point or 5 A.
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 149.
Specifications
Ordering Information
IEEE Device Numbers
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
Input Voltage
See ordering information
Dimensions
H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5")
Trip Level Settings
10 mA-5.0 A
Trip Time Settings
30-2000 ms
Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe
Harmonic Filtering
Standard feature
Test Button
Standard feature
Reset Button
Standard feature
CT-Loop Monitoring
Standard feature
Output Contacts
Isolated Form A and Form B
Approvals
UL Listed (File No. E340889), CSA, C-Tick (Australian)
Analog Output
0-5 V & 0-1 mA
Conformally coated
Consult factory
Warranty
5 years
Mounting
DIN, Surface (standard)
Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter)
Ordering Number
control power
SE-704-OD
12/24 Vdc
SE-704-OT
48 Vdc
SE-704-OU
120/240 Vac/Vdc
SE-704-03
24 Vac
accessories
requirement
page
SE-CS30 Series
Required
114
PGA-0500
Optional
119
PMA-55, PMA-60
Optional
110
Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory.
www.littelfuse.com/se-704
28
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Earth-Fault Protection–Solidly-Grounded Systems
T2800 Series
Earth-Fault Relay
1
Features & Benefits
Features
Simplified Circuit Diagram
12
13
SEC x 10
15 LATCHING
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
Visual indication of power,
Provides quick and concise status information
pick-up, and output trip
1
2
3
16 OFF
18
I x 10
19 N
7
8
9
10
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfils marine class
requirement)
T2800
(Earth-Fault
Relay)
5
6
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply
(up to 690 Vac)
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs
Wide range of combined
current and delay
settings
Enables versatile use as earth fault relay or
standard overcurrent relay. Combining more units
offers economic alternative to relays with inverse
time response.
Galvanic isolated Iinputs
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
DIN-rail or screw- mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
Easy installation
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
T2800.00
T2800.01
T2800.02
T2800.04
T2800.05
T2800.08
Terminals
1-3
230 V
450 V
127 V
24V DC+AC
480 V
230 V
2-3
400 V
120 V
415 V
Specifications
IN
Trip Level
0.02-0.2 x IN or 0.2-2 x IN
Delay
0.1-1.0 sec. or 1.0-10 sec.
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
60-110%
Voltage 5 VA at UN
Consumption
Current 0.3 VA at IN
Continuous Current
2 x IN
Frequency Range
45-400 Hz
Output Relay
Normally energized, latching, resetable
Contact Rating
AC: 400 V, 5 A, 2000 VA
DC: 150 V, 5 A, 150 W
Overall Accuracy
±5%
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
Dielectric Test 2500 V
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1, EN50081-2,
EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”); D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
1A
Other combinations and voltages are available on request.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
29
www.littelfuse.com/t2800
.
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
Description
The T2800 Earth Fault Relay is part of the T-Line series with
modular units for protection, control and monitoring of
generators. The T2800 detects the magnitude of the current
and, if this exceeds the preset level (0.02-2 x IN), the pick-up
LED will indicate and the delay timer will be started. After the
preset time (0.1-10 sec.) has expired the output relay and the
corresponding LED will be activated, provided that the current
level was exceeded for the entire delay time. The T2800 has
a normally energized output relay. The relay is a latching relay
which can be reset or disabled.
Protection Relays
Trailing Cable protection
SE-105, SE-107 Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor..............................31
SE-134C, SE-135 Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor...........................32
SE-145 Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor...........................................33
For More Information…
to download datasheets and manuals on
Trailing Cable Protection Relays, click the
Technical Resourses tab at
www.littelfuse.com/trailingcable
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
30
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Trailing Cable Protection–Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitoring
SE-105, SE-107 Series
Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor
Description
Features & Benefits
Features
Adjustable pickup
(0.5, 2.0, 4.0 A)
Adjustable time delay
(0.1 - 2.0 s)
Harmonic filter
Zener-characteristic
termination assembly
Simplified Circuit Diagram
CT
A
GROUNDED
SUPPLY
B
Conformal coating
M
C
SE-105: selectable UV- or
shunt-trip mode
GC
SE-107: UV-trip mode only
G
TERMINATION
DEVICE
SE-105 SERIES
SE-107 SERIES
L1
L2
Provides reliable ground-check loop verification
Fail-safe ground-check circuit
TRAILING
CABLE
A
BENEFITS
Unit can be used on a wide variety of trailing
cable applications
Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and
system coordination
Prevents false operation
(Ground-Fault
Ground-Check
Monitor)
Ensures ground-check circuit remains safe
even in the event of equipment failure
Additional coating protects circuit boards
against harsh environment
Provides flexibility for different applications
Eliminates chance of unauthorized change to
trip circuit
Accessories
B
A
CT200 Series Current Transformer
Required CT detects ground-fault current.
B
1N5339B Termination Device
5 W axial-lead ground-check termination; included
with SE-105/SE-107.
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 150.
SE-TA6 Termination Assembly
Optional termination assembly with convenient
terminals and mounting holes
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Control power
SE-105
120 Vac
SE-105D
120 Vac/Vdc
SE-105E
240 Vac
SE-107
120 Vac
Specifications
SE-107D
120 Vac/Vdc
SE-107E
240 Vac
IEEE Device Numbers
Checking or Interlocking Relay (3GC),
Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
Input Voltage
See ordering information
DimensionsH 150 mm (5.9”); W 109 mm (4.3”);
D 100 mm (4.0”)
Trip Level Settings
0.5, 2.0, 4.0 A
Trip Time Settings
0.1-1.0 s
Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe (SE-105)
Fail-safe only (SE-107)
Harmonic Filtering
Standard feature
Reset Button
Local and remote
Output Contacts
Isolated Form A
CSA certified, UL Listed, C-Tick (Australian)
Approvals
Conformally Coated
Standard feature
Warranty
5 years
MountingSurface
SE-TA6-SM Stud-Mount Termination Assembly
Optional 50 W ground-check termination that is
robust and compact for submersible pumps. Wire
lead simplifies installation.
Consult manual online for additional ordering options.
accessories
requirement
CT200 Series
Required
114
1N5339B
Included
120
SE-TA6, SE-TA6-SM
Optional
120
SE-TA6A Series
Optional
120
RK-102, RK-105, RK-105I
Optional
118
RK-13
Optional
120
PPI-600V
Optional
120
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
page
31
www.littelfuse.com/se-105, www.littelfuse.com/se-107
e
2
TRAILING CABLE PROTECTION
The SE-105/SE-107 is a combination ground-wire monitor
and ground-fault relay for resistance-grounded systems. It
continuously monitors the integrity of the ground conductor
to protect portable equipment from hazardous voltages
caused by ground faults. The SE-105/SE-107 is an excellent
choice for trailing cables 5 kV and under in underground mining
applications. For higher voltages or long-cable applications, see
the SE-134C/SE-135.
Protection Relays
Trailing Cable Protection–Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitoring
SE-134C, SE-135 Series (PGM-8134)
Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor
Description
2
TRAILING CABLE PROTECTION
The SE-134C/SE-135 is a microprocessor-based, combination
ground-wire monitor and ground-fault relay for resistancegrounded or solidly grounded systems. It continuously monitors
the integrity of the ground conductor to protect portable
equipment from hazardous voltages caused by ground faults.
The SE-134C/SE-135 is field proven in monitoring trailing cables
on large mobile equipment such as drag-lines, mining shovels,
shore-to-ship power cables, dock-side cranes, stacker-reclaimers,
submersible pumps, and portable conveyors.
Features & Benefits
Features
Adjustable pickup
(0.5 - 12.5 A)
Adjustable time delay
(1 - 2.5 s)
A
GROUNDED
SUPPLY
A
TRAILING
CABLE
B
M
C
GC
G
TERMINATION
DEVICE
SE-134C SERIES
SE-135 SERIES
L1
L2
Zener-characteristic
termination assembly
Provides reliable ground-check loop verification
Fail-safe circuits
Ensures ground-check and ground-fault circuits
remain safe even in the event of equipment failure
Conformal coating
Additional coating protects circuit boards against
harsh environment
Output contacts
Simplified Circuit Diagram
CT
Ground-check
LED indication
CT-Loop monitoring
High-induced-ac
rejection
DFT (Harmonic) filter
BENEFITS
Unit can be used on a wide variety of trailing cable
applications
Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system
coordination
Separate annunciation of ground-fault and groundcheck faults
Indication of open or short ground-check wire
makes it easier to find faults
Alarms when CT is not connected
Makes unit suitable for applications with high
voltages and long cables
Prevents false operation
(Ground-Fault
Ground-Check
Monitor)
B
Accessories
A
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 150.
Ordering Information
B
Ordering Number
Control power
SE-134C-00
120/240 Vac/Vdc
SE-134C-10
24-48 Vdc
SE-135-00
120/240 Vac/Vdc
SE-135-00
24-48 Vdc
accessories
requirement
page
SE-CS10 Series
SE-TA6A Series (for SE-134C)
Required
Required
114
120
SE-TA12A/SE-TA12B
Combination (for SE-134C)
Optional
120
se-ta12a Series (for SE-135)
se-IP65CVR-G
Required
Optional
120
121
RK-132
Optional
118
PPI-600V
Optional
120
SE-TA6A Series, SE-TA12A Series
Termination Assembly
Required termination assembly; temperature
compensated.
Specifications
IEEE Device Numbers
Checking or Interlocking Relay (3GC),
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
Input Voltage
60-265 Vac; 80-370 Vdc 15W
DimensionsH 213 mm (8.4"); W 99 mm ( 3.9"); D 132 mm (5.2");
Trip Level Settings
0.5 -12.5 A
Trip Time Settings
0.1-2.5 s
Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe
Harmonic Filtering
Standard feature
Test Button
Standard feature
Reset Button
Standard feature
Output Contacts
Isolated Form A and Form B
Approvals
CSA certified, UL Listed, C-Tick (Australian)
Conformally Coated
Standard feature
Warranty
5 years
Mounting
Panel, Surface
See pg. 112-121 for Current Transformer Selection Guide and Accessory Information.
www.littelfuse.com/
www.littelfuse.com/se-134c,
www.littelfuse.com/se-135
SE-CS10 Series Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
Required zero-sequence current transformer
detects ground-fault current.
32
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Trailing Cable Protection–Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitoring
SE-145 Series
Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor
Description
Features & Benefits
Features
Adjustable pickup
(0.5 - 12.5 A)
Adjustable time delay
(1 - 2.5 s)
Simplified Circuit Diagram
A
CT
B
A
GROUNDED
SUPPLY
Output contacts
Ground-check
LED indication
CT-Loop monitoring
High-induced-ac
rejection
DFT (harmonic) filter
Zener-characteristic
termination assembly
TRAILING
CABLE
B
M
C
GC
G
SE-145
SERIES
1
2
TERMINATION
DEVICE
CHANNEL A
(Ground-Fault
Ground-Check
Monitor)
C
TRIP A
Conformal coating
Accessories
CHANNEL C
LOAD A
Application Diagram
SE-TA12A
G
SUBSTATION
SPLITTER
BOX
GC A
MODEM
COMM
GC
SE-TA12A
L1
L2
GC B
GB
LOAD B
SE-TA12A
GC
G
TRIP C
GC
G
TRIP B
GC C
G
C
GA
SE-145
TRIP A
SE-135
A
GC
B
C
GC
LOAD C
SE-TA12A
GC
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 150.
G
C
C
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Control power
SE-145-00-00
120/240 Vac/Vdc
–
SE-145-00-10
24/48 Vdc
–
SE-145-03-00
120/240 Vac/Vdc
Ethernet
SE-145-03-10
24/48 Vdc
Ethernet
accessories
requirement
page
SE-CS10 or SE-CS40 Series
Required
114
se-ta12a Series
Required
120
RK-132
Optional
118
SE-CS10 Series Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
Zero-sequence current transformer detects
ground-fault current. Provides 0.5 to 12.5 A
trip range.
SE-CS40 Series Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
Zero-sequence current transformer detects
ground-fault current. Provides 2.0 to 50 A
trip range.
SE-TA12A Series Termination Assembly
Required termination assembly; temperature
compensated.
Specifications
Comm
IEEE Device Numbers
Checking or Interlocking Relay (3GC),
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
Input Voltage
60-265 Vac; 80-370 Vdc 15W
DimensionsH 213 mm (8.4"); W 192 mm (7.6"); D 176 mm (7.0");
Trip Level Settings
0.5 -12.5 A or 2.0-50.0 A
Trip Time Settings
0.1-2.5 s
Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe
Standard feature
Harmonic Filtering
Test Button
Standard feature
Reset Button
Standard feature
CommunicationsEthernet Optional
Output Contacts
Isolated Form A and Form B
Conformally Coated
Standard feature
Warranty
5 years
Mounting
Panel, Surface
See pg. 112-121 for Current Transformer Selection Guide and Accessory Information.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Provides reliable ground-check loop verification
Ensures ground-check and ground-fault circuits
remain safe even in the event of equipment failure
Additional coating protects circuit boards against
harsh environment
Fail-safe circuits
CHANNEL B
BENEFITS
Unit can be used on a wide variety of trailing cable
applications
Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system
coordination
Separate annunciation of ground-fault and groundcheck faults
Indication of open or short ground-check wire
makes it easier to find faults
Alarms when CT is not connected
Makes unit suitable for applications with high
voltages and long cables
Prevents false operation
33
www.littelfuse.com/se-145
2
TRAILING CABLE PROTECTION
The SE-145 is a three-channel, microprocessor-based,
combination ground-wire monitor and ground-fault relay for
resistance-grounded or solidly grounded systems. It continuously
monitors the integrity of the ground wire to protect portable
equipment from hazardous voltages caused by ground faults. The
SE-145 is designed for use on three-way splitter box applications.
Protection Relays
Resistance grounding/
ngr monitoring
SE-325 Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor...........................................35
SE-330, SE330HV Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor...................36-37
SE-330AU Neutral-Earthing-Resistor Monitor.........................................38
NGR Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Packages..................................39
PGN Series Pulsing High-Resistance-Grounding System.........................40
For More Information…
on Resistance Grounding and
NGR Monitoring, and to download Why
NGRs Need Contiuous Monitoring, visit
www.littelfuse.com/technicalcenter
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
34
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitoring
SE-325 Series (PGM-8325)
Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor
Description
Features & Benefits
Features
Continuous NGR
monitoring
Ground-fault
Detection
Adjustable pickup
(0.5 - 4 A)
Adjustable time delay
(0.1 - 2 s)
Output contacts
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Selectable contact
operating mode
BENEFITS
Detects resistor failure within seconds, reduces
transient-overvoltage risk, removes risk of groundfault-detection failure
Main or backup protection to detect a ground
fault anywhere on the monitored system
Select greatest sensitivity without
false operation
Adjustable trip delay allows system coordination
Form A output contact
Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating
modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage
breaker coil or alarm system
Accessories
CT
A
ER Series Sensing Resistor
Required interface between the power
system and the SE-325. Eliminates
hazardous voltage levels at the monitor.
B
CT200 Series Current Transformer
Required CT detects ground-fault current.
B
ER SERIES
SE-325 SERIES
(Sensing Resistor)
(NGR Monitor)
NGR
L1
L2
A
RK Series Remote Indication and Reset
Optional panel-mounted remote indication
and reset assemblies. Available in NEMA 1 or
NEMA 4 configurations.
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 151.
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
control power
SE-325
120 Vac
Specifications
SE-325D
120 Vac/Vdc
SE-325E
240 Vac
IEEE Device Numbers
Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N),
Overvoltage (59N), Lockout Relay (86),
Checking Relay (3)
Input Voltage
See ordering information
DimensionsH 150 mm (5.9"); W 109 mm (4.3");
D 100 mm (4.0")
GF Trip Level Settings
0.5-4.0 A
GF Trip Time Settings
0.1-2.0 s
RF Trip-Level Settings
20-400 Vac (≤5 kV systems)
100-2,000 Vac (>5 kV systems)
Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe
Reset Button
Standard feature
Output Contacts
Form A
Approvals
CSA certified, UL Listed, C-Tick (Australian)
Conformally coated
Standard feature
Warranty
5 years
MountingSurface
Consult manual online for additional ordering options.
accessories
requirement
page
CT200 Series
Required
114
ER Series
Required
119
SE-MRE-600
Optional
111
rk-325, rk-325I, rk-302
Optional
118-119
rk-13
Optional
120
NGRM-ENC
Optional
111
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
35
www.littelfuse.com/se-325
3
RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING
The SE-325 Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor is used on
resistance-grounded systems up to 25 kV to monitor the
integrity of the neutral-to-ground path and to detect ground
faults. It measures current and voltage in a transformer or
generator neutral-to-ground connection and continuity of the
neutral-grounding resistor (NGR). The SE-325 coordinates these
three measurements to detect a loose connection, corrosion,
ground fault, or NGR failure, and provides one alarm or trip
output contact.
Protection Relays
Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitoring
SE-330, SE-330HV series (PGR-5330)
Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor
Description
The SE-330 is an advanced ground-fault and neutral-groundingresistor monitoring relay. It measures neutral current, neutral-toground voltage, and neutral-to-ground resistance. It provides
continuous monitoring of the neutral-to-ground path to verify
that the neutral-grounding resistor (NGR) is intact. This is of
utmost importance—an open NGR renders current-sensing
ground-fault protection inoperative and could result in a false
belief that the system is functioning properly. The SE-330 can be
used with low- and medium-voltage transformers and
generators with low- or high-resistance grounding used in
processing, manufacturing, chemical, pulp and paper, petroleum,
and water-treatment facilities. For high-voltage applications, use
the SE-330HV. For applications that require conformance to
Australian standard AS/NZS 2081.3:2002, see the SE-330AU.
RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING
3
Resistor Monitoring
The SE-330 combines the measured values of resistance,
current, and voltage to continuously determine that the NGR
is intact. It is able to detect a resistor failure with or without
a ground fault present. Sensing resistors are matched to the
system voltage and are used to monitor NGRs on systems up
to 72 kV.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Ground-Fault Monitoring
The SE-330 uses an application-appropriate current transformer
to reliably detect ground-fault currents as small as 100 mA. DFT
filtering ensures that false trips due to harmonic noise from
adjustable-speed drives do not occur. Should the resistor open
and a ground fault subsequently occur, the SE-330 will detect
the fault through voltage measurement, while other current-only
sensing relays would be ineffective.
B
CT
ER SERIES
SE-330 SERIES
(Sensing Resistor)
NGR
A
(NGR Monitor)
L1
L2
Pulsing Ground-Fault Location
The SE-330 is capable of controlling a pulsing contactor, which is
used to switch the NGR resistance in a pulsing-compatible NGR
package. The resulting ground-fault current is distinguishable
from charging currents and noise and will only appear upstream
of the ground fault, making fault location fast and easy, even
without isolating feeders or interrupting loads.
For detailed wiring diagram, see adjacent page and page 151.
Ordering Information
POWER
SUPPLY
Ordering
Number
SE-330
SE-330
for all apps.
35 kV or less
SE-330HV
for 72 kV
apps.
-
Comm
X
X
CERTIFICATION
K4 UNIT HEALTHY
CONTACT
X
X
-
0=RS-232
1=RS-232 &
0=120/240 DeviceNet™
Vac/Vdc
2=RS-232 &
Profibus®
2=48 Vdc
3=RS-232 &
Ethernet
Accessories
A
0=CSA, UL, C-Tick 0=Normally Open
1=CSA, UL, CE,
C-Tick
1=Normally Closed
B
NOTE: For Australian applications, see the SE-330AU on pg. 38.
accessories
Requirement
Page
ER Series Sensing Resistor
Current Transformer
se-IP65CVR-G
SE-MRE-600
RK-332
NGRM-ENC
Required
Required
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
119
114
111
111
119
111
www.littelfuse.com/se-330
ER Series Sensing Resistor
Required interface between the power system
and the SE-330/SE-330HV. Eliminates hazardous
voltage levels at the relay.
EFCT Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer
Sensitive ground-fault current detection (5 A primary).
SE-CS30 Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer
Sensitive ground-fault current detection (30 A primary).
Other Current Transformer
For low-resistance NGRs choose a CT primary
approximately equal to the NGR rating.
36
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitoring
Features & Benefits
Features
IEEE #
Continuous NGR monitoring
Ground-fault detection
BENEFITS
3
50G/N, 51G/N,
59N
Detects resistor failure within seconds, reduces transient-overvoltage risk, removes risk of ground-fault-detection failure
3
Main or backup protection to detect a ground fault anywhere on the monitored system
Select greatest sensitivity without false operation
Adjustable time delay (0.1 - 10 s)
Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination
Universal CT compatibility
Allows the use of a CT that gives required ground-fault settings
Output contacts
Two Form C (Ground Fault and Resistor Fault), Two Form A (Trip/Pulse, Healthy)
Analog output (4 - 20 mA)
Allows for connecting an optional PGA-0500 meter or control system
Pulsing output
Control the operation of a pulsing ground-fault-location circuit
Data logging
On-board 10-event recorder helps with system diagnostics
Harmonic filtering (DFT)
Eliminate false trips due to harmonic noise from ASDs
Local communications
RS-232 port to view measured values, log to a PC and check event records
Network communications
Remotely view measured values and event records, reset trips, and cause a remote trip
Software
Selectable contact
operating mode
Selectable reset mode
Calibrate push button
Unit-healthy output
Conformal coating
PC-interface software (SE-MON330) is included
Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil
or alarm circuit
Selectable latching or auto-reset operation
Ensures resistor-failure sensitivity is correct
Verifies SE-330 is operating correctly
Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture
Typical Values
Neutral-Grounding Resistor
System
Voltage
(Volts)
Sensing Resistor
Current
(Amperes)
Resistance
(Ohms)
Model
5
5
5
5
10
15
55
69
277
480
416
554
ER-600VC
ER-600VC
ER-5KV
ER-5KV
ER-15KV
ER-15KV
480
600
2,400
4,160
7,200
14,400
Resistance
(Switch S5 Setting)
20 kΩ
20 kΩ
20 kΩ
20 kΩ
100 kΩ
100 kΩ
Ground-Fault
pickup Level
(Amperes)
VN pickup Level
(Volts)
2.5
2.5
2.5
3
2
3
170
200
800
1,700
170 x 5 = 850
340 x 5 = 1,700
DISCLAIMER: The above table is for illustrative purposes only. Actual values may differ based on a variety of individual system considerations, such as capacitive charging current and coordination study results.
Wiring Diagram
CONTROL
POWER
Specifications
UNIT
HEALTHY
1
2
RESET
3
POWER SYSTEM
NEUTRAL (X0)
15
NEUTRAL-GROUNDINGRESISTOR MONITOR
SE-330 SERIES
SENSING RESISTOR
ER SERIES
(required)
N
G
IEEE Device Numbers
Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N, 59N),
Checking Relay (3), Lockout Relay (86)
Input Voltage
See ordering information
DimensionsH 213 mm (8.4"); W 98 mm (3.9"); D 132 mm (5.2")
GF Trip-Level Settings
2-100% of CT-Primary Rating
GF Trip-Time Settings
0.1-10 s
Vn Trip-Level Settings
20-2,000 Vac (≤5 kV systems)
100-10,000 Vac (>5 kV systems)
Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe (K1)
Harmonic Filtering
Standard feature
Reset Button
Standard feature
Output Contacts
Two Form A and two Form C
Pulsing Circuit
1.0-3.0 s in 0.2 s increments
Approvals
CSA certified, UL Listed,
CE (European Union) optional, C-Tick (Australian)
Communications
RS-232; (standard) DeviceNet™, Profibus®,
Ethernet (optional)
Analog Output
4-20 mA, self or loop powered
Conformally Coated
Standard feature
Warranty
5 years
Mounting
Panel and Surface
12
13
R
6
R
A
7
G
16
17
+24 Vdc 18
ANALOG
OUTPUT
4-20 mA
PULSE
ENABLE
+ 19
20
0 V 21
TRIP OR
PULSING
22
23
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
EFCT FAMILY
(required)
B
8
EFCT
9
1A
10
5A
11
COMMON
24
GROUND
FAULT
25
26
27
RESISTOR
FAULT
28
29
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
37
www.littelfuse.com/se-330
.
RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING
Adjustable pickup (2-100%)
Protection Relays
Neutral-Earthing-Resistor Monitoring
SE-330AU series
Neutral-Earthing-Resistor Monitor
Description
The SE-330AU is an advanced earth-fault and earthing-resistor
monitoring relay for low- and medium-voltage transformers and
generators. It monitors neutral current, neutral-to-earth voltage, and
neutral-to-earth resistance. It provides continuous monitoring of the
neutral-to-earth path to verify that the neutral-earthing resistor (NER)
is intact. This is of utmost importance—an open NER renders
current-sensing earth-fault protection inoperative and could result in a
false belief that the system is functioning properly. The SE-330AU
earth-fault function complies with AS/NZS 2081.3:2002. Outputs
include four relay outputs, an analog output, and an RS-232 interface.
Network communications options are available. For non-AS/NZS 2081
applications, see the SE-330 or SE-330HV.
RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING
3
Resistor Monitoring
The SE-330AU combines the measured values of resistance, current,
and voltage to continuously determine that the NER is intact. It is
able to detect a resistor failure with or without an earth fault present.
Sensing resistors are matched to the system voltage and are used
to monitor NGRs on systems up to 35 kV.
Earth-Fault Monitoring
The SE-330AU uses a 5- or 30-A-primary current transformer to
provide a pickup-setting range of 0.125 to 5 A or 0.75 to 30 A to
comply with AS/NZS 2081.3:2002. DFT filtering ensures that false
trips due to harmonic noise from adjustable-speed drives do not
occur. Open-CT detection is provided.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Accessories
A
B
CT
ER SERIES
SE-330AU
SERIES
(Sensing Resistor)
NER
A
L1
L2
B
(NER Monitor)
ER Series Sensing Resistor
Required interface between the power system
and the SE-330AU. Eliminates hazardous voltage
levels at the relay.
EFCT Series Earth-Fault Current Transformer
Sensitive earth-fault current detection (5 A primary).
SE-CS30 Series Earth-Fault Current Transformer
Sensitive earth-fault current detection (30 A primary).
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Communications
CONTROL POWER
SE-330AU-00-00
SE-330AU-01-00
SE-330AU-02-00
SE-330AU-03-00
RS-232
RS-232 & DeviceNet™
RS-232 & Profibus®
RS-232 & Ethernet
120/240 Vac/Vdc
120/240 Vac/Vdc
120/240 Vac/Vdc
120/240 Vac/Vdc
NOTE: For 48 Vdc Control Power use part numbers SE-330AU-20-00, SE-330AU-21-00,
SE-330AU-22-00 or SE-330AU-23-00 respectively.
accessories
Requirement
Page
ER Series Sensing Resistor
Required
119
Current Transformer
Required
114
se-IP65CVR-G
Optional
111
SE-MRE-600
Optional
111
RK-332
Optional
119
www.littelfuse.com/se-330au
Specifications
Input Voltage
80 to 265 Vac/Vdc or 36 to 72 Vdc
DimensionsH 213 mm (8.4”), W 98 mm (3.9”), D 132 mm (5.2”)
GF Trip-Level Settings 0.125 to 30 A
GF Trip-Time Settings 0.1 to 0.5 s
Vn Trip-Level Settings 20-2,000 Vac (≤5 kV systems)
100-10,000 Vac (>5 kV systems)
Output Contacts
Two Form A, Two Form C
Operating Mode
Fail-Safe
Harmonic Filtering
Standard feature
Reset
Front panel push button and remote input
Approvals
CSA certified; C-Tick (Australian)
Communications
RS-232; (standard) DeviceNet™, Profibus®,
Ethernet (optional)
Analog Output
4-20 mA, self or loop powered
Conformal Coating
Standard feature
Warranty
5 years
Mounting
Panel, Surface (optional)
38
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Neutral Grounding
NGR Series
Neutral-Grounding-Resistor System
Description
Neutral-Grounding Resistors (NGRs) are used to ground power
systems by inserting a resistor between the system neutral and
ground. This lowers the prospective ground-fault current to a
predetermined value.
3
Applications
Resistance grounding is typically applied on transformers and
generators where safety and continuity of service are important. A
faulted feeder may remain in operation until it is safe to repair the fault,
where allowed by the local electrical code.
Benefits
g
g
g
g
Eliminate phase-to-ground arc-flash incidents
Eliminate transient overvoltages
Reduced point-of-fault damage
Can provide continuity of service during a ground fault
Features
g
g
g
For information about the NGRM-ENC NGR Monitor Control Panel,
see page 111.
g
R-series Sensing Resistor and Current Transformer required for
E
NGR monitoring come pre-installed inside the enclosure
Can be packaged with a zigzag transformer to resistance ground an
ungrounded delta system, or a system with an inaccessible neutral
SE-325 or SE-330 NGR Monitor can provide continuous NGR
monitoring and ground-fault protection; NGR failure will render
current-sensing ground-fault protection inoperative
Stainless steel resistor elements prevent corrosion
Ordering Information
System
Line-Neutral
voltage
ngr
X
ngr
current
–
X
drawing
number
duty cycle
–
X
–
XXXX-RX
monitoring components
in ngr enclosure
–
C = continuous
10 = 10 seconds
30 = 30 seconds
277, 347,…44000
AMPERES
60 = 60 seconds
Assigned
by factory
X
X
ER/ = Includes
Sensing Resistor
CT = CT200
Blank = No
Sensing Resistor
E26 = EFCT-26
–
X
–
X
N3R = Galvanized
NEMA 3R
E1 = EFCT-1
C26 = SE-CS30-26
C70 = SE-CS30-70
Contact factory
for other choices.
enclosure
style
other
options
ZZ = Zigzag
transformer
(Note: may be
in separate N3R
enclosure)
N3RSS = Stainless
Steel NEMA 3R
Blank = None
OPEN = None
Note: Order SE-325, SE-330, and SE-701 separately. See pages 35, 36 and 26, respectively.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
39
www.littelfuse.com/ngr
RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING
A properly designed resistance-grounded system provides benefits
over both ungrounded and solidly grounded systems. Because the
system is grounded, transient overvoltages do not occur and groundfault current can flow, allowing it to be detected and measured. Also,
because a resistor is used to ground the system, the very large and
destructive ground-fault currents of solidly grounded systems are
absent. Ground-fault relays (such as the SE-701) can be used on
feeders to provide selective coordination and the ability to quickly
locate or isolate the fault.
Protection Relays
Pulsing High-Resistance Grounding
PGN series
Pulsing High-Resistance-Grounding System
Description
The PGN Pulsing High-Resistance-Grounding Systems are used to ground power systems
by inserting a resistor between system neutral and ground to lower the ground-fault
current to a predetermined value.
3
RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING
Properly sized Resistance Grounding Systems solve two problems of ungrounded
systems—transient overvoltages and the difficulty of locating ground faults. They also
significantly reduce damage caused by ground faults on solidly grounded systems. The
current limitation eliminates the Arc-Flash Hazards associated with the first ground fault.
The hazards associated with phase-to-phase electrical faults must still be mitigated by
using current-limiting fuses and other methods. High-Resistance Grounding Systems
include all necessary components to convert to a resistance grounded system.
Options include a pulsing circuit and SE-701 Ground-Fault Monitors to provide a method
for locating ground faults.
Applications
High-resistance grounding is typically applied on transformers and generators where
safety and continuity of service are paramount. Since the ground-fault current is typically
5 A or less, there is no Arc-Flash Hazard associated with the first ground fault and the
faulted feeder can remain in operation until it is safe to repair the fault, when allowed by
the electrical code.
Benefits
g
g
g
g
Eliminate phase-to-ground arc-flash incidents
Eliminate transient overvoltages
Reduced point-of-fault damage
Pulsing ground-fault current to aid in fault location
Features
g
g
g
g
g
g
Ordering Information
Configuration
PGN – 3
X
0 = Other
Sys. Voltage
ulsing current 5 A above the selected resistor current is standard; other pulsing
P
options available upon request
All PGN systems include resistor monitoring, ground-fault detection, and integrated
pulsing control with the SE-330 NGR Monitor
ER-series Sensing Resistor and Current Transformer required for NGR monitoring come
pre-installed inside the enclosure
Optional test circuit to simulate a ground fault
Continuous-rated resistors
Stainless steel resistor elements prevent corrosion
Res. Current
X
0 = Other
X
Enclosure Type
–
# of Feeders
X
X
CUSTOM
–
XXX
0 = Other
0 = Other
0=0
000 = Standard
XXX = Drawing #
W = Wye
1 = 240 V
1=5A
N = No Enclosure
1=1
D = Delta
2 = 480/277 V
2 = 10 A
F = Outdoor Free Standing
2=2
3 = 600/347 V
3 = 15 A
W = Outdoor Wall Mount
3=3
4 = 2400/1390 V
4 = 20 A
4=4
5 = 4160/2400 V
5 = 25 A
5=5
6=6
7=7
8=8
9 = Other
www.littelfuse.com/pgn
40
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
motor & pump protection
PGR-6100 Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay..................................42
PGR-6130 Electronic Overload Relay ...................................................... 43
PGR-6150 Motor Protection System...................................................44-45
MPU-32 Motor Protection Unit...........................................................46-47
MPS Motor Protection System ..........................................................48-49
MPU-32-X69X Motor Protection Relay Retrofit Kit ................................50
MPS-469X Motor Protection System Retrofit Kit ...................................51
PGR-6800 Pump Protection Relay ............................................................52
For More Information…
and to download our Motor Protection
Brochure or White Paper, click on
Technical Resources at
www.littelfuse.com/motorprotection
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
41
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Protection Relays
Motor Protection–Basic (PGR 6000 Family)
PGR-6100 Series (GFR4000)
Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay
Description
The PGR-6100 combines the features of a ground-fault
protection relay and insulation monitor into one unit.
It protects against ground faults by monitoring insulation
resistance when the motor is de-energized and by monitoring
ground-fault current when the motor is energized. The
PGR-6100 features two separate analog outputs for optional
current and ohm meters, and two separate alarm relays.
It operates on one- or three-phase solidly grounded,
resistance grounded and ungrounded systems up to 6 kV.
MOTOR PROTECTION
4
Features & Benefits
Features
Adjustable GF pickup
(10 mA - 3 A)
Adjustable insulation
pickup (250 kΩ - 2 MΩ)
Adjustable time delay
(50 ms - 1.0 s)
Simplified Circuit Diagram
CT A
A
GROUNDED
SUPPLY
Output contacts
B
Analog outputs
(0 - 1 mA)
CT-Loop monitoring
C
Selectable contact
operating mode
D
BENEFITS
Trip setting provides a wide range of low-level
protection and system coordination
Customizable insulation resistance setpoints
for maximum protection
Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and
system coordination
Two Form C output contacts for ground fault and
insulation-resistance fault
Two analog outputs indicate insulation
resistance and ground-fault current
Alarms when CT is not connected
Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating
modes allows connection to shunt or
undervoltage breaker coil
Accessories
PGR-6100 SERIES
(Motor Ground-Fault
& Insulation Relay)
L1
A
PGC-5000 Series Ground-Fault Transformers
Required zero-sequence current transformer
specifically designed for low level detection. Flux
conditioner is included to prevent saturation.
B
PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter
PGA-0510 Analog Ohm Meter
Optional panel-mounted meters display
ground-fault current as a percentage of the
set-point and insulation resistance.
L2
C
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 152.
D
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
control power
PGR-6100-120
120 Vac
PGR-6100-240
240 Vac
Specifications
accessories
requirement
page
PGC-5000 Series
Required
115
PGH Family
Required >1300 V
117
PGA-0500
Optional
119
PGA-0510
Optional
119
IEEE Device Numbers
Input Voltage
Dimensions
Response delay
Contact Operating Mode
Harmonic Filtering
Test Button
Reset Button
CT-Loop Monitoring
Output Contacts
Analog Output
Approvals
Warranty
Mounting
Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory.
www.littelfuse.com/pgr-6100
PGH Family High Tension Couplers
Required (for systems >1,300 V) PGH Family
high-tension coupler must be connected between
the phase conductor and the PGR-3200.
42
Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N),
Ground detector (64), Alarm Relay (74)
See ordering information
H 75 mm (3”); W 99.7 mm (3.9”); D 110 mm (4.3”)
< 250 ms
Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe
Standard feature
Standard feature
Standard feature
Standard feature
Two Form C
0-1 mA
UL Listed, GFR4000 only; PGR-6100, in Progress
5 years
DIN, Surface
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Motor Protection – Electronic Overload (PGR 6000 Family)
PGR-6130 Series
Electronic Overload Relay
Description
Features & Benefits
Features
Simplified Circuit Diagram
M
PTC
L1
No CTs required
BENEFITS
No current transformers required for currents up to
91 A, simplifies installation and reduces cost
Adjustable
trip settings
Adjustable overload trip class setting from 5 to 35
to match motor characteristics
Output contacts
Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for
operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits
Remote indication
Allows remote cause-of-trip indication and reset
Overload
Extends motor life and prevents insulation failures
and fires
Phase loss/Phase
sequence
Unbalance (current)
PGR-6130 SERIES
(Electronic Overload Relay)
L2
PTC overtemperature
Detects unhealthy supply conditions
Prevents overheating due to unbalanced phases
Detect high ambient or blocked ventilation and
single phasing; prevents shaft/pump damage
Accessories
PGB-6130
(Remote Indication
and Reset Assembly)
A
A
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 152.
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
CONTROL POWER
Full-load current
PGR-6131-24
24 Vdc
4-16.7 A
PGR-6131-120
120 Vac
4-16.7 A
PGR-6131-240
240 Vac
4-16.7 A
PGR-6132-24
24 Vdc
15-40.5 A
PGR-6132-120
120 Vac
15-40.5 A
PGR-6132-240
240 Vac
15-40.5 A
PGR-6133-24
24 Vdc
40-91 A
PGR-6133-120
120 Vac
40-91 A
PGR-6133-240
240 Vac
40-91 A
Specifications
Protective Functions
Overload (49, 51)
(IEEE Device Numbers)
Phase sequence (46)
Overcurrent (51)
PTC overtemperature (49)
Unbalance (current) (46)
Phase loss (current) (46)
Input Voltage
See ordering information
Frequency
50, 60 Hz
DimensionsH 83 mm (3.3”); W 78 mm (3.1”); D 99 mm (3.9”)
Test Button
Standard feature
Reset Button
Standard feature
Output Contacts
Isolated Form A and Form B
Approvals
UL listed
Warranty
5 years
MountingDIN
NOTE: External CTs can be used for full-load currents >91 A.
accessories
requirement
page
PGB-6130
Optional
119
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
PGB-6130 Remote Indication
and Reset Assembly
Optional remote indication of overcurrent,
phase unbalance, phase loss, phase sequence
and overtemperature. Remote reset included.
43
www.littelfuse.com/pgr-6130
4
MOTOR PROTECTION
The PGR-6130 Electronic Overload Relay provides protection
for small three-phase motors up to 1,000 Vac. No current
transformers are required for currents up to 91 A. The
protective functions include overload, overtemperature, phase
unbalance, phase loss, and phase sequence. The PGR-6130
Electronic Overload Relay offers dependable protection and can
be used on pumps, conveyor belts, ventilation fans and other
small-motor applications that require standard protection.
Protection Relays
Motor Protection–Standard (PGR 6000 Family)
PGR-6150 Series
Motor Protection System
Description
The PGR-6150 Motor Protection System provides 13 protective
functions by utilizing both current and temperature inputs. It is
a modular system consisting of the control unit and an operator
interface (PGR-6150-OPI). The OPI allows programming and
displays metered values. The PGR-6150 is used to provide
current- and temperature-based protection, metering and data
logging for three-phase motors used in industrial environments.
Current transformers are not required for currents up to 25 A.
MOTOR PROTECTION
4
1 Control Unit
g
g
1
g
g
g
g
g
g
Integrated phase CTs (external for applications > 25 A)
Ground-fault CT input
One PTC input and one programmable input
Two programmable output contacts
Eight status LEDs
RS-485 Communications
DIN-rail mountable
PC interface software
A Operator Interface (optional)
A
g
g
Simplified Circuit Diagram
B
g
GF CT
g
g
M
g
arge, bright, LCD display
L
(2 x 20 alphanumeric characters)
Keypad for menu selection (system parameters,
measurements, and fault reports)
Displays metered values
Six user-programmable LEDs
Powered by Control Unit
1 meter (39-inch) connection cable included
PTC
L1
L2
Accessories
PGR-6150
(Motor Protection System)
A
PGR-6150-OPI Operator Interface
Optional Operator Interface for displaying
metered values and programming
B
PGC-6000 Series Ground-Fault Transformer
Optional zero-sequence current transformer,
used to measure ground-fault current.
Required for applications >25 A.
1
PGR-6150-OPI
(Operator Interface) A
For detailed wiring diagram, see adjacent page and page 152.
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
CONTROL POWER
PGR-6150-24 (Control Unit)
24/48 Vdc
PGR-6150-120 (Control Unit)
120/240 Vac/dc
PGR-6150-OPI (Operator Interface)
Powered by Control Unit
NOTE: External CTs can be used for full-load currents >25 A.
accessories
Requirement
Page
PGC-6000 Series
Optional
115
www.littelfuse.com/pgr-6150
44
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Motor Protection–Standard (PGR 6000 Family)
Features & Benefits
Features
IEEE #
BENEFITS
49, 51
No current transformers are required for currents < 25 A
Adjustable overload trip class setting from 5 to 45 to match motor characteristics
Programmable digital input
Two programmable Form C output contacts for operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits
Extends motor life and prevents insulation failures and fires
Detects catastrophic failures and fires; extends motor life
Detects low level or no-load conditions
Prevents overheating due to unbalanced phases
Detects unhealthy supply conditions
Detect high ambient or blocked ventilation and single phasing; prevents shaft/pump damage
Provides protection through starting, running, overload, and cooling cycles
RS-485 communications to remotely display metered values
49, 51
50, 51
37
46
46
49
Dynamic Thermal Modeling
For every 10°C over
insulation temperature
rating the motor loses
50% of its life span.
Without Thermal Memory
Motor
Traditional
Overload
Motor
PGR-6150
Temperature
,
ed ife
us r l
ca to
is mo
e
ag es
m eas
Da ecr
d
!
Temperature
With Thermal Memory
Maximum Operating Temperature
ts wn
se o
re d d
ad le
lo coo
r
ve as
lO h
na tor
tio o
di re m
a
Tr efo
b
Maximum Operating Temperature
Time
Time
Wiring Diagram
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
PGC-6000 SERIES
Specifications
(optional)
PTC overtemperature (49)
Protective Functions Overload (49, 51)
Failure to accelerate
(IEEE Device Numbers) Phase sequence (46)
Overcurrent (50, 51)
RTD temperature (49)
Jam
Unbalance (current) (46)
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Starts per hour (66)
Undercurrent (37)
Phase loss (current) (46)
Input Voltage
110-230 Vac/Vdc; 24/48 Vdc, 5 W
AC Measurements
RMS, 16 samples/cycle
Frequency
50, 60 Hz
Dimensions
(Control Unit)
H 83 mm (3.3”); W 78 mm (3.1”); D 99 mm (3.9”)
(Operator Interface) H 56 mm (2.2”); W 106 mm (4.2”); D 22.8 mm (0.9”)
Output Contacts
Two Form C
Communications
RS-485 with Modbus® RTU
Approvals
Consult factory
Warranty
5 years
MountingDIN (Control Unit); Panel (Operator Interface)
B
3 PHASE CTs
BUILT INTO RELAY.
EXTERNAL CTs
CONTROL
REQUIRED FOR
POWER
FLA >25 A.
TEMPERATURE
INPUT
+
3
L1 L2/N
4
DIGITAL
INPUTS
5
6
GF
CT
7
8
PTC
1
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
PGR-6150 SERIES
K1
12
14
RS-485
K2
11
FEEDER TO MOTOR
22
With PGR-6150 the
temperature is not exceeded,
no damage to motor
24
21
–
+
10
9
OPERATOR INTERFACE
PGR-6150-OPI
(optional)
A
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
45
www.littelfuse.com/pgr-6150
4
MOTOR PROTECTION
No CTs required
Adjustable trip settings
Digital input
Output contacts
Overload
Overcurrent/Jam
Undercurrent
Unbalance (current)
Phase loss/Phase sequence
PTC overtemperature
Dynamic thermal model
Communications
Protection Relays
Motor Protection–Advanced
MPU-32 SERIES (PGR-6200)
Motor Protection Unit
Description
The MPU-32 Motor Protection Unit is used to provide currentand temperature-based protection, metering, and data logging
for three-phase low-voltage medium-horsepower induction
motors. This relay is ideal for retrofitting and upgrading obsolete
or aging motor protection using existing CTs. See the PMA
Family of Panel Mount Adapter Kits to replace common
obsolete relays.
MOTOR PROTECTION
4
1 Motor Protection Unit
1
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
2
g
g
Simplified Circuit Diagram
A
PHASE CT
GF CT
g
B
2 Current Input Module (MPU-CIM)
PHASE CT
The MPU-CIM Current Input Module is the interface between
the MPU-32 relay and the 5-A-secondary, 1-A-secondary, and
sensitive current transformers. The MPU-CIM is ordered
separately from the MPU-32 and can be surface- or DIN-rail
mounted. Wire-clamping terminals are standard but the MPU-CTI
is available for those who require ring-tongue terminals.
M
PHASE CT
RTD x 8
MPU-CIM
(Current Input Module)
MPU-32
L1
(Motor Protection Relay)
MPS-RTD
(Temperature
Input Module)
2
Three ac-current inputs
Earth-leakage-CT input
Programmable digital input
24-Vdc source for digital input
Programmable 4-20-mA analog output
On-board temperature-sensor input,
100-Ω -Platinum RTD or PTC
Three programmable output relays
Local RS-232 communications, optional Network Communications
PC-interface software (SE-Comm-RIS)
4 line x 20 character backlit LCD display
Keypad for programming and display selection
4 LEDs; 1 user programmable
C
Accessories
1
A
L2
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 153.
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Communication
MPU-32-00-00
TIA-232
MPU-32-01-00
TIA-232 & RS-485
MPU-32-02-00
TIA-232 & DeviceNet™
MPU-32-04-00
TIA-232 & Ethernet
NOTE: One of the following is required: MPU-CIM-00-00 Current Input Module, or
M
PHASE
C Module with ring-tonque terminals.
MPU-CTI-RT-00 Current
Input
accessories
requirement
page
Required
TD
114
MPS-RTD-01-00
L1
L2
MPS-DIF-01-00
Optional
Optional
l )
118
118
MPU-32-SMK
Optional
118
CA-945
Optional
120
MPU-16A-Y92A-96N
Optional
111
Phase CTs
M
www.littelfuse.com/
www.littelfuse.com/mpu-32
46
Phase Current Transformers
Phase CTs are required to detect phase
currents. For upgrade applications, existing
CTs can be used.
B
Ground-Fault Current Transformer
Optional zero-sequence current transformer detects
ground-fault current. Available with 5-A and 30-A
primary ratings for low-level pickup.
C
MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module
Optional module provides 8 inputs to connect
Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs.
D
MPS-DIF Differential Current Module
Optional motor differential protection,
compatible with core balance and summation
current transformer connections.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Motor Protection–Advanced
Features & Benefits
Features
IEEE #
BENEFITS
49, 51
Extends motor life and prevents insulation failures and fires
Provides protection through starting, running, and cooling cycles
Remotely view measured values and event records, reset trips, and access setpoints
50G/N, 51G/N Prevents catastrophic failures and fires
46
Prevents overheating due to unbalanced phases
38, 49
46
50, 51
RTD temperature protection (MPS-RTD module) for high-ambient or loss-of-ventilation protection
Detects unhealthy supply conditions
Prevents catastrophic failures and fires; extends motor life
Prevents motor damage by detecting mechanical jams or excessive loading
Detects low level or no-load conditions
Overtemperature (PTC) protection for high-ambient or loss-of-ventilation detection
Limits the motor starts per hour to prevent overheating
Optional MPS-DIF module for sensitive winding-fault protection
Minimizes arc-flash hazards during maintenance
View measured and calculated parameters with on-board display
Separate current input module to reduce risk of open-CT hazard and for convenient installation
Provides means for metering selectable parameters
On-board 100-event recorder for data logging
Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture
37
49
66
87
Wiring Diagram
PHASE CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS
Specifications
Protective Functions Overload (49, 51)
RTD temperature (38, 49)
(IEEE Device Numbers) Phase reverse (current) (46) Unbalance (current) (46)
Overcurrent (50, 51)
Starts per hour (66)
Jam
Differential (87)
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Phase loss (current) (46)
PTC overtemperature (49
Undercurrent (37)
Input Voltage
65-265 Vac, 25 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W
Power-Up Time
800 ms at 120 Vac
Ride-Through Time
100 ms minimum
100 mA maximum
24-Vdc Source
True RMS and DFT, Peak, 16 samples/cycle, and
AC Measurements
positive and negative sequence of fundamental
50, 60 Hz or ASD
Frequency
Output Contacts
Three Form C programmables
Communications
TIA-232 (standard); TIA-485, DeviceNet™, Ethernet (optional)
Analog Output
4-20 mA, programmable
Conformally Coated
Standard feature
Warranty
10 years
Mounting
(Control Unit)
Panel (standard)
Surface (with MPU-32-SMK converter kit)
(Current Input Module) DIN, Surface
Approvals
CSA certified, C-Tick (Australian)
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
(required)
(recommended)
A
MPS-RTD
B
INPUT MODULE
(optional)
C
MPU-CIM
MPS-DIF
CURRENT INPUT MODULE
DIFFERENTIAL
MODULE
2
(optional)
D
TEMPERATURE INPUT
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
CIM
21
26
22
23
+
27
24
31
I/0 MODULE
4-20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
25
DIG IN
MOTOR PROTECTION UNIT
MPU-32
RELAY 3
RELAY 2
12
11
RELAY 1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
CONTROL
POWER
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
47
www.littelfuse.com/mpu-32
4
MOTOR PROTECTION
Overload
Dynamic thermal model
Communications
Ground fault
Current unbalance/
Phase loss/Phase reverse
RTD temperature
Phase loss/Phase reverse (current)
Overcurrent
Jam
Undercurrent
PTC overtemperature
Starts per hour
Differential
Reduced overcurrent mode
Metering
MPU-CIM
Analog output
Data logging
Conformal coating
Protection Relays
Motor Protection–Advanced
MPS SERIES (PGR-6300)
Motor Protection System
Description
The MPS Motor Protection System monitors voltage, current,
and temperature to provide a comprehensive package of
22 protective functions. The MPS is a modular system with
integrated protection, motor control, metering, and data-logging
functions. This system is typically used to provide protection for
three-phase low- and medium-voltage, mediumto high-horsepower induction motors.
MOTOR PROTECTION
4
1
1 Operator Interface (MPS-OPI)
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
Large, bright, 4 x 20 vacuum-fluorescent display
Display metered values
Access set points
Powered by Control Unit
Panel mount or attach directly to Control Unit
Remote mounting (1.2 km or 4000 ft maximum loop length)
1/2 DIN size
Hazardous-location certified
2 Control Unit (MPS-CTU)
2
g
g
Simplified Circuit Diagram
g
g
A
B
PHASE CT
GF CT
g
PHASE CT
g
M
PHASE CT
g
g
RTD x 8
g
g
MPS-RTD
MPS-CTU
L1
L2
(Control Unit)
C
2
Current inputs—5-A or 1-A secondary phase current transformers
Voltage inputs—up to 600 V without PTs
Earth-leakage input—5-A or 1-A secondary or sensitive transformer
Tachometer (high-speed pulse) input
8 digital inputs, 5 relay outputs, 1 analog input and output
24-Vdc supply for OPI and RTD modules, and for digital inputs
IRIG-B time-code input
1/2 DIN size, surface mount
RS-485 network communications (Standard)
DeviceNet™, Profibus®, or Ethernet communications available
(Temperature
Input Module)
Accessories
1 MPS-OPI
(Operator Interface)
A
Phase Current Transformers
Phase CTs are required to detect phase
currents.
B
Ground-Fault Current Transformer
Required zero-sequence current transformer
detects ground-fault current. Available with 5-A
and 30-A primary ratings for low-level pickup.
C
MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module
Optional module provides 8 inputs to connect
Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs.
D
MPS-DIF Differential Current Module
Optional motor differential protection,
compatible with core balance and summation
current transformer connections.
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 153.
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Communications
MPS-CTU-01-00
RS-485
MPS-CTU-02-00
RS-485 & DeviceNet™
MPS-CTU-03-00
RS-485 & Profibus®
MPS-CTU-04-00
RS-485 & Ethernet
accessories
requirement
page
MPS-OPI-01-00
Recommended
See above
Phase CTs
Required
114
Ground-Fault CT
Recommended
114
MPS-RTD-01-00
Optional
118
MPS-DIF-01-00
Optional
118
SE-IP65CVR-M
Optional
111
www.littelfuse.com/
www.littelfuse.com/mps
48
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Motor Protection–Advanced
Features & Benefits
Features
IEEE #
BENEFITS
49, 51
Extends motor life and prevents insulation failures and fires
46
Prevents overheating and extends motor life
50, 51
37
50g/N, 51G/N
Prevents catastrophic failures and fires and extends motor life
Detects low-level or no-load conditions
Prevents catastrophic failures and fires
Optional RTD temperature protection (MPS-RTD module) for
high ambient or loss of ventilation protection
Prevents stress to insulation
Prevents a start attempt when it will damage the motor
Detects unhealthy supply voltage
Provides sensitive protection for high-resistance winding faults
Provides protection through starting, running, overload, and cooling cycles
Minimizes Arc-Flash hazards during maintenance
Simplifies the installation by reducing component count
Displays the measured and calculated motor parameters
On-board 64-event recorder helps with system diagnosis
Remotely view measured values, event records & reset trips
Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture
38, 49
RTD temperature
59
27
47
87
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Voltage unbalance
Phase differential
Dynamic thermal mode
Reduced overcurrent mode
Starter control
Metering
Data logging
Communications
Conformal coating
Wiring Diagram
MPS-OPI
Specifications
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
Protective Functions Overload (49, 51)
Unbalance (current) (46)
(IEEE Device Numbers) Phase reverse (current) (46) Underspeed (14)
Overfrequency (81)
Starts per hour (66)
Overcurrent (50, 51)
Phase loss (voltage) (47)
Jam
Overvoltage (59)
Underfrequency (81)
Differential (87)
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Phase loss (current) (46)
Undercurrent (37)
Undervoltage (27)
Unbalance (voltage) (47)
Phase reverse (voltage) (47)
Failure to accelerate
Power factor (55)
RTD temperature (38, 49)
Input Voltage
65-265 Vac, 25 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W
Power-Up Time
800 ms at 120 Vac
Ride-Through Time
100 ms minimum
24-Vdc Source
100 mA maximum
AC Measurements
True RMS and DFT, Peak, 16 samples/cycle, and
positive and negative sequence of fundamental
Frequency
50, 60 Hz or ASD
Inputs
Phase current, Earth-leakage current, Phase voltage,
7 digital, tachometer, 1 analog
Output Contacts
5 contacts — See Product Manual
Approvals
CSA Certified, C-Tick (Australian)
Communications
Allen-Bradley ® DFI and Modbus® RTU (Standard);
DeviceNet™, Profibus ®, Ethernet (Optional)
Conformally Coated
Standard feature
Warranty
10 years
Mounting
(Control Unit)Surface
(Operator Interface) Panel, Control-Unit mounted
(recommended)
1
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
PHASE CURRENT
TRANFORMERS
MPS-RTD
RTD MODULE
(optional)
(required)
(required)
A
C
B
MPS-DIF
DIFFERENTIAL
MODULE
(optional)
PHASE
VOLTAGES
D
33
22
30
29
27
26
23
22
20
......
17
60
56
53
+
I/0 MODULE
52
4-20 mA
ANALOG
INPUT
MPS-CTU
CONTROL UNIT
RELAY
OUTPUTS
1
2
5
......
16
RS-485
35
......
37
ANALOG
OUTPUT
4-20 mA
+
39
40
DIGITAL
INPUTS
43
......
51
2
CONTROL
POWER
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
49
www.littelfuse.com/mpss
4
MOTOR PROTECTION
Overload
Current unbalance/
Phase loss/Phase reverse
Overcurrent/Jam
Undercurrent
Ground fault
Protection Relays
Motor Protection Relay Retrofits
mpu-32-X69X (PGR-6210) SERIES and mps-469X (PGR-6310) SERIES
Motor Protection Retrofit Kits
1
MPU-32-X69X
Description
Littelfuse Startco retrofit kits are an excellent choice
for upgrading motor protection, providing current- and
temperature-based protection, metering, and data logging.
1 MPU-32-X69X
4
MOTOR PROTECTION
The MPU-32-X69X Motor Protection Retrofit Kit is designed
to replace GE Multilin 169, 269, and 369 relays. It includes
the MPU-32 Motor Protection Relay, MPU-CIM Current Input
Module, and optional MPS-RTD Temperature Input Modules,
which are pre-wired on a panel. The kit fits in the existing
space and typically can utilize existing current transformers
and wiring to simplify the upgrade procedure.
2
Front
2
MPS-469X
The MPS-469X Motor Protection Retrofit Kit replaces the
GE Multilin 469 relay. It includes the MPS Motor Protection
System and optional RTD and differential modules mounted
on a panel that can be installed in the existing 469 cutout.
Existing current transformer and wiring can be utilized,
simplifying the upgrade procedure.
Back
MPS-469X
Features & Benefits
Features
Mounting
Quick installation
Factory tested
Communications
BENEFITS
Fits in existing mounting holes and panel openings
Existing CTs and RTDs can be used to reduce
installation time
100% factory-tested, pre-assembled components
ensure reliability
Add communications capability to older switchgear and
improve system performance
Microprocessor based No calibration required saves on maintenance cost
Front
Back
Reduced overcurrent
mode
Maintenance mode setting to reduce the risk of
Arc-Flash Hazards
Conformal coating
Protects circuit boards against corrosion and moisture
Additional protection
Additional protective functions, including dynamic thermal
model and ability to match existing overcurrent curves
MPU-32-X69X Ordering Information
MPU-32-X69X
–
RTD Inputs
MPU-32
Communications
Ground-Fault CT
Future
options
X
X
X
00
0 = One Platinum 100 Ω
0 = TIA232
1 = One Platinum 100 Ω and 8-input MPS-RTD Module 1 = TIA232 & TIA485
2 = TIA232 & DeviceNet
4 = TIA232 & Ethernet
0 = Wired for Sensitive Ground-Fault CT (50 mA Secondary)
1 = Wired for 1- or 5-A Secondary Ground-Fault CT
MPS-469X Ordering Information
Module Configuration
MPS-469X
–
X
0 = None
1 = One MPS-RTD Module
2 = Two MPS-RTD Modules
3 = One MPS-DIF Module
4 = One MPS-RTD Module and One MPS-DIF Module
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
MPS
Communications
Future
options
X
000
1 = RS485
2 = RS485 & DeviceNet
3 = RS485 & Profibus
4 = RS485 & Ethernet
50
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Motor Protection–Pumps (PGR 6000 Family)
PGR-6800 Series
Pump Protection Relay
Description
Features & Benefits
Features
No CTs required
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Adjustable trip
settings
Output contacts
Remote indication
M
Overload
PGR-6800 SERIES
(Pump Protection Relay)
L1
L2
BENEFITS
No current transformers required for currents up
to 91 A
Adjustable overload trip class setting from 5 to 15
for use with a wide variety of pumps
Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for
operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits
Cause-of-trip indication and reset button
Prevents insulation failures and fires; extends
motor life
Phase loss/Phase
sequence
Unbalance (current)
Detects unhealthy supply conditions
Undercurrent
Detects low level or no-load conditions
Prevents overheating due to unbalanced phases
Accessories
A
PGB-6800
(Remote Indication
and Reset Assembly)
A
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 154.
PGB-6800 Remote Indication
and Reset Assembly
Optional remote indication of overload,
undercurrent, phase unbalance, phase loss,
and phase sequence. Remote reset included.
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
CONTROL POWER Full-load current
PGR-6801-24
24 Vdc
7-19.6 A
PGR-6801-120
120 Vac
7-19.6 A
PGR-6801-240
240 Vac
7-19.6 A
PGR-6802-24
24 Vdc
19-44.2 A
PGR-6802-120
120 Vac
19-44.2 A
PGR-6802-240
240 Vac
19-44.2 A
PGR-6803-24
24 Vdc
40-90.4 A
PGR-6803-120
120 Vac
40-90.4 A
PGR-6803-240
240 Vac
40-90.4 A
accessories
requirement
page
PGB-6800
Optional
119
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Specifications
Protective Functions Overload (49, 51)
Unbalance (current) (46)
(IEEE Device Numbers) Phase sequence (46)
Phase loss (current) (46)
Undercurrent (37)
Input Voltage
See ordering information
Frequency
50, 60 Hz
Dimensions
H 83 mm (3.3”); W 78 mm (3.1”); D 99 mm (3.9”)
Test Button
Standard feature
Reset Button Standard feature
Output Contacts
Isolated form A and Form B
Approvals
UL listed
Warranty
5 years
MountingDIN
51
www.littelfuse.com/pgr-6800
4
MOTOR PROTECTION
The PGR-6800 Pump Protection Relay provides protection for
pumps with three-phase motors up to 1,000 Vac. No current
transformers are required for currents up to 91 A. The protective
functions include overload, phase unbalance, phase loss, phase
sequence and undercurrent. The PGR-6800 Pump Protection
Relay is ideally suited for applications where operating without
load can induce failure. Motor current is monitored and an
undercurrent trip occurs when the current drops below a
preset level. No additional level detectors are required.
Protection Relays
feeder Protection
FPU-32 Feeder Protection Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 53
FPS Feeder Protection System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 54-55
For More Information…
and to download datasheets and manuals on our
Feeder Protection Relays, click Technical Resources at
www.littelfuse.com/feederprotection
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
52
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Feeder Protection–Standard
FPU-32 Series (PGR-7200)
Feeder Protection Unit
Description
The FPU-32 Feeder Protection Unit provides integrated
protection, metering, and data-logging functions. It is an excellent
choice for retrofitting and upgrading older relays because of its
compact size and ability to use existing CTs. The FPU-32 is
used to protect distribution feeders in processing, manufacturing,
petroleum, chemical, and wastewater treatment facilities.
Features & Benefits
Features
IEC & IEEE overcurrent
protection curves
Overload
Thermal protection for connected load
Phase loss/Phase reverse
(current)
Unbalance (current)
Detects unhealthy supply conditions
Two setpoint groups
Reduced overcurrent
mode
NOTE: The FPU-32 consists of the Feeder Protection Unit (pictured above) and
the MPU-CIM Current Input Module (not pictured).
Simplified Circuit Diagram
PHASE CT
A
GF CT
B
PHASE CT
PHASE CT
Communications
Prevents overheating due to unbalanced phases
Remotely view measured values, event records
& reset trips
Accessories
MPU-CIM
A
(Current Input Module)
B
FPU-32
L1
(Feeder Protection Unit)
L2
Phase Current Transformers
Phase CTs are required to detect phase
currents.
Ground-Fault Transformer
Zero-sequence current transformer detects
ground-fault current. Available with 5-A and 30-A
primary ratings for low-level pickup.
Specifications
Protective Functions
Overload (49, 51)
Definite-time overcurrent (50, 51)
(IEEE Device Numbers)
Phase sequence (46)
Inverse-time overcurrent (50, 51)
Unbalance (46)
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
Phase loss (46) RTD/PTC temperature (49)
Input Voltage
65-265 Vac, 30 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W
Power-Up Time
800 ms at 120 vac
Ride-Through Time
100 ms minimum
24-Vdc Source
400 mA maximum
AC Measurements
True RMS and DFT, Peak 32 samples/cycle and
positive and negative sequence of fundamental
50, 60 Hz
Frequency
Output Contacts
Three Form C
CSA certified, C-Tick (Australian)
Approvals
Communications
TIA-232 (standard); TIA-485, DeviceNet™, Ethernet (optional)
Analog Output
4-20 mA, programmable
Conformally Coated Standard feature
Warranty
10 years
Mounting
(Control Unit)
Panel (standard)
Surface (with MPU-32-SMK converter kit)
(Current Input Module)DIN, Surface
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 154.
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Communications
FPU-32-00-00
TIA-232
FPU-32-01-00
TIA-232 & RS-485
FPU-32-02-00
TIA-232 & DeviceNet™
FPU-32-04-00
TIA-232 & Ethernet
NOTE: One of the following is required: MPU-CIM-00-00 Current Input Module, or
MPU-CTI-RT-00 Current Input Module with ring-tonque terminals.
accessories
requirement
page
Phase CTs
Recommended
114
Ground-Fault CT
Optional
114
MPU-16A-Y92A-96N
Optional
111
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
53
www.littelfuse.com/fpu-32
5
FEEDER PROTECTION
Data logging
BENEFITS
Definite and inverse time settings for system
coordination; prevents catastrophic failures
Create distinctive settings for maintenance or for
two different loads
Maintenance mode setting to reduce the risk of
arc-flash hazards
On-board 100-event recorder and remote data
logging helps with system diagnostics
Protection Relays
Feeder Protection–Advanced
FPS SERIES
Feeder Protection System
Description
The FPS Feeder Protection System monitors voltage
and current to provide a comprehensive package of
17 protective functions. The FPS is a modular system
with integrated protection, breaker control, metering,
and data-logging functions.
5
1 Operator Interface (FPS-OPI)
1
g
g
g
FEEDER PROTECTION
g
g
g
g
g
Large, bright, 4 x 20 vacuum-fluorescent display
Display metered values
Access set points
Powered by Control Unit
Panel mount or attach directly to Control Unit
Remote mounting (1.2 km or 4000 ft maximum loop length)
1/2 DIN size
Hazardous-location certified
2 Control Unit (FPS-CTU)
g
g
2
g
Simplified Circuit Diagram
A
B
PHASE CT
g
g
GF CT
g
g
PHASE CT
g
PHASE CT
g
Accessories
FPS-CTU
L1
L2
(Control Unit)
urrent inputs—5-A or 1-A secondary phase
C
current transformers
Voltage inputs—up to 600 V without PTs
Earth-leakage input—5-A or 1-A secondary or
sensitive transformer
8 digital inputs, 5 relay outputs, 1 analog input and output
24-Vdc supply for OPI and RTD modules, and for digital inputs
IRIG-B time-code input
1/2 DIN size, surface mount
RS-485 network communications (Standard)
DeviceNet™, Profibus®, or Ethernet communications available
2
A
Phase Current Transformers
Phase CTs are required to detect phase
currents.
B
Ground-Fault Current Transformer
Zero-sequence current transformer detects
ground-fault current. Available with 5-A
and 30-A primary ratings for low-level pickup.
C
MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module
Optional module provides 8 inputs to connect
Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs.
D
SE-IP65CVR-M Cover
Optional gasketed, transparent cover for
limited access and IP65 protection for an
Operator Interface Module.
1 FPS-OPI
(Operator Interface)
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Communications
FPS-CTU-01-00
RS-485
FPS-CTU-02-00
RS-485 & DeviceNet™
FPS-CTU-03-00
RS-485 & Profibus®
FPS-CTU-04-00
RS-485 & Ethernet
accessories
requirement
page
FPS-OPI-01-00
Recommended
See above
SE-IP65CVR-M
Optional
111
Phase CTs
Required
114
Ground-Fault CT
Recommended
114
MPS-RTD-01-00
Optional
118
www.littelfuse.com/
www.littelfuse.com/fps
54
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Feeder Protection–Advanced
Features & Benefits
Features
IEEE #
BENEFITS
49, 51
50, 51
50, 51
Long-time overcurrent provides thermal protection for feeder or load
Coordination using IEEE and IEC Curves
Instantaneous overcurrent to detect catastrophic failure
46
Detects an open or high-impedance phase
50G/N, 51G/N
38, 49
59
27
47
Inverse and definite time. Early insulation-failure detection.
Optional protection (MPS-RTD module) for load-temperature monitoring
Limits stress to insulation
Detects a damaging brown-out condition
Detects unhealthy supply voltage
Minimizes Arc-Flash hazards during maintenance
Allows local and remote operation; reduces component count
Displays the measured and calculated parameters
On-board 64-event recorder helps with system diagnosis
Remotely view measured values, event records, & reset trips
Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture
Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Unbalance (current) (46)
Protective Functions Overload (49, 51)
(IEEE Device Numbers) Phase reverse (current) (46) Phase loss (voltage) (47)
Overfrequency (81)
Overvoltage (59)
Overcurrent (50, 51)
Phase loss (current) (46)
Underfrequency (81)
Undervoltage (27)
Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Phase reverse (voltage) (47)
Unbalance (voltage) (47)
Power factor (55)
RTD temperature (38, 49)
Input Voltage
65-265 Vac, 25 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W
Power-Up Time
800 ms at 120 Vac
Ride-Through Time
100 ms minimum
24-Vdc Source
100 mA maximum
AC Measurements
True RMS and DFT, Peak, 16 samples/cycle, and
positive and negative sequence of fundamental
Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Inputs
Phase current, Earth-leakage current, Phase voltage,
7 digital, 1 analog
Output Contacts
5 contacts — See Product Manual
Approvals
CSA certified, C-Tick (Australian)
Communications
Allen-Bradley ® DFI and Modbus® RTU (Standard);
DeviceNet™, Profibus ®, Ethernet (Optional)
Conformal Coating
Standard feature
Warranty
10 years
Mounting:
Control Unit Surface
Operator Interface
Panel, Control-Unit mounted
OPERATOR INTERFACE
PHASE CURRENT
TRANFORMERS
FPS-OPI
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
(required)
(recommended)
(recommended)
A
1
B
RTD MODULE
MPS-RTD
PHASE
VOLTAGES
33
22
30
29
27
26
23
22
20
......
(optional)
C
17
60
56
53
+
I/0 MODULE
52
4-20 mA
ANALOG
INPUT
CONTROL UNIT
FPS-CTU
RELAY
OUTPUTS
1
2
5
......
16
RS-485
35
......
37
ANALOG
OUTPUT
4-20 mA
+
39
40
DIGITAL
INPUTS
43
......
51
2
CONTROL
POWER
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
55
www.littelfuse.com/fps
5
FEEDER PROTECTION
Overload
Inverse-time overcurrent
Definite-time overcurrent
Current unbalance/
Phase loss/Phase reverse
Ground fault
RTD temperature
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Voltage unbalance
Two setting groups
Breaker control
Metering
Data logging
Communications
Conformal coating
Protection Relays
arc-flash protection
D0100 & D0900 Arc-Flash Relays..............................................................57
PGR-8800 Arc-Flash Relay ..................................................................58-59
For More Information…
to download our White Paper on
Key Considerations for Selecting an
Arc-Flash Relay or our Arc-Flash Energy
Reduction Workbook, visit
www.littelfuse.com/afv
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
56
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Arc-Flash Monitoring
D0100 series & D0900 series
Arc-Flash Relay
Description
The D0100/D0900 Arc-Flash relays provide a simple and costeffective solution for Arc-Flash monitoring. Two light sensors
can be connected directly to one relay, or optional junction
boxes allow up to 16 sensors per relay.
Light Sensors react to light and are available with 180º or 360º
detection area. Sensors are supplied with 5, 10 or 15 m of
cable and a mounting bracket. 1-2 sensors are recommended
per cubicle or drawer.
Installation Diagram
Features & Benefits
BENEFITS
Fits into wide range of Arc-Flash applications
Trip time <1 ms
Limits Arc-Flash damage and risk of injury
Two optical
sensor types
Point sensors with 180° or 360° detection area
depending on specific installation
Single Arc-Flash relay can monitor 2 sensors or
junction boxes
Sensor expansion Junction box allows for up to 16 sensors per Arc-Flash
option
relay (8 sensors/box)
Dual sensor input
Place sensors in direct line
of sight to possible arc faults,
preferably pointing down from the ceiling.
Control power
D0100.0010
D0100.0020
D0900.0010
48-220 Vdc
24 Vdc
220-250 Vac
Allows for system test without tripping
A0200 (180˚)/A0300 (360˚) Light Sensors
Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small
as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Available in
180˚ or 360˚; 5, 10, or 15 m cable.
D0400/D0500 Junction Box for parallel connection
accessories
requirement page
A0033.0010 Detector cable
2 x 0.25 mm w/screen. 100 m
Optional
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Service mode
A
Ordering Number
D1100.0010 Diode Logic Unit
Allows for operation in bright environments and
maximum sensitivity in dark environments
Accessories
Ordering Information
A0200.0010 Light Sensor 180˚; 5 m cable
A0200.0020 Light Sensor 180˚; 10 m cable
A0200.0030 Light Sensor 180˚; 15 m cable
A0300.0010 Light Sensor 360˚; 5 m cable
A0300.0020 Light Sensor 360˚; 10 m cable
A0300.0030 Light Sensor 360˚; 15 m cable
D0400.0010 Junction Box.
For 8 sensors, without indication
D0500.0010 Junction Box.
For 8 sensors, with indication
Adjustable light
sensitivity
of more than 2 sensors for one relay. Designed
to connect up to 8 sensors, and is available with
and without indication. Max. 2 junction boxes
can be connected to one Arc-Flash relay.
121
Required:
At least 1 sensor
per cubicle or
drawer
118
Optional
121
Optional
121
Optional
See website
for more
details
Specifications
Voltage Supply
Thyristor Output
Sensitivity
Number of Sensors
Response Time
Power Consumption
Ambient Temperature
EMC
Dimensions
57
D0100.0010: 48-220 Vdc
D0100.0020: 24 Vdc
D0900.0010: 220-250 Vac
D0900.0020: 220-250 Vac
D0900.0030: 110 Vac
250 Vac/Vdc, 8 A cont., 25 A. for 0.1s, min. load 50 mA
Adjustable 2,000-24,000 lux
Max. 16 pcs. with 2 junction boxes
Less than 1 ms
D0100: 4.3 W; D0900: 3.5 W
–25°C to + 70°C
EN50081-1/2 and EN50082-1/2
H 90 mm (3.5”); W 105 mm (4.1”); D 75 mm (3.0”)
www.littelfuse.com/d0900
6
ARC-FLASH PROTECTION
Features
Compact module
Protection Relays
Arc-Flash Monitoring
PGR-8800 series (D1000)
Arc-Flash Relay
Description
The PGR-8800 is a microprocessor-based relay that limits arcfault damage by detecting the light from an arc flash and rapidly
tripping. Phase-current-transformer inputs are provided for
current-constrained arc-flash protection and, when so equipped, a
programmable definite- time overcurrent function can be enabled.
An optical sensor on the PGR-8800 and adjustable trip level reduce
the chance of nuisance tripping by setting a threshold for ambient
light. Sensors, inputs, and connections are monitored to ensure
fail-safe operation. A secondary solid-state trip circuit provides
a redundant trip path. A USB port is used for configuration and
access to event logs and graphs.
ARC-FLASH PROTECTION
6
Optical Sensors
The PGR-8800 accepts both PGA-LS10 and PGA-LS20 optical
sensors designed to collect light over a wide angle and with high
sensitivity. For fast fault location, front-panel and sensor LED’s
indicate sensor health and which sensor detected an arc fault.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
5-A-SECONDARY PHASE CT’s
C
A
CTs
(Recommended)
B
Sensor Placement
C
The PGR-8800 Arc-Flash Relay and sensors are easily installed
in retrofit projects and new switchgear with little or no reconfiguration. Even elaborate systems with multiple power
sources take minutes to configure using the relay’s built-in USB
interface software.
PGA-LS10
(Point Sensor)
PGR-8800
(Arc-Flash Protection Relay)
L1
A
B
PGA-LS20
(Fiber-Optic Sensor)
L2
24 Vdc Battery
Backup
(Optional)
Generally, it is recommended to mount 1 or 2 sensors per cubicle
to cover all horizontal and vertical bus bars, breaker compartments,
drawers, and anywhere that there is potential for an arc-fault.
Threading a fiber-optic sensor through the cabinets and in areas
where point-sensor coverage is uncertain results in complete
coverage and an added level of redundancy. Even if policy is to
only work on de-energized systems, all maintenance areas should
be monitored to prevent potential damage and additional cost.
At least one sensor should have visibility of an arc fault if a
person blocks the other sensor(s).
For detailed wiring diagram, see adjacent page and page 155.
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
COmmunications
PGR-8800-00 (D1000)
Multi-unit linking, USB
accessories
Requirement
page
PGA-LS10 (A1000)
Required*
118
PGA-LS20 (A2000)
Required*
118
Current Transformer
Recommended
114
*At least one sensor is required. However, the exact number of sensors for proper coverage
depends on the application.
CC
C
www.littelfuse.com/
www.littelfuse.com/afv
58
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Arc-Flash Monitoring
Features & Benefits
Features
BENEFITS
Arc-Flash trip time <1 ms
Limits arc-flash damage and risk of injury
Multiple sensors (up to 24)
Single module can monitor 6 sensors. Up to 4 PGR-8800 units can be linked into one system
Fail-safe system
Continuous monitoring of optical sensors and inputs ensures protection
Redundant trip circuit
Solid-state backup arc-detection circuit adds a second layer of safety
Adjustable light sensitivity
Allows for operation in bright environments and maximum sensitivity in dark environments
LED indication (on unit and each sensor)
18 LEDs provide at-a glance status for module and I/O state
Current detection
Phase-CT inputs provide overcurrent protection and prevent nuisance trips
Optical detection
Point and fiber-optic sensors provide wide detection area with sensor health trip indication
Digital inputs (6)
Two each: remote trip, inhibit, and reset inputs
Service mode
Allows for system test without tripping
Trip coil contact
Solid-state 24-600 Vdc/24-440 Vac IGBT
Indication contacts
Form C and status outputs
USB interface
Data logging and configuration software uses a USB interface with no drivers or software installation
Built-in sensor
Can be used in single-sensor systems, as a seventh sensor, and for calibration
100-230 Vac, 12-60 Vdc, or 100-250 Vdc supply accepted. Ability to charge and run off an external, user-supplied
24 Vdc battery.
On-board event recorder helps with system diagnostics
Data logging
Wiring Diagram
ARC FLASH RELAY
PGR-8800
ARC FLASH RELAY
PGR-8800
(optional)
38
39 ............. 45
–
37
+
31 ..................... 36
LINK
CONTROL POWER
and BATTERY
ARC FLASH RELAY
PGR-8800
(optional)
(optional)
46 47 48
49
50 51 52
STATUS
53
54 55 56
STATUS
57
59
60
STATUS
DIGITAL INPUTS
ONLINE
SERVICE
TRIPPED
TRIP COIL
ARC-FLASH RELAY
PGR-8800 SERIES
1
........
4
5
........
8
9
........
12
13
16
........
17
20
........
21
24
........
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS20
PGA-LS20
PGA-LS20
PGA-LS20
PGA-LS20
PGA-LS20
OPTICAL
SENSOR
OPTICAL
SENSOR
OPTICAL
SENSOR
OPTICAL
SENSOR
OPTICAL
SENSOR
OPTICAL
SENSOR
or
or
or
or
or
PGA-LS10 (A1000) Point Sensor
Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as
small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Sensor
health and trip indication.
B
PGA-LS20 (A2000) Fiber-Optic Sensor
360° light sensor for tricky installations with
many shadows or to run along bus bars.
Sensor health and trip indication.
C
Current Transformers
Eliminate nuisance arc-flash trips and use for
overcurrent protection.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
26
27
28
29
30
or
PHASE CT
PHASE CT
(recommended)
(recommended)
PHASE CT
(recommended)
Specifications
Accessories
A
25
IEEE Device Numbers
Overcurrent (50), Arc Flash (AFD)
Input Voltage
100-230 Vac, 12-60 Vdc, and 100-250 Vdc
Dimensions
H 130 mm (5.2”); W 200 mm (7.9”);
D 54 mm (2.2”)
Optical Trip Settings
10-40 klux, 200 μs-2 s
Current Trip Setting (A)
Programmable
Indication Contact Mode
Fail-safe
Trip Coil Contact Mode
Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe
Redundant Trip Circuit
Standard feature
Input Monitoring
Standard feature
USB Interface
Standard feature
Trip, Reset, Service Buttons Standard feature
Expandable System
Link up to 4 PGR-8800 units
Warranty
5 years
Mounting DIN (with D0050 adapter clips), Surface
59
www.littelfuse.com/afv
ARC-FLASH PROTECTION
Universal power supply/Battery backup
6
Ground-Fault Current Interrupters
GFCI
SB6000 Series Industrial Shock-Block.....................................................61
For More Information…
on GFCIs, visit
www.littelfuse.com/industrialshockblock
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
60
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Ground-Fault Current Interrupters
Industrial
SB6000 Series
Industrial Shock-Block
Industrial
Description
Enclosed Model
Simplified Circuit Diagram
SB-OPI
A
(Operator
Interface)
K
L1
LOAD
L2
L3
AUXILIARY
CONTACT
G
Features & Benefits
GC
Features
SB6100
(Special-Purpose GFCI)
B
TERMINATION
DEVICE
ENCLOSED SB6100 MODELS
Ordering Information
ORDERING
NUMBER
Voltage
(V)
SB6100-00x-0
208
SB6100-10x-0
240
SB6100-20x-0
480
SB6100-30x-0
600
SB6100-01x-0
208
SB6100-11x-0
240
SB6100-21x-0
480
SB6100-31x-0
600
Trip
Level (mA)
UL category/class
20
(Fixed)
UL 943C Class C
special-purpose GFCI
20
(Fixed)
UL 943C Class D
special-purpose GFCI
UL 943/UL 1053
6, 10, 20, 30
Equipment ground-fault
(Selectable)
protective device (EGFPD)
Note: x=0 for open-chassis models and 1 for enclosed models
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
UL 943 inverse time
trip curve
UL 943C trip level
(20 mA)
UL 943C ground
monitor/interrupt
3 x Class T, 600 V
incoming fuses
BENEFITS
Reduces the probability of nuisance tripping
GFCI protection for systems with leakage current higher
than the standard 6 mA required by UL 943 Class A
Trips if continuity of the load ground is lost
Provides overcurrent protection for the internal contactor
Specifications
Voltage Rating
Amperage Rating
Trip Level Settings
System
Enclosure
Operating Temperature
Wiring Requirements
Approval
Conformally Coated
Dimensions
61
See ordering information
100 A (continuous)
Selectable (6, 10, 20, 30 mA), or Fixed 20 mA
3-phase, 3-wire (no neutral). 60 Hz
NEMA 4X, Polyester, Lockable
–35°C (–31°F) to +66°C (149°F)
2 AWG (maximum)
UL-Listed (enclosed models) and UL-Recognized
component (open-chassis models)
Standard feature
Enclosed: H 453.80 mm (17.78”);
W 406.15 mm (15.99”); D 223.25 mm (8.79”)
Open-chassis: H 387.00 mm (15.20”);
W 341.00 mm (13.40”); D 161.00 mm (6.40”)
www.littelfuse.com/industrialshockblock
7
GROUND-FAULT CURRENT INTERUPTERS
Open-Chassis Model
Special Purpose Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI),
Class C and Class D
Industrial Shock-Block is the first permanently connected specialpurpose GFCI that meets UL Standard 943C Class C and Class D—
designed for people protection in industrial facilities. According to UL 943C,
special-purpose GFCI’s can be used in the following applications:
1. On grounded-neutral systems where voltage to ground is above
150 Vac and equipment grounding or double insulation is required
by the NEC®, ANSI and NFPA 70.
2. On grounded-neutral systems where voltage to ground is 150 Vac or less
and equipment grounding or double insulation is provided, but the use of a
Class A ground-fault circuit-interrupter is not practical.
Equipment Ground-Fault Protective Device (EGFPD)
Industrial Shock-Block is available with adjustable protection settings as
an EGFPD. While adjustable to a Class A or Class C/Class D protection level,
Industrial Shock-Block EGFPD protection can be adjusted up to
30 mA for applications in which nuisance tripping at A or C levels can be
expected. (GFCI devices are not allowed to have an adjustable trip level.)
Industrial Shock-Block is available in GFCI, EGFPD, open-chassis, and
enclosed models, for voltages from 208 to 600 V. All models are rated at
100 A with built-in overcurrent protection supplied by Littelfuse Class T
fuses. The enclosed models are in a NEMA-4X UL-listed enclosure, and
the open-chassis models are UL-recognized for installation by an OEM.
A Operator Interface (SB-OPI)
Power and Operational LED indicators; Percentage leakage current LED
indicators; Trip LED indicator; Incorrect supply connection LED indicator;
Load Ground-Check (GC) LED indicator; Test (OFF) and
Reset (ON) buttons. Included with SB6000 Series.
B 1N5339B Termination Device
5 W axial-lead ground-check termination; included with SB6000 Series.
Protection Relays
Generator & Single-function
PROTECTION
PGR-4300 Generator Ground-Fault Relay................................................. 63
G2000 Power Relay.................................................................................... 64
G3000 Frequency Relay............................................................................. 65
G3300 Voltage Relay................................................................................. 66
T2000 Reverse Power Relay...................................................................... 67
T2100 Excitation Loss Relay...................................................................... 68
T2200 3-Phase Overcurrent Relay............................................................ 69
T2300 3-Phase Short-Circuit Relay........................................................... 70
T2400 3-Phase Dual Overcurrent Relay.................................................... 71
T2500 Overcurrent Short-Circuit Relay..................................................... 72
T2700 Power Relay.................................................................................... 73
T2900 Power Relay.................................................................................... 74
T3000 Power Relay.................................................................................... 75
T3100 Power Relay.................................................................................... 76
T3300 Power Relay.................................................................................... 77
For More Information…
and to download our T-Line and
G-Line Brochures, visit
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
62
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Generator Ground-Fault Protection
PGR-4300 series (GFA300)
Generator Ground-Fault Relay
Description
The PGR-4300 Generator Ground-Fault Relay provides
a simple method for detecting a ground-fault condition
on generators without the need for current transformers
(CTs). This greatly simplifies the installation. In addition,
it is compatible with both three- and four-pole transfer
switches. This relay also monitors the neutral-to-ground path
for continuity. The PGR-4300 is ideal for any generator or
application where there is not sufficient space to install CTs.
Features & Benefits
Simplified Circuit Diagram
BENEFITS
No CTs required
Saves space and simplifies installation
Adjustable pickup
(100 - 1200 A)
Adjustable time delay
(0 - 1.0 s)
Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of
protection and allows system coordination
Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and
system coordination
Form C ground-fault output contacts for alarming
or tripping purposes
Provides means for connecting to an optional
meter (PGA-0500) or control system
Monitors neutral-to-ground integrity and alarms if
ground path becomes open circuit
Eliminates nuisance tripping
Output contacts
Analog output
(0 - 1 mA)
G
N-G continuity alarm
Passive filtering
Accessories
L1
L2
PGR-4300
PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter
Optional panel-mounted analog meter
displays ground-fault current as a
percentage of the set-point.
(Generator
Ground-Fault Relay)
Specifications
For detailed wiring diagram, see page 154.
Ordering Number
control power
PGR-4300-12
12 Vdc
PGR-4300-24
24 Vdc
PGR-4300-120
120 Vac
Accessories
Requirement
Page
PGA-0500
Optional
119
PMA-55
Optional
110
PMA-60
Optional
110
00
IEEE Device Numbers
Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N)
Input Voltage
See ordering information
DimensionsH 75 mm (3.0”); W 55 mm (2.2”); D 115 mm (4.5”)
Trip Level Settings
100-1200 A
Trip Time Delay Settings
0-1.0 s
Contact Operating Mode
Non-fail-safe
Test Button
Local
Reset Button
Local and remote
Output Contacts
Form C
Approvals
UL Listed
Analog Output
0-1 mA
Conformally Coated
Consult factory
Warranty
5 years
Mounting
DIN, Surface (standard)
Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter)
Ordering Information
Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
63
8
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
Features
www.littelfuse.com/pgr-4300
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Power
G2000 Series
Power Relay
Description
The G2000 Power Relay is intended for detection of power
level for protection, control and monitoring purposes. In
the default configuration, the G2000 acts as a reverse
power relay for protection of generators running in parallel.
Basic adjustments can be done on the dials on the front
panel. More configuration options are available through PC
configuration via the optional G0100 Programming Kit. PC
programming enables the user to reconfigure the relay as an
overload relay and allows extension of the ranges on the dials
on the front panel.
One version covers all system voltages from 63 Vac to
690 Vac. Rated voltage can be adjusted by a preset button or
PC configuration. Auxiliary supply voltage is 24 Vdc.
24 Vdc
RESET
Simplified Circuit Diagram
PICKUP
RELAY
Features & Benefits
TRIP
RELAY
8
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
+
00
–
G2000
(Power Relay)
Features
BENEFITS
PC configuration
Forward power or reverse power
relay functionality
User configurable scales and
setpoints
Suits broad variety of applications
63 Vac to 690 Vac systems can
be monitored by the same unit
Supports wide range of system voltages
Specifications
Supply
8-36 Vdc/0.75 W at 24 Vdc
Input Voltage
63-690 Vac ± 30%
Input Current
5 A CT, max. 10 A
Frequency35-75Hz
Trip Level
RP: 2-20% (max. 2-50%)
FP: 50-140% (max. 50-150%)
Hysteresis
1-10% (max. 1-50%)
Delay
2-20 sec. (max. 1-360 sec.)
Relay Rating
380 Vac, 5 A, 1250 VA, 150 Vdc, 5 A, 120 W
Pick-up Relay
Normal state: ND (NE)
Latching: Non-latching
Trip Relay
Normal state: ND (NE)
Latching: Non-latching (latching)
Reset
Automatic (manually by terminal 11)
± 5%
Accuracy
Repeatability
± 1%
Serial LinkRJ11-modular
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
EMCEN50263
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.3 kg
Dimensions
H 73 mm (2.87”); W 75 mm (2.95”);
D 114 mm (4.49”)
Installation
35 DIN rail or two 4 mm, (3/16”) screws
L1
L2
L3
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Control power
G2000.0010
24 Vdc, 5 A
accessories
requirement
page
G0100
Optional
121
Accessories
G0100 Programming Kit
Connects to RS232 port. Includes blank frontplate labels and permanent pen for texting scales.
www.littelfuse.com/g2000
64
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Frequency
G3000 Series
Frequency Relay
Description
The G3000 Frequency Relay is intended for frequency
monitoring on generators, busbars or other distribution
systems. The relay contains the functions “under frequency”
and “over frequency”, time delayed, and two individual output
relays—one relay for each function.
Basic adjustments can be done on the dials on the front
panels. More configuration options are available through PC
configuration via the optional G0100 Programming Kit. PC
programming enables the user to extend the ranges on the
dials on the front panel.
One version covers all system voltages from 63 Vac to
690 Vac. Rated voltage can be adjusted by a preset button
or PC configuration. Auxiliary supply voltage is 24 Vdc.
24 Vdc
+ –
RESET
Simplified Circuit Diagram
UNDER
FREQ.
OVER
FREQ.
Features & Benefits
(Frequency Relay)
L3
Ordering Information
G3000.0010
24 Vdc
accessories
requirement
page
G0100
Optional
121
Accessories
G0100 Programming Kit
Connects to RS232 port. Includes blank frontplate labels and permanent pen for texting scales.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Over and under frequency protection
in one relay
User configurable scales and
setpoints
Suits broad variety of applications
63 Vac to 690 Vac systems can
be monitored by the same unit
Supports wide range of system voltages
Supply
8-36 Vdc/0.75 W at 24 Vdc
Input Voltage
63-690 Vac ± 30%
Input Current
5 A CT, max. 10 A
Frequency35-75Hz
Trip Level
OF: 85 to 115% (max. 75 to 125%)
UF: 85 to 115% (max. 75 to 125%)
Delay
1-10 sec. (max. 1-360 sec.)
Relay Rating
380 Vac, 5 A, 1250 VA, 150 Vdc, 5 A, 120 W
Overfrequency Relay
Normal state: ND (NE)
Latching: Non-latching (latching)
Underfrequency Relay
Normal state: ND (NE)
Latching: Non-latching (latching)
Reset
Automatic (manually by terminal 11)
Accuracy
± 5%
Repeatability
± 1%
Serial LinkRJ11-modular
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
EMCEN50263
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.3 kg
Dimensions
H 73 mm (2.87”); W 75 mm (2.95”);
D 114 mm (4.49”)
Installation
35 DIN rail or two 4 mm, (3/16”) screws
L2
Control power
PC configuration
Specifications
L1
Ordering Number
BENEFITS
65
www.littelfuse.com/g3000
8
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
G3000
Features
00
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Voltage
G3300 Series
Voltage Relay
Description
The G3300 Voltage Relay monitors voltage on generators,
busbars or other distribution systems. The relay provides
“undervoltage” and “overvoltage”, time delayed, and two
individual output relays—one for each function.
Basic adjustments can be done on the dials on the front
panels. More configuration options are available through PC
configuration via the optional G0100 programming Kit. PC
programming enables the user to extend the ranges on the
dials on the front panel.
One version covers all system voltages from 63 Vac to
690 Vac. Rated voltage can be adjusted by a preset button or
PC configuration. Auxiliary supply voltage is 24 Vdc.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
+
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
8
00
–
PICKUP RELAY
or
PHASES TRIP
RELAY
OK
Features & Benefits
RESET
24 Vdc
G3300
Features
BENEFITS
PC configuration
Over and undervoltage protection in
one relay
User configurable scales
and setpoints
Suits broad variety of applications
Phase symmetry monitor
Enables use in grid connection
applications
63 Vac to 690 Vac systems can
be monitored by the same unit
Supports wide range of system
voltages
(Voltage Relay)
L1
L2
Specifications
L3
Supply
8-36 Vdc/0.75 W at 24 Vdc
Input Voltage
63-690 Vac ± 30%
Frequency35-75Hz
Trip Level
100 to 120% (max. 1 to 130%)
Hysteresis
1-10% (max. 1-50%)
Delay
1-10 sec. (max. 1-360 sec.)
Relay Rating
380 Vac, 5 A, 1250 VA, 150 Vdc, 5 A, 120 W
Phase Monitor
Phase failure, phase order & symmetry
Pick-up (Phase) Relay
Normal state: ND (NE)
Latching: Non-latching
Trip Relay
Normal state: ND (NE)
Latching: Non-latching
Reset
Automatic (manually by terminal 11)
± 5%
Accuracy
Repeatability
± 1%
Serial LinkRJ11-modular
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
EMCEN50263
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.3 kg
Dimensions
H 73 mm (2.87”); W 75 mm (2.95”);
D 114 mm (4.49”)
Installation
35 DIN rail or two 4 mm, (3/16”) screws
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Control power
G3300.0010
24 Vdc
accessories
requirement
page
G0100
Optional
121
Accessories
G0100 Programming Kit
Connects to RS232 port. Includes blank frontplate labels and permanent pen for texting scales.
www.littelfuse.com/g3300
66
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Reverse Power
T2000 Series
Reverse Power Relay
Description
Under parallel operation, the T2000 Reverse Power Relay will
protect the generator from being run as an electric motor. The
T2000 will protect the prime mover of the generator against
physical damage, but will also protect the parallel running
generators from overload caused by the inversed load shift in
a reverse power situation.
The T2000 calculates I x cos F, representing the active
power. If the active power becomes negative and exceeds
the preset level (2-20%), the pick-up LED will indicate
this and the delay timer will be started. After the preset
time (2-20 sec.) has expired, the output relay and LED will
be activated, provided that the reverse power level was
exceeded for the entire delay time.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
G
L - L SUPPLY
Features & Benefits
Features
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
Visual indication of
power, pick-up, and
output trip
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply
(up to 690 Vac)
T2000
7
8
9
10
(Reverse
Power
Relay) 5
6
L1
C/B TRIP
L2
Available with instant
output trip
L3
LOAD
Galvanic isolated inputs
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
Ordering Information
Terminals
Ordering
Number
1-3
T2000.0010
230 V
5A
L-N
T2000.0020
450 V 400 V
5A
L-L
T2000.0030
127 V 120 V
5A
L-N
T2000.0040
110 V 100 V
5A
L-L
T2000.0050
110 V 100 V
5A
L-L
T2000.0060
230 V
1A
L-N
T2000.0070
660 V
5A
L-L
T2000.0080
450 V 400 V
5A
L-N
T2000.0090
127 V 120 V
5A
L-L
T2000.0100
110 V 100 V
1A
L-L
T2000.0110
450 V 400 V
5A
L-L
T2000.0120
480 V 415 V
5A
L-L
T2000.0130
230 V
5A
L-N
T2000.0140
230 V
5A
L-L
T2000.0150
480 V 415 V
1A
L-L
T2000.0160
450 V 400 V
1A
L-L
2-3
IN
Simplifies design and installation. No need for
PTs or separate power supply
Enables alternative use for detection of current
direction
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
supply function
Specifications
Trip Level
2-20% IN
Delay
2-20 sec.
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
50-110%
Consumption
5 VA at UN
Continuous Current
2 x IN
Frequency Range
45-400 Hz
Output Relay
Normally de-energized, latching, resetable
Contact Rating
AC: 400 V, 5 A, 1250 VA
DC: 150 V, 5 A, 120 W
Overall Accuracy
±5%
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”);
D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
No time delay
Delay 0.2 - 2.0 sec.
No time delay
No time delay
Other supply voltages and combinations are available on request.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Provides quick and concise status information
67
www.littelfuse.com/t2000
8
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
1
2
3
13
RESET
14
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
00
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Excitation Loss
T2100 Series
Excitation Loss Relay
Description
The T2100 Excitation Loss Relay protects against loss of
excitation in a synchronous generator. T2100 detects the
high-inductive current running into a generator in case of
low excitation. The faulty generator breaker is tripped, thus
protecting the generator, and avoiding undervoltage on the
busbar with a possible blackout of the system.
The T2100 calculates I x sin φ, representing the reactive
power. If the reactive power becomes negative and exceeds
the preset level (0.5-1.5 x IN), the pickup LED will indicate
and the delay timer will be started. After the preset time
(2-20 sec.) has expired, the output relay and LED will be
activated, provided that the negative reactive power level
was exceeded for the entire delay time.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
G
L - L SUPPLY
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
T2100
7
8
9
10
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
Features
1
2
3
13
RESET
14
8
Features & Benefits
(Excitation
Loss
Relay) 5
Visual indication of
power, pick-up, and
output trip
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply
(up to 690 Vac)
6
L1
C/B TRIP
L2
L3
LOAD
Available with separate
24 Vdc supply
G
L - N SUPPLY
Galvanic isolated inputs
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
1
2
3
13
RESET
14
T2100
7
8
9
10
L1
L2 L3
LOAD
Ordering Information
Terminals
Ordering
Number
1-3
T2100.0010
230 V
5A
L-N
T2100.0020
480 V 415 V 5 A
L-L
T2100.0030
450 V 400 V 5 A
L-L
T2100.0040
110 V 100 V 1 A
L-L
T2100.0050
110 V 100 V 5 A
L-L
T2100.0060
110 V 100 V 5 A
L-L
Current 0.2-1.2 x IN
T2100.0070
480 V 415 V 5 A
L-L
Normally energized output,
current 0.05 -0.15 x IN
T2100.0080
110 V 100 V 5 A
L-L
24 V DC aux. voltage
supply, current 0.2 1.2 x IN
2-3
IN
supply function
Other supply voltages and combinations are available on request.
www.littelfuse.com/t2100
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
Safe operation. Maintains protection
regardless of system voltage failure
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Trip Level
0.5-1.5 x IN
Delay
2-20 sec.
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
50-110%
Consumption
Voltage 5 VA at UN
Current 0.3 VA at IN
Continuous Current
2 x IN
Frequency Range
45-400 Hz
Output Relay
Normally de-energized, latching, resetable
Contact Rating
AC: 400 V, 5 A, 1250 VA
DC: 150 V, 5 A, 120 W
Overall Accuracy
±5%
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
Dielectric Test 2500 V, 50 Hz
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”);
D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
6
C/B TRIP
Provides quick and concise status information
Specifications
(Excitation
Loss
Relay) 5
00
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
68
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Overcurrent
T2200 Series
3-Phase Overcurrent Relay
Description
The T2200 Overcurrent Relay is designed for generator
or feeder protection against overcurrent in each of the
three phases.
The T2200 detects the highest of the 3 input currents and, if
this exceeds the preset level (0.5 - 1.4 x IN), the pick-up LED
will indicate and the delay timer will be started. After the
preset time (3-30 sec.) has expired, the output relay and the
corresponding LED will be activated, provided that the current
level was exceeded for the entire delay time.
Features & Benefits
Features
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
U
1
2
3
10
I2
I3
OVERCURRENT
12
13
14
15
ADDTIONAL
OUTPUT RELAY
16
9
8
7
Available with extra
output with instant trip
6
5
4
Galvanic isolated inputs
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
Provides quick and concise status information
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
Economic solution for tripping non-essential
load, before main breaker trip
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
L1 L2 L3
Specifications
Ordering Information
Terminals
Ordering
Number
1-3
2-3
T2200.0010
450 V
T2200.0020
450 V
T2200.0030
T2200.0040
T2200.0050
230 V
230 V
230 V
T2200.0060
450 V
T2200.0070
T2200.0080
T2200.0090
T2200.0100
T2200.0110
110 V
480 V
24 Vdc
450 V
450 V
400 V 5 A Latching output, resetable
Normally energized output,
400 V 5 A latching, resetable
5 A Latching output, resetable
110 V 5 A Latching output, resetable
1 A Latching output, resetable
Normally energized output,
400 V 5 A latching, resetable, delay 6-60 sec.
100 V 5 A Latching output, resetable
415 V 5 A Latching output, resetable
5 A Latching output, resetable
400 V 5 A Instantly extra output relay
400 V 1 A Instantly extra output relay
IN
Trip Level
0.5-1.4 x IN
Delay
3-30 sec.
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
60-110%
Consumption
Voltage 5 VA at UN
Current 0.3 VA at IN
Continuous Current
2 x IN
Frequency Range
45-400 Hz
Output Relay
Normally de-energized
Contact Rating
AC: 400 V, 5 A, 2000 VA
DC: 150 V, 5 A, 150 W
Overall Accuracy
±5%
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
Dielectric Test 2500 V, 50 Hz
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”);
D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
function
Other supply voltages and combinations are available on request.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
69
www.littelfuse.com/t2200
8
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
11
I1
Visual indication of
power, pick-up, and
output trip
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply
(up to 690 Vac)
T2200
(3-Phase Overcurrent Relay)
SUPPLY
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
00
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–3-Phase Short-Circuit
T2300 Series
3-Phase Short-Circuit Relay
Description
The T2300 3 Phase Short-Circuit Relay is designed for
protection of generators, power transmissions and
consumer’s supply against short circuit. The T2300 reacts on
a definite delay versus current level.
The T2300 detects the highest of the 3 input currents and,
if this exceeds the preset level (1.0 - 4.0 x IN), the pick-up
LED will indicate and the delay timer will be started. After
the preset time (0.1-1.0 sec.) has expired, the normally
energized output relay will de-energize and the relay LED will
be activated, provided that the current level was exceeded
for the entire delay time. The T2300 has a normally energized
output relay.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Features & Benefits
U
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
8
00
I1
I2
I3
1
2 SUPPLY
3
Features
11
SHORT CIRCUIT
12
13
T2300
(3-Phase Short-Circuit Relay)
14
15
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
10
9
8
7
Visual indication of
power, pick-up, and
output trip
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply
(up to 690 Vac)
6
5
16
Built-in capacitor
cack-up supply
Galvanic isolated inputs
L1 L2 L3
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
Ordering Information
Terminals
Ordering
Number
1-3
T2300.0100
230 V
5A
T2300.0020
450 V
400 V 5 A
T2300.0030
24 Vdc
T2300.0040
24 Vdc
T2300.0050
450 V
400 V 5 A Normally de-energized output
T2300.0060
480 V
415 V 5 A
T2300.0070
230 V
1A
2-3
IN
function
Provides quick and concise status information
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
Ensures correct operation in spite of drop in
the supply voltage
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Specifications
Trip Level
1.0-4.0 x IN
Delay
0.1-1.0 sec.
Max. Voltage
660 V
60-110%
Voltage Range
Consumption
Voltage 5 VA at UN
Current 0.3 VA at IN
Continuous Current
2 x IN
Frequency Range
45-400 Hz
Output Relay
Normally de-energized, latching, resetable
Contact Rating
AC: 400 V, 5 A, 2000 VA
DC: 150 V, 5 A, 150 W
Overall Accuracy
±5%
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
Dielectric Test 2500 V, 50 Hz
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”);
D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
5A
1A
Other supply voltages and combinations are available on request.
www.littelfuse.com/t2300
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
70
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Overcurrent
T2400 Series
3-Phase Dual Overcurrent Relay
Description
The T2400 3-Phase Dual Overcurrent Relay includes two
combined overcurrent relays, designed for protection or
monitoring of generators and power transmissions. A typical
application is to use one of the overcurrent functions to trip the
generator circuit breaker, and the other overcurrent function to
trip a non-essential consumer.
The T2400 consists of two overcurrent circuits with similar
current settings and time delays. Each circuit detects the
highest of the 3 input currents and, if this exceeds the preset
level (0.5-1.4 x IN), the corresponding pick-up LED will indicate
and the delay timer will be started. After the preset time
(3-30 sec.) has expired, the corresponding output relay and
LED will be activated, provided that the current level was
exceeded for the entire delay time.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
U
I2
I3
Features
SUPPLY
3
11
T2400
(3-Phase Dual
Overcurrent Relay)
I. OVERCURRENT
12
13
14
15
II. OVERCURRENT
16
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
10
Visual indication of
power, pick-up, and
output trip
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply
(up to 690 Vac)
9
8
7
6
5
4
Combining 2 relays in
same enclosure
Galvanic isolated inputs
L1 L2 L3
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
Ordering Information
Terminals
Ordering
Number
1-3
T2400.0010
230 V
5A
T2400.0020
450 V
400 V 5 A
T2400.0030
110 V
100 V 5 A
T2400.0040
450 V
T2400.0050
480 V
output on relay 1,
400 V 5 A Latching
6-60 sec. delay on relay 1
415 V 5 A
T2400.0060
450 V
400 V 1 A
T2400.0070
450 V
T2400.0080
T2400.0090
2-3
IN
Provides quick and concise status information
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
Economic solution for non-essential load
tripping, and occupying less space in the
switch panel
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Specifications
function
Trip Level
0.5-1.4 x IN
Delay
3-30 sec.
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
60-110%
Consumption
Voltage 5 VA at UN
Current 0.3 VA at IN
Continuous Current
2 x IN
Frequency Range
45-400 Hz
Output Relay
Normally de-energized
Contact Rating
AC: 400 V, 5 A, 2000 VA; DC: 150 V, 5 A, 150 W
Overall Accuracy
±5%
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
Dielectric Test 2500 V, 50 Hz
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”);
D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
400 V 5 A Latching output on relay 1,
normally energized relay 1
127 V 120 V 5 A
24 Vdc
5A
Latching output relays are reset by disconnecting the power supply.
Other supply voltages and combinations are available on request.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
71
www.littelfuse.com/t2400
.
8
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
I1
1
2
Features & Benefits
00
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Overcurrent/Short-Circuit
T2500 Series
Overcurrent and Short-Circuit Relay
Description
The combined T2500 3-Phase Overcurrent and Short-Circuit
Relay is used for protection of generators and power
transmissions. The short-circuit relay protects against faults
causing high currents, and the overcurrent relay protects
against thermal damage.
Features & Benefits
Features
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
Simplified Circuit Diagram
1
2 SUPPLY
3
U
T2500
(Overcurrent & Short-Circuit Relay)
8
11
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
I1
00
Visual indication of
power, pick-up, and
output trip
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply
(up to 690 Vac)
Combining 2 protection
functions in same
enclosure
Available with extra
output
I2
I3
SHORT CIRCUIT
12
13
14
15
OVERCURRENT
16
19
L1 L2 L3
17
18
10
9
8
7
Versions available with
separate 24 Vdc supply
6
5
4
Galvanic isolated inputs
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
20
Connection between 20 and 19 gives instant operation of Relay 2.
Connection between 20 and 17 gives delayed operation of Relay 2.
Connection between 20 and 18 gives synchronized operation of Relay 1 and Relay 2.
Disconnecting the diode between 17 and 18 will disable operation of Relay 1 from
overcurrent.
Latching output relays can be reset or disabled by bridging terminals 5 and 6.
Terminals
1-3
2-3
T2500.0010
T2500.0020
T2500.0030
T2500.0040
T2500.0050
T2500.0060
T2500.0070
450 V
230 V
480 V
450 V
24 Vdc
230 V
450 V
400 V 5 A
5A
415 V 5 A
400 V 1 A
5A
5A
400 V 5 A
T2500.0080
450 V
400 V 5 A
T2500.0090
T2500.0100
480 V 415 V 5 A
24 Vdc
1A
T2500.0110
450 V
T2500.0120
24 Vdc
IN
400 V 5 A
5A
Provides quick and concise status information
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
Economic solution, occupying less space in
the switch panel
Economic solution for non-essential load
tripping
Safe operation–Maintains protection
regardless of system voltage failure
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Specifications
Overcurrent Trip Level 0.5-1.4 x IN
Delay
3-30 sec.
Short-Circuit Trip Level 1.0-4.0 x IN
Delay
0.1-1.0 sec.
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
60-110%
Consumption
5 VA at UN
Continuous Current
2 x IN
Frequency Range
45-400 Hz
Output Relay
Normally energized
Extra Output Relay
Normally de-energized
Contact Rating
AC: 400 V, 5 A, 2000 VA; DC: 150 V, 5 A, 150 W
Overall Accuracy
±5%
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1, EN50081-2,
EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”); D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
Ordering Information
Ordering
Number
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
function
Latching output, resetable
Latching output, resetable
Latching output, resetable
Latching output, resetable
Latching output, resetable
De-energized extra output relay
De-energized extra output relay
De-energized extra output relay,
latching outputs
De-energized extra output relay
De-energized extra output relay
De-energized extra output relay,
latching short circuit output
De-energized extra output relay,
de-energized relay 1, no internal
power backup
Other combinations and voltages are available on request.
www.littelfuse.com/
www.littelfuse.com/t2500
72
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Power
T2700 Series
Power Relay
Description
The T2700 Power Relay is intended for detection of power
levels for protection, control or monitoring purposes. The T2700
will protect a generator from excessive active loads [kW].
The T2700 calculates I x cos φ, representing the active power.
If the active power exceeds the preset level (15-150%), the
pick-up LED will indicate this and the delay timer will be started.
After the preset time (2-20 sec.) has expired, the output relay
and LED will be activated, provided that the active power level
was exceeded for the entire delay time.
Features & Benefits
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Features
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
G
L - L SUPPLY
T2700
7
8
9
10
(Power
Relay)
5
6
L1
C/B TRIP
L2 L3
LOAD
Specifications
Trip Level
15-150% IN
Delay
2-20 sec.
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
60-110%
Voltage 5 VA at UN
Consumption
Current 0.3 VA at IN
Continuous Current
2 x IN
Frequency Range
45-400 Hz
Output Relay
Normally de-energized, latching, resetable
Contact Rating
AC: 400 V, 5 A, 1250 VA; DC: 150 V, 5 A, 120 W
Overall Accuracy
±5%
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1, EN50081-2,
EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”); D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
G
L - N SUPPLY
1
2
3
13
RESET
14
T2700
7
8
9
10
(Power
Relay)
5
6
L1
C/B TRIP
L2 L3
LOAD
N
Ordering Information
Terminals
Ordering
Number
1-3
T2700.00
230 V
5A
L-N
T2700.02
450 V 400 V 5 A
L-L
T2700.03
230 V 400 V 5 A
L-L
T2700.04
110 V 100 V 5 A
L-L
T2700-08
127 V 120 V 5 A
L-N
2-3
IN
supply function
Normally energized output
Other supply voltages and combinations are available on request.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
73
www.littelfuse.com/t2700
8
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
Visual indication of power,
Provides quick and concise status information
pick-up, and output trip
Direct line-line or lineSimplifies design and installation.
neutral voltage supply (up
No need for PTs.
to 690 Vac)
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
Galvanic isolated inputs
currents from the installation including spikes
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
Easy installation
potentiometers
1
2
3
13
RESET
14
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
00
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Differential
T2900 Series
3-Phase Differential Relay
Description
The T2900 3-Phase Differential Relay is designed for
monitoring current leakage in generators. The T2900
measures the differential current of each of the 3 phases.
The differential currents are measured by connecting a
current transformer for each winding in parallel with inverse
polarity. The highest of the 3 currents is selected and,
if it exceeds the preset level (0.04-0.4 x IN), the pick-up
LED will indicate this and the delay timer will be started.
After the preset time has expired, the output relay and
the corresponding LED will be activated, provided that the
current level was exceeded for the entire delay time. The time
delay can be adjusted between 1-10 sec. This time delay can
be reduced by a factor 10 by bridging terminals 18 and 19.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
U
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
8
Features
1
2
SUPPLY
T2900
(3-Phase Differential Relay)
3
I1
I2
I3
Features & Benefits
11
19
18
10
9
8
7
DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT
12
13
14
15
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
Visual indication of power,
Provides quick and concise status information
pick-up, and output trip
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply (up
to 690 Vac)
Built-in capacitor
back-up supply
6
5
16
DEVICE UNDER
PROTECTION
Galvanic isolated inputs
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
L1 L2 L3
Ordering Information
1-3
2-3
T2900.0010
450 V
400 V
T2900.0020
230 V
IN
5A
5A
T2900.0030
480 V
415 V
5A
T2900.0040
110 V
100 V
5A
Standard types: IN = 5 A and output relay normally de-energized.
Other combinations and voltages are available on request.
www.littelfuse.com/t2900
Ensures correct operation in spite of drop in
the supply voltage
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Trip Level
0.04-0.4 x IN
Delay
1-10 sec. (0.1-1 sec. when bridging terminals 18 and 19)
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
60-110%
Voltage 5 VA at UN
Consumption
Current 0.3 VA at IN
Continuous Current
2 x IN
Frequency Range
45-400 Hz
Output Relay
Normally de-energized, latching, resetable
Contact Rating
AC: 400 V, 5 A, 2000 VA
DC: 150 V, 5 A, 150 W
Overall Accuracy
±5%
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
Dielectric Test
2500 V, 50 Hz
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1, EN50081-2,
EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”); D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
00
Terminals
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
Specifications
Bridge between terminals 5 and 6 results in latching relay.
Bridge between terminals 18 and 19 reduces time delay to 0.1-1 sec.
Ordering Number
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
74
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Frequency
T3000 Series
Frequency Relay
Description
The T3000 Frequency Relay is designed for frequency
monitoring on generators, bus bars or other distribution
systems.
The T3000 consists of two circuits, one circuit for over
frequency and one for under frequency monitoring. Each
circuit has individual settings for frequency levels and time
delays. The output relays are normally energized output
relays. The output relay for under frequency is activated at
frequencies higher than the preset value, while the output
relay for over frequency is activated at frequencies lower
than the preset value. This means that both output relays are
activated at frequencies within the interval between the under
and over frequency scale range.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Features & Benefits
Features
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
T3000
(Frequency Relay)
L2 (N)
1
2
3
UNDERFREQUENCY
ALARM
OVERFREQUENCY
ALARM
Visual indication of power,
Provides quick and concise status information
pick-up, and output trip
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply (up
to 690 Vac)
7
6
5
Combining 2 relays in
same enclosure
Galvanic isolated inputs
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
T3000.0010
T3000.0020
T3000.0030
T3000.0040
T3000.0050
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
Economic solution . Monitoring both
underfrequency and overfrequency in same unit,
and occupying less space in the switch panel
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Terminals
1-3
2-3
230 V
450 V
110 V
480 V
127 V
400 V
100 V
415 V
120 V
Specifications
Overfrequency Level 45-65 Hz
Delay
1-10 sec.
Underfrequency Level 45-65 Hz
Delay
1-10 sec.
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
70-110%
5 VA at UN
Consumption
Continuous Current
2 x IN
Frequency Range
40-70 Hz
Output Relay
Normally energized
Contact Rating
AC: 250 V, 2 A, 250 VA; DC: 60 V, 2 A, 100 W
Overall Accuracy
±3% of highest value
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
Dielectric Test 2500 V, 50 Hz
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1, EN50081-2,
EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”); D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
Other voltages are available on request.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
75
www.littelfuse.com/t3000
.
8
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
L1 (L)
10
9
8
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
00
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Voltage
T3100 Series
Voltage Relay
Description
The T3100 Voltage Relay is designed for voltage monitoring
on generators, bus bars or other distribution systems. The
T3100 will signal when the voltage is out of limits for a preset
time period.
The T3100 consists of two circuits, one circuit for
overvoltage and one for undervoltage monitoring.
Each circuit has individual settings for voltage levels and
time delays.
Features & Benefits
Features
Simplified Circuit Diagram
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
Visual indication of power,
Provides quick and concise status information
pick-up, and output trip
T3100
(Voltage Relay)
8
00
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
L1 (L)
L2 (N)
1
2
3
UNDERVOLTAGE
ALARM
10
9
8
OVERVOLTAGE
ALARM
7
6
5
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply (up
to 690 Vac)
Combining 2 relays in
same enclosure
Galvanic isolated inputs
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
Economic solution. Monitoring both
undervoltage and overvoltage in same unit,
and ccupying less space in the switch panel
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Specifications
Overvoltage Level 100-120%
Delay 1-10 sec.
Hysteresis 1-10%
Undervoltage Level 80-100%
Delay 1-10 sec.
Hysteresis 1-10 %
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
70-120%
5 VA at UN
Consumption
Frequency Range
40-400 Hz
Overvoltage Relay
Normally de-energized
Undervoltage Relay
Normally energized
Contact Rating
AC: 250 V, 2 A, 250 VA
DC: 60 V, 2 A, 100 W
Overall Accuracy
±3% of highest value
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
Dielectric Test
2500 V, 50 Hz
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1, EN50081-2,
EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”); D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
Terminals
1-3
2-3
T3100.0010
T3100.0020
T3100.0030
230 V
450 V
110 V
400 V
100 V
T3100.0040
480 V
415 V
T3100.0060
127 V
120 V
Other voltages are available on request.
www.littelfuse.com/t3100
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
76
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays
Generator Protection–Voltage
T3300 Series
3-Phase Voltage Relay
Description
The T3300 Voltage Relay is designed for voltage monitoring
on generators, bus bars or other distribution systems. The
T3300 will signal when the voltage is out of limits for a
preset time period.
The T3300 consists of two circuits, one circuit for
overvoltage and one for undervoltage monitoring.
Each circuit has individual settings for voltage levels and
time delays.
Features & Benefits
Features
Simplified Circuit Diagram
PHASE
1
17
18
19
PHASE
3
25
26
27
Visual indication of power,
Provides quick and concise status information
pick-up, and output trip
T3300
(Voltage Relay)
UNDERVOLTAGE
ALARM
16
15
14
OVERVOLTAGE
ALARM
12
11
10
(Inputs are isolated)
Direct line-line or lineneutral voltage supply (up
to 690 Vac)
Combining 2 relays in
same enclosure
Galvanic isolated inputs
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
Ordering Information
Economic solution. 3-phase monitoring of both
undervoltage and overvoltage in same unit,
and occupying less space in the switch panel
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Specifications
Overvoltage Level 100-120%
Delay 1-10 sec.
Hysteresis 1-10%
Undervoltage Level 80-100%
Delay 1-10 sec.
Hysteresis 1-10 %
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
70-120%
5 VA at UN
Consumption
Frequency Range
40-400 Hz
Overvoltage Relay
Normally de-energized
Normally energized
Undervoltage Relay
Contact Rating
AC: 250 V, 2 A, 250 VA
DC: 60 V, 2 A, 100 W
Overall Accuracy
±3% of highest value
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temperature –20°C to + 70°C
Dielectric Test
2500 V, 50 Hz
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1, EN50081-2,
EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material
Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
1.2 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 150 mm (5.9”); D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
Terminals
Ordering Number
17-19
21-23
25-27
18-19
22-23
26-27
T3300.0010
T3300.0020
T3300.0030
230 V
450 V
110 V
400 V
100 V
T3300.0040
480 V
415 V
Other voltages are available on request.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
77
www.littelfuse.com/t3300
8
GENERATOR & SINGLE-FUNCTION PROTECTION
PHASE
2
21
22
23
Accepts high supply
voltage variation
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
00
Generator Control
generator control
Basic
T2600 Dual Current Relay..........................................................................79
T4500 Auto Synchronizer...........................................................................80
T4800 Load Sharer for Conventional Governers......................................81
T4900 VAR Load Sharer.............................................................................82
T5000 Paralleling Relay.............................................................................83
E7800 Motorized Potentiometer...............................................................84
T7900 Electronic Potentiometer...............................................................85
M8100 Synchroscope.................................................................................86
T8400 Blackout Limiter...............................................................................87
Standard
C6200 FlexGen Generator Controls ....................................................88-89
Advanced
S6000 SIGMA Generator Controls ......................................................90-91
For More Information…
and to download FlexGen and SIGMA
Brochures, visit
www.littelfuse.com/generatorcontrol
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
78
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Generator Control
Basic Generator Protection
T2600 Series
Dual-Current Relay
Description
The T2600 Dual-Current Relay combines two current relays.
The function of the unit is to start or stop the standby diesel
generator according to the load situation. Current is measured
as a single phase measurement in each of the generators. Both
relays will respond to the highest of the currents, independent
of phase angle.
Starting signal: The starting output relay is controlled by the
high level start current relay (0.3-1.2 x IN) with a time delay
of 3-30 seconds. If one of the 3 input currents exceeds the
current setting for a longer period than the time setting, the
output relay will become deactivated.
Stopping signal: The low level current relay (0.2-0.8 x IN)
controls a time delay (1-10 minutes) which again controls the
stop output relay. If all input currents are lower than the current
setting for a longer period than the time delay setting of
1-10 minutes, the output relay will be activated.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
L1
L2
L3
1
2
U3
I1
I2
I3
G5
G6
11
I1
12
13
I2
14
15
I3
16
19 20
G1
CONTROL POWER
T2600
(Dual Current Relay)
12
13
14
15
STOP
CIRCUIT
16
4
}
}
19 20 17 18
G3
G2
START
CIRCUIT
Manual
G1
10 G1
START
9 G3
8
7
Manual
G1
6 G1
STOP
5 G3
To check relay operation, check that the “POWER” LED is on, ensuring that the supply is
present. Measure the supply voltage which must be compatible with information label on
top of enclosure. Measure the current circulating in terminals 11 -12, 13-14 and 15-16 and
observe that at least one of the currents are above setting. 0.5 x I N = 2.5A; 2 x IN = 10A.
Ordering Information
Terminals
Ordering
Number
1-3
2-3
T2600.0010
T2600.0020
T2600.0030
230 V
450 V
480 V
5 A 30 sec. or 1 sec.*
400 V 5 A 30 sec. or 1 sec.*
415 V 5 A 30 sec. or 1 sec.*
T2600.0040
450 V
sec.*, bridge 17-18 = stop current
400 V 5 A 30
increased 34%
T2600.0050
480 V
sec.*, bridge 17-18 = stop current
5 A 30
increased 34%
T2600.0060
110 V
100 V 5 A 30 sec. or 1 sec.*
T2600.0070
110 V
sec. or 1 sec.*,
100 V 5 A 30
start current delay 1.0-10 secs
T2600.0080
230 V
IN
function
Visual indication of power,
pick-up, and output trip
Provides quick and concise status information
Direct line-line or line-neutral
voltage supply (up to 690 Vac)
Simplifies design and installation.
No need for PTs.
Simultaneous monitoring
of load level on
3 synchronous generators
Economic solution for load depending start/
stop of generators in parallel operation
Combining 2 trip outputs in
same enclosure
Providing both start signal to stand-by
generator and stop signal of running
generator from same unit
Extension module available
for monitoring of additional
3 generators
Economic and easy to install system
enhancement
Galvanic isolated inputs
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
DIN-rail or screw-mount
& adjustment by
potentiometers
Easy installation
Start Level
30-120%
Delay
3-30 sec.
Stop Level
20-80%
Delay
1-10 min.
Max. Voltage
660 V
Voltage Range
60-110%
Consumption
5 VA at UN
Frequency Range
40-65 Hz
Contact Rating
AC: 400 V, 8 A, 2000 VA; DC: 35 V, 8 A, 150 W
Overall Accuracy
±3% of highest value
Repeatability
±1%
Operating Temp.
–20°C to +70°C
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1, EN50081-2,
EN50082-2
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Weight
0.5 kg
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.76”); W 100 mm (3.94”); D 115 mm (4.52”)
Installation
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
Extension Unit
*Pulse duration time for stop signal, bridge 17-18 = 1 sec.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Accepts high supply voltage
variation
BENEFITS
Ensures correct operation in spite of voltage
supply fluctuations (fulfills marine class
requirement)
Specifications
sec. or 1 sec.*,
5 A 30
normally de-energized start relay
T2600.0090
Features
79
www.littelfuse.com/t2600
.
9
GENERATOR CONTROL
G4
11
Features & Benefits
Generator Control
Basic
T4500 Series
Auto Synchronizer for Conventional Governors
Description
The T4500 Auto Synchronizer provides automatic
synchronization of a generator to a busbar in a minimum of
time, by controlling the speed via the electric servomotor
on a conventional speed governor, or by controlling an
electronic speed controller via an intermediate motorized
potentiometer. A unique feature of the T4500 is the
possibility of simultaneous synchronization of already
parallel running generators to another busbar section, a
shaft generator or the grid. The T4500 includes outputs for
controlling the Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) as well.
When used, T4500 will not only control the speed of the
generator, but also the alternator voltage (Voltage Matching).
Features & Benefits
Simplified Circuit Diagram
VOLT PROGRAMMING
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
CLOSE
BUS
1
2
GEN
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
29
30
31
32
VOLTAGE MATCHING
INCR. DECR.
T4500
(Auto Synchronizer)
9
GENERATOR CONTROL
18
DISABLE
11
COM FREQ
OUT
12
13
INCR.
14
15
16
Automatic voltage
matching
Visual indication of bus,
generator, & delta voltage,
closing signal, & speed &
voltage increase/decrease
signals
Direct line-line voltage
Supply (up to 690 Vac)
G
L3
BUS
Facilitates adjustment during installation and
commissioning
Inputs for disabling internal
frequency control
M
L2
BENEFITS
Adjustable delta frequency,
synchronizing window
(delta voltage), & breaker
make time by front panel
potentiometers & terminal
bridging resistors
DECR.
SYNC.
ON
L1
Features
C/B
Galvanic isolated inputs
DIN rail or screw-mount
Ordering Information
Terminals
Ordering Number
1-3
5-7
2-3
6-7
T4500.0010
450 V
400 V
T4500.0020
230 V
T4500.0030
480 V
415 V
T4500.0040
110 V
63 V
T4500.0050
127 V
120 V
T4500.0060
110 V
100 V
T4500.0070
600 V
Provides quick and concise status information
Simplifies design and installation. No need for
PTs or separate power supply
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Specifications
Max. Voltage
Voltage Range Consumption Frequency Range Frequency Difference C/B Make Time Voltage Difference Contact Rating Operating Temperature Vibration Test EMC Approvals Burn-in Enclosure Material Weight Dimensions Installation Other supply voltages and combinations are available on request.
www.littelfuse.com/t4500
Enables synchronization to external frequency
set-point from other busbar sections, shaft
generators or the main grid (grid-parallel
operation)
Enables use in installations with fluctuating
system voltage
80
660 V
70-110%
4 VA at UN
35-70 Hz
0.1-1.0 Hz
20-200 ms
2-10%
AC: 400 V, 2 A, 250 VA; DC: 110 V, 2 A, 100 W
–20°C to +70°C
4 g (500-100 Hz)
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Certified by major marine classification societies
50 hours before final test
Polycarbonate, flame retardant
0.7 kg
H 70 mm (2.7“); W 100 mm (3.9“);
D 115 mm (4.5“)
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Generator Control
Basic
T4800 Series
Load Sharer for Conventional Governors
Description
The T4800 Load Sharer provides automatic load sharing and
frequency control for parallel running generators. The load
sharing is proportional, meaning that the generators will be
loaded equally compared to their individual capacity.
The load on each generator is compared with the load on
the other generators and corrected until balance is obtained.
Load sharing is necessary after synchronization in order to
reestablish load balance and to obtain long term stability of
load and system frequency (compensating the droop of the
speed governor).
The T4800 has a built-in reverse power protection with
selectable limits and time delays.
Features & Benefits
Simplified Circuit Diagram
17
18
19
20
REVERSE POWER
1
UN
2
3
21
22
23
T4800
(Load Sharer)
4
5
IN
6
24
25
26
Features
27
TRIP
FREQ. FREQ.
UNLOAD OUT IN
7
8
9
28
29
SYNC. FREQ.
IN
30
WATT TEST PARALLEL
LINES
IN
OUT
COM. +
–
–
10
11
12
31
Adjustable delta frequency,
stability and % load
deviation by front panel
potentiometers
32
AUTO
INCR. DECR.
13
14
15
16
NEXT
T4800
M
L2
GEN
L3
BUS
Enables operation where system frequency
is set externally such as in grid-parallel
operation
Reverse power trip
Economic solution for reverse power
protection
Visual indication of voltage,
increase/decrease and
unload signals
Direct line-line voltage
supply (up to 690 Vac)
12
L1
Inputs for disabling internal
frequency control
Galvanic isolated inputs
C/B
SYNC. T4500
DIN rail or screw-mount
Ordering Information
Simplifies design and installation–no need for
PTs–or separate power supply
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Specifications
Terminals
Ordering
Number
1-1
1-3
T4800.0010
450 V
400 V
T4800.0020
230 V
T4800.0030
480 V
415 V
5A
T4800.0040
110 V
100 V
1A
T4800.0050
450 V
400 V
1A
T4800.0060
127 V
120 V
5A
T4800.0070
110 V
100 V
5A
Max. Voltage
Voltage Range Consumption Continuous Current Frequency Range Frequency Adjustment Proportional Band
Dead Band Zone
Contact rating Operating Temperature Vibration Test EMC Approvals Burn-in Enclosure Material Weight Dimensions Installation In
5A
5A
Other supply voltages, nominal currents and combinations are available on request.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Provides quick and concise status
information
81
660 V
70-110%
Voltage 4 VA at UN; Current 0.4 VA at UN;
2 x IN
35-70 Hz
48-62 Hz
±50 - 250% load; ±5 - 25% frequency
±2 - 10% load; ±0.2 - 1.0% frequency
AC: 400 V, 2 A, 250 VA
DC: 110 V, 2 A, 100 W
–20°C to +70°C
4 g RMS according to IEC 60068-2-64
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2, EN61000-6-2:1999
Certified by major marine classification societies
50 hours before final test
Polycarbonate, flame retardant
0.7 kg
H 70 mm (2.7“); W 150 mm (5.9“);
D 115 mm (4.5“)
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
www.littelfuse.com/t4800
9
GENERATOR CONTROL
13
UNLOAD
BENEFITS
Facilitates adjustment during installation and
commissioning. Load deviation adjustment
enables paralleling of differenst size
generators.
Generator Control
Basic
T4900 Series
VAR Load Sharer
Description
The T4900 VAR Load Sharer provides automatic load sharing
of reactive power [kVAR] and voltage control for parallel
running generators. The reactive load on each generator is
compared with the reactive load on the other generators
and corrected on the AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator)
until balance is obtained. The T4900 can also be used for
power factor (PF) control in applications where one or more
generators are operated in parallel with the grid (utility). The
input to the T4900 are the voltage and the current from which
the reactive power and voltage is determined. The T4900
calculates I x sin φ, representing the reactive load.
Power factor control for parallel operation with the public
grid can be obtained by connecting an external contact
between terminals 12 (COM) and 28 (PF ON). The setting is
determined by an external potentiometer (100 kW) across
terminals 29 and 30 (PF-SET).
Simplified Circuit Diagram
A
POWER FACTOR
PF=1 0 0 7 ind
100 K
12
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
T4900
(VAR Load Sharer)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GENERATOR CONTROL
25
UNLOAD VOLT VOLT
OUT
N
IN
UN
24
26
27
9
28
PF ON
TRIP ENABLE
WATT TEST
IN
OUT
10
11
29
30
32
Features & Benefits
PARALLEL
LINES
+
COM
12
31
PF SET
INCR
13
14
DECR
15
16
13
NEXT
T4900
UNLOAD or
PF=1 0
12
1
L1
2
3
M
L2
GEN
L3
AVR
4
5
6
E7800
(Motorized
Potentiometer)
BUS
Terminals
1-3
2-3
450 V
400 V
5A
T4900.0020
230 V
–
5A
T4900.0030
480 V
415 V
5A
T4900.0040
110 V
63 V
5A
T4900.0050
127 V
120 V
1A
T4900.0060
110 V
100 V
1A
DIN-rail or screw mount
Facilitates adjustment during installation and
commissioning. VAR Load deviation adjustment
enables paralleling of differenst size generators
Provides quick and concise status information
Simplifies design and installation. No need for
PTs or separate power supply
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Specifications
Max. Voltage
660 V
110%
Voltage Range Voltage Dev. Adjustment 0- ±12 V
Consumption Voltage 4 VA at UN
Current 0.4VA at IN
Continuous Current 2 x IN
35-70 Hz
Frequency Range Proportional Band ±25-125% load
Dead Band Zone ±1-10% load
Contact Rating AC: 400 V, 2 A, 250 VA; DC: 110 V, 2 A, 100 W
Operating Temperature –20°C to +70°C
EMC CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Burn-in 50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material Polycarbonate, flame retardant
Weight 0.7 kg
Dimensions H 70 mm (2.7“); W 150 mm (5.9“); D 115 mm (4.5“)
Installation 35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
Accessories
www.littelfuse.com/t4900
Enables operation where system voltage is set
externally such as in grid-parallel operation
Enabling alternative use as power factor
controller, thus maintaining fixed power factor
(cos phi) in installations with fluctuating
inductive loads
Galvanic isolated inputs
Other supply voltages, nominal currents and combinations are available on request.
A
Inputs for disabling internal
voltage control
Visual indication of voltage,
increase/decrease and
unload signals
Direct line-line voltage
supply (up to 690 Vac)
IN
T4900.0010
BENEFITS
Power factor control
function
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Features
Adjustable delta voltage,
stability and % VAR load
deviation by front panel
potentiometers
T4910-07 Potentiometer with Cable for
External Power Factor Setting
External contact between terminals
12 (COM) and 28 (PF ON). Included.
82
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Generator Control
Basic Generator Protection
T5000 Series
Paralleling Relay
Description
The T5000 Paralleling Relay is a check synchronizer, inhibiting
closure of circuit breaker if synchronizing parameters such as
voltage, frequency and phase angle are outside limits, thus
preventing generator damage and disturbance to the busbar.
The T5000 can also be used as synchronizing aid for manual
or automatic synchronization where voltage and frequency
are adjusted by the operator to roughly the values required,
and the unit will provide a closing signal to the circuit breaker
at phase accordance.
Automatic closure
In order to use the T5000 with automatic closure, terminals
19 and 20 should be interconnected, and the T5000 will now
operate as illustrated in graph at left.
Line I shows the closing signal directly from the T5000.
Line II shows the main contact closure with an additional
circuit breaker operation time of 50 msec.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
L1
L2
L3
Features & Benefits
1
Features
Visual indication of
voltage and closing signal
2
T5000
3
6
5
4
6
2
7
0
9
19 20
0.15 Hz
2
10
CLOSING
SIGNAL
AUTOMATIC CLOSURE
4
6
+ 50 msec.
Adjustable combined
setting, %U, of
synchronizing window
(delta frequency, delta voltage,
delta phase)
Facilitates adjustment during installation and
commissioning
Automatic
closure function
Enables use with fast reacting circuit breakers
Galvanic isolated inputs
DIN rail or screw-mount
N-G continuity alarm
Ordering Information
Ordering
Number
T5000.0010
T5000.0020
T5000.0030
T5000.0040
T5000.0050
T5000.0060
T5000.0070
T5000.0080
T5000.0090
T5000.0100
Terminals
1-1
1-3
5-7
6-7
450 V
230 V
480 V
110 V
127 V
480 V
450 V
110 V
450 V
660 V
Passive filtering
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Easy installation
Monitors neutral-to-ground integrity and alarms
if ground path becomes open circuit
Eliminates nuisance tripping
Function
Specifications
400 V
415 V
100 V
120 V
415 V
400 V
100 V
400 V
Provides quick and concise status information
Max. Voltage
Voltage Range Consumption Frequency Range Voltage Difference Frequency Difference Phase Difference Contact rating Operating Temperature Dielectric Test EMC Approvals Burn-in Enclosure Material Weight Dimensions Installation D f =9-13.5°, D F=0.2-0.3 Hz
D U=15-20%, D f =9-13.5°, D F=0.2-0.3 Hz
D U=15-20%, D f =9-13.5°, D F=0.2-0.3n Hz
D f =9-13.5°, D F=0.2-0.3 Hz
Other supply voltages, nominal currents and combinations are available on request.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
83
660 V
70-110%
2 x 5 VA max.
45-65 Hz
10-15%
0.15 - 0.225 Hz
Combined setting
6-9°
AC: 400 V, 5 A, 1250 VA; DC: 150 V, 5 A, 120 W
–20°C to +70°C
2500 V, 50 Hz
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Certified by major marine classification societies
50 hours before final test
Polycarbonate, flame retardant
0.7 kg
H 70 mm (2.7“); W 100 mm (3.9“);
D 115 mm (4.5“)
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
}
www.littelfuse.com/t5000
9
GENERATOR CONTROL
(Paralleling Relay)
BENEFITS
Generator Control
Basic
E7800 Series
Motorized Potentiometer
Description
The E7800 Motorized Potentiometer is typically used as an
interface between increase/decrease contacts and a device
requiring control/adjustments by an external potentiometer.
In generator control applications, the E7800 can be used as
speed trim of an electronic speed governor, interfacing the
synchronizer or the load sharer. It can also be used alone
for manual speed adjustment or speed trim of electronic
governors, or for remote control of generator voltage, power
factor and reactive load (E7800 connected to Automatic
Voltage Regulator (AVR)).
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Features & Benefits
POWER
SUPPLY
E7800
(Motorized Potentiometer)
INCR
M
DEC
GENERATOR CONTROL
9
Features
Wire-wound
potentiometer
BENEFITS
Longer life expectation than carbon
potentiometers
Friction clutch
Motor can turn potentiometer against end
position continuously, without damaging it
Resistance from 100 Ω
to 10 kΩ
Wide range of potentiometers suitable for
any governor or AVR
24 V DC version with
Adjustable RPM
Simple fine tuning possibility in regulation
applications
Built-in dust seal
Long life expectation
Ordering Information
Ordering
Number
Voltage
RPM
Potentiometer
E7800.00.xx
230 V-240 Vac
1.0 (50 Hz)
5 kΩ-1 turn
E7800.01.xx
220 V-240 Vac
2.0 (50 Hz)
5 kΩ-10 turn
E7800.02.xx
100 V-110 Vac
1.0 (50 Hz)
5 kΩ-1 turn
E7800.03.xx
24 Vac
2.0 (50 Hz)
5 kΩ-10 turn
E7800.04.xx
100 V-110 Vac
2.0 (50 Hz)
5 kΩ-10 turn
E7800.05.xx
220 V-240 Vac
2.0 (50 Hz)
5 kΩ-1 turn
E7800.09.xx
24 Vac
1.0 (50 Hz)
5 kΩ-1 turn
E7800.23.xx
24 Vdc
0.8-6 Adj.
5 kΩ-1 turn
E7800.24.xx
24 Vdc
0.8-6 Adj.
5 kΩ-10 turn
E7800.90.00
24 Vdc
0.8-6 Adj.
DC output voltage,
0-1.0 V (0-100%)
Specifications
Voltage range AC: 90-120%
DC: 75-125%
Consumption AC: 2.5 VA
DC: 2 W
Operating Temperature –15° C to +70° C
EMC CE according to
EN50081-1
EN50082-1
EN50081-2
EN50082-2
Approvals CSA, UL component recognition
50 hours before final test
Burn-in Weight 0.35 kg
H 96 mm (3.8”); W 96 mm (3.8”); D 80 mm (3.1”)
Dimensions Panel cut out H 92 mm (3.6”); W 92 mm (3.6”)
The E7800 cannot be used for both AC and DC. The unit must be specified to order.
Other voltages and combinations are available on request.
Indicate potentiometer value by replacing “xx” with digits per this table.
Index
“xx”
00
01
02
03
Potentiometer
value
5 kΩ (standard)
100 Ω
200 Ω
500 Ω
www.littelfuse.com/e7800
Index
“xx”
04
05
06
Potentiometer
value
1 kΩ
2 kΩ
10 kΩ
84
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Generator Control
Basic
T7900 Series
Electronic Potentiometer
Description
The T7900 Electronic Potentiometer is used as converter
between pulse contacts and a device requiring control
adjustment by a voltage or current signal, such as an
electronic speed controller. The T7900 acts in a similar
manner to a motorized potentiometer, except that the
outputs are a voltage, a current or a pulse width modulated
signal (PWM), while the motorized potentiometer has a
variable resistor output.
In generator control applications, the T7900 can be used
together with a Synchronizer and a Load Sharer. The T7900
converts the increase and decrease pulses of these modules
into a suitable analog voltage, current or PWM signal. This
analog output signal can be used as a control input to the
electronic speed controller.
–
REF
+
Features & Benefits
POWER REF.
IN1 IN2 IN3 INCR REF DEC
T7900
(Electronic Potentiometer)
Optional
AC Supply
L2
±10 V 0-20 mA PWM
T7900.0010
1-3
24 Vdc/Vac
T7900.0030
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Provides optimum controlabilty of speed
governors and voltage regulators regardless of
generator size
9
Power reference function
Enables alternative use as power reference
unit providing generator load set point in grid
parallel installations
Available with Vac supply
Enables direct supply from installation
Provides quick and concise status information
Easy installation
Supply
8-36 Vdc/Vac
Max. 120 mA at 24 Vdc
Consumption
Output Ranges
–10 V-+10 V (or any part of this, e.g. 0 V-+1 V)
0-20 mA (or any part this, e.g. 4 mA-20 mA)
0-100% PWM 500 Hz (or any part of this e.g. 10-90%)
0-100% PWM 2.94 MHz (or any part of this
e.g. 10%- 90%)
PWM Output Signal Frequency: 500 Hz of 2,94 KHz. Level: 0-10 V
Default reference: 50%
Operating
Temperature
–20°C to +70°C
EMC
EN50263
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Enclosure Material Polycarbonate. Flame retardant
Weight
0.3 kg for T7900-00, 0.5 kg for other types
DimensionsH 70 mm (2.7“); W 100 mm (3.9“);
D 115 mm (4.5“)
35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
Installation
Terminals
11-12
Independent ramp-up &
ramp-down time setting
Specifications
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
BENEFITS
Ensures possible use with a broad variety of
speed governors and voltage regulators
Visual indication of
increase/decrease signals
DIN-rail or screwmount & adjustment by
potentiometers
0-10 V REF
L1
Features
Wide selection of output
ranges including PWM
GENERATOR CONTROL
SUPPLY
24 Vdc/Vac
RESET
Simplified Circuit Diagram
250 Vac
85
www.littelfuse.com/t7900
Generator Control
Basic
M8100 Series
Synchroscope
Description
The M8100 Synchroscope provides illuminated indication of
the phase and frequency difference between voltages on
two separate AC systems, e.g. a generator and a busbar. The
M8100 will also indicate whether or not the two systems are
on voltage.
The M8100 is also available in a version with a built-in relay
for automatic closure of the circuit breaker (Synchro Check
Relay). The voltage and frequency are adjusted by the
operator to roughly match the values required, and the unit
will provide a closing signal to the circuit breaker at phase
accordance.
Features & Benefits
Features
Simplified Circuit Diagram
M8100
(Synchroscope)
GENERATOR CONTROL
9
L1
L2
L3
DEAD BUS 9
ENABLE 10
4
GEN. 5
6
High resolution visual
indication by 38 LEDs
M8100
(Synchroscope)
1
BUS. 2
3
1
BUS. 2
3
L1
L2
L3
7 CLOSING
8 SIGNAL
4
GEN. 5
6
Without Check Synchronizer
G
With Check Synchronizer
Available with check
synchronizer relay
Enables use as manual synchronizing unit, or as
auto-synchronizer back-up
Versions available with
dead bus closure
Enables use as dead bus monitor in back-up
power installation
Galvanic isolated inputs
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation including spikes
Sturdy casing for flushmount installation, Q96
standard, with protection
class IP52 on the front
Easy installation, allowing use in harsh
environments
G
Specifications
Max. Voltage
Voltage Range Consumption Frequency Range Pull-in/Drop-out
Diff. Frequency Operating Temperature EMC Approvals Burn-in Enclosure Material Weight Dimensions Panel Cut-out Ordering Information
Ordering
Number
M8100.0010
M8100.0020
M8100.0030
M8100.0040
M8100.0050
M8100.0060
M8100.0070
M8100.0080
Terminals
1-1
1-3
5-7
6-7
450 V
230 V
480 V
110 V
450 V
230 V
480 V
110 V
Function
400 V
415 V
100 V
400 V
415 V
100 V
With check synchronizer relay
With check synchronizer relay
With check synchronizer relay
With check synchronizer relay
660 V
70-110%
2 x 3 VA max.
35-70 Hz
±9 Hz
–20°C to +70°C
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Certified by major marine classification societies
50 hours before final test
Flame retardant
0.7 kg
H 96 mm (3.8“); W 96 mm (3.8“); D 80 mm (3.1“)
H 92 mm (3.6“); W 92 mm (3.6“)
Unit with check synchronizer relay
}
Voltage Difference 10-20%
Frequency Difference 0.15-0.3 Hz
Combined setting
Phase Difference 6-12°
Dead-bus Delay 1s-5s
Dead-bus Voltage Offset 20%-40%
Min. Generator Voltage
80% of nominal voltage
for DB Closure AC: 250 V, 1.2 V, 125 VA; DC: 30 V, 1 A, 30 W
Contact Rating Other voltages are available on request.
www.littelfuse.com/m8100
BENEFITS
Phase and frequency difference; Bus and
generator voltage and phase accordance.
Provides quick, concise status information;
steady viewing of the synchronization process.
86
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Generator Control
Basic
T8400 Series
Blackout Limiter
Description
The T8400 Blackout Limiter enables fast clearing of a blackout.
It is possible to monitor up to 4 generators with 1 unit and
maximum 8 generators with 2 units. If a blackout occurs, the
first generator to have more than 90% voltage will close the
generator breaker.
Function:
When a 24 Vdc signal is supplied over terminals 15 and 16,
the T8400 becomes active, indicating that a blackout occurred.
All generators are now checked and the first generator to
have more than 90% voltage will close the contact to the
generator breaker. If generator 1 is the first generator to have
more than 90%, this will happen after 1 sec. If generator
2 is the first generator on voltage it will happen after 1.5 sec.
If generator 3 is the first one, it will happen after 2 sec. etc.
By adding a second unit with time delays 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5 sec.,
8 generators can be handled. When one of the generators
has been switched on, the blackout signal of 24 Vdc should
be switched off.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
GEN 3
VOLT
CLOSE
G/B 3
GEN 4
VOLT
CLOSE
G/B 4
NEXT
T8400
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
BLACKOUT
START
T8400
(Blackout Limiter)
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
8
Features & Benefits
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Features
STANDBY
–
CLOSE
G/B 1
CLOSE
G/B 2
GEN. 2
VOLT
+
BLACKOUT
SIGNAL
24 Vdc
Shore G/B 1 G/B 2 G/B 3 G/B 4
Ordering Information
Ordering
Number
Terminals
1-3
17-19
8-10
24-26
function
T8400.0010
400 V
1-1.5-2-2.5 sec.
T8400.0020
400 V
3-3.5-4-4.5 sec.
T8400.0030
230 V
1-1.5-2-2.5 sec.
T8400.0040
230 V
3-3.5-4-4.5 sec.
T8400.0050
415 V
1-1.5-2-2.5 sec.
T8400.0060
415 V
3-3.5-4-4.5 sec.
Independent 24 Vdc supply
with wide tolerance
Safe operation. Operates regardless of system
voltage failure
Galvanic isolated inputs
Protects the unit against high AC voltage and
currents from the installation, including spikes
DIN-rail or screw-mount
Easy installation
Specifications
Supply Voltage
24 Vdc 30%
Max. Generator Voltage 660 Vac
35-70 Hz
Frequency Range Contact Rating AC: 250 V, 2 A, 250 VA
DC: 60 V, 2A, 100 W
Operating Temperature –20°C to +70°C
EMC CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Burn-in 50 hours before final test
Weight 0.5 kg
Dimensions H 70 mm (2.7“); W 150 mm (5.9“);
D 115 mm (4.5“)
Installation 35 mm DIN rail or 4 mm (3/16”) screws
Other supply voltages are available on request.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Monitors up to
4 generators; 8 generators
by interconnecting 2 units
87
www.littelfuse.com/t8400
9
GENERATOR CONTROL
GEN 1
VOLT
BENEFITS
Economic solution. Only 1 or 2 units for monitoring
installations with several generators. Occupying
less space in the switch panel
Generator Control
Basic and Advanced
C6200 Flexgen Series
Generator Control
Description
FlexGen controllers are intended for paralleling of generators
with each other or with the grid. One FlexGen controller is
installed for each generator in the installation and handles all
electrical control.
There are two versions available, Basic and Advanced.
Both versions include basic functions such as autosynchronizing,
frequency control, active load sharing, dead bus monitoring and
reverse power protection. In addition the FlexGen Advanced
contains reactive load sharing, voltage matching, power factor
control, grid-parallel operation control, and protection against
excitation loss, RoCoF (df/dt), and vector shift. FlexGen Advanced
also contains over-current and short-circuit protection and power
management features like preferential load trip, load depending
start/stop and large consumer control.
9
Simplified Circuit Diagram
GENERATOR CONTROL
Both models include MODBUS RTU interface enabling integration
with equipment from other manufacturers, for example, control
and monitoring from PC with a graphic SCADA interface. FlexGen
is type-approved by major marine classification societies and can
be used for marine power management systems.
Grid Parallel
Grid Parallel with Local Bus
Island Mode
C6200
C6200
200
LOAD
C
C6200
G
G
C6200
G
C6200
C6200
C6200
G
G
Ordering Information
G
G
Accessories
Ordering Number
Model name
C6200.0060
FlexGen Basic
C6200.0100
FlexGen Advanced
accessories
requirement
page
C6500
Recommended
See above
C6500 FlexGen UI User Interface Module
Provides indication of measurements, alarms,
alarm log and configuration of the generator
module.
The user interface is designed for mounting
in the switch panel door. It furnishes a large
back-lit display showing all electrical measurements and
control parameters.
g
g
g
g
g
www.littelfuse.com/
www.littelfuse.com/c6200
C6200
88
User interface unit for any FlexGen controller
Separate LEDs provide clear indication
Valuable alarm log
Onsite configuration capability
Connects through the RS232 serial link
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Generator Control
Basic and Advanced
FlexGen Technical Data
Features & Benefits
Features
BASIC
ADVANCED
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-phase true RMS measurement
Frequency control
Automatic synchronization
Active load sharing
Voltage control/Voltage matching
Reactive load sharing
•
Wiring Diagram
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BENEFITS
3-phase true RMS
measurement
Analog outputs for speed
and voltage control
Reliable measurement, high noise immunity
Fits most electronic governors and ECUs
PWM outputs for speed
and voltage control
Compatible with e.g. CAT and Woodward
Pulse outputs for speed
and voltage control
Compatible with conventional governors,
motorized potentiometers and some ECUs
10 programmable
Inputs and outputs
Flexible configuration for a wide range of
applications such as marine PMS, on site
power or grid parallel applications
Type-approved by marine
classification societies
Approved for marine power management
Specifications
Auxiliary Supply
10 Vdc to 36 Vdc (24 Vdc-58%/+50%)
Generator Voltage 63 V-690 V
Generator Rated Frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz
5A
C/T Secondary Current Consumption 7W
Burden C/T Input 0.4 VA at IN
Ambient Temp Range –20°C to +70°C
IEC 60068-2-6
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-30
Humidity EMC
IEC 61000-4-3:2006, IEC 61000-4-6:2004,
IEC 61000-4-5:2005, IACS E10:2006 Test No.15,
CISPR 16-1:1999, CISPR 16-2:2002
230 Vac/2 A & 30 Vdc/2 A
Relay Contacts MODBUS RTU
External Communication
EnclosureIP20
1,5 Kg
Weight H 182 mm (7.2”); W 282 mm (11.1”);
Dimensions
D 50 mm (2.0”)
L1
L2
L3
G ND
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
G ND
Prot Trip
C B Close
Unload T ip
FLEX GEN GENERATOR CONTROL
C6200
Prg Out 3
54
55
56
28
Gen
Voltage
Gen
Cur ent
L1
L2
5
6
S2/ S1/
L3 L3
13 14
65
66
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
47
C/B Close
50
49
P ot Trp
51
52
53
Unload Trp
FLEX GEN GENERATOR CONTROL
C6200
C/B
Ala m
67
G overno r
Analog Out 1
Speed Control
V/
DC
32 33 34 35
ref pwm mA
ParallelLines
kW gnd VAr
26
27
28
54
55
56
Alarm
65
66 67
G overno r
DG1
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
31
+
Aux
Supply
S1
27
29
Prg Out 3
Prg Out 2
26
ParalelLines
2
L2
Busbar
Voltage
Prg Out 2
kW gnd VAr
Prg Out 1
Analog Out 1
Speed Control
V/
ref pwm mA
DC
32 33 34 35
S1
C/B
1
L1
Prg Out 1
6
45
Freq C r
D sabe
5
S2/ S1/
L3 L3
13 14
44
Reset Aarm
L2
43
Unoad
L1
42
C/B Bock
Gen
Current
41
C/B
Gen
Vo tage
40
Freq C r
D sabe
31
+
Aux
Supply
Reset Aarm
29
Unoad
2
L2
Busbar
Vo tage
Manua
1
L1
C/B
G ND
G ND
DG2
89
www.littelfuse.com/c6200
9
GENERATOR CONTROL
Reverse power protection
Excitation loss protection
RoCoF protection (df/dt)
Vector shift protection
Overcurrent (I >) and
Overload protection (P>)
Short-circuit protection (I >>)
Overvoltage (U >)
Undervoltage (U <)
Overfrequency (F >)
Underfrequency (F <)
Dead bus monitoring /Black-out limiter
External circuit-breaker trip
Engine error trip
Preferential load trip (PM)
Load depending start/stop (PM)
Large consumer control (PM)
Dynamic grid-parallel operation control
Analog I/O
MODBUS RTU (RS485 interface)
Features
Generator Control
Advanced
sigma SERIES
Generator Control and Protection System
Description
1
The SIGMA Generator Control and Protection System is a range of
integrated modules for protection and control of marine and land
based generators. The modules are marine approved and include all
relevant functions, such as protection of generators, synchronizing
and active/ reactive load sharing and Power Management.
2
1 IO/P Module S6000
Input/ Output and Protection Module
The SIGMA S6000 performs all measurements on the
generator side (voltages, currents, frequency), does the
generator protection, includes a non-essential load trip in
two steps and includes three measurement transducers.
2 S/LS Module S6100
Synchronizing and Load-Sharing Module
This module performs the control functions like synchronizing
and active and reactive load sharing. It performs the
measurements on the busbar side.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
A
GENERATOR CONTROL
9
S6610
(Power
Manager
Module)
B
S6500
(User Interface
Module)
2
Accessories
S6500
B
2
S6100
(User Interface
Module)
S6100
(Synchronizing &
Load Sharing
Module)
S6500
B
2
S6100
(Synchronizing &
Load Sharing
Module)
S6610 Power Manager Module
Controls the number of generators that are
supplying to the bus. It will issue start and
stop signals to the generators depending
on power requirement. There are 10 inputs
for large consumer requests.
A
(User Interface
Module)
(Synchronizing &
Load Sharing
Module)
B
Σ S GMA
Page
G n
olt
1
1
S6000
(Input/Output &
Protection
Module)
1
S6000
(Input/Output &
Protection
Module)
S6000
(Input/Output &
Protection
Module)
GEN
B
W
k Ar
M sc
rot
PM
nt r
IN OPERATION
Mode
O F DUTY
Yes
ENG NE ERROR
o
Res t
GEN
A
Amp
C/B CLOSED
PRO EC ION R P
est
S6500 User Interface Module
This unit is optional, as the S6000/S6100
also can be programmed from a PC.
It is possible to use one or more units
per installation.
Du y
PWR1
PWR2
A ARM
GEN
C
Ordering Information
Ordering
Number
description
S6000.0010
Input/ Output and Protection Module– 5 A C/T
S6000.0020
Input/ Output and Protection Module– 1 A C/T
S6100.0010
Synchronization and Load Sharing Module
accessories
requirement
page
S6500.0010
Optional
See above
S6610.0010
Optional
See above
www.littelfuse.com/s6000
90
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Generator Control
Advanced
SIGMA Technical Data
Features
Reverse power protection
Overcurrent trip
Short-circuit trip
Power trip
Excitation loss relay trip
Over/ Undervoltage trip
Nonessential load trip in 2 steps
RS485/ Modbus RTU (RS485)
Synchronizer
Load sharer
VAR load sharer
Indication of measurements
Programming of the
S6000 and S6100 modules
Load depending start and
stop of generators
Large consumer request
Features & Benefits
S/LS
PM
ui
Sigma Module
Module Module
s6000
s6100
s6610
s6500
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Analog outputs for speed
and voltage control
Fits most electronic governors and ECUs
PWM outputs for speed
and voltage control
Compatible with e.g. CAT and Woodward
Pulse outputs for speed
and voltage control
Compatible with conventional governors,
motorized potentiometers and some ECUs
Large consumer request
inputs with load feed back
Optimizes quantity of running generators
and saves fuel
Type-approved by marine
classification societies
Pre-configured Marine Power
Management System
Protection Functions
C/B Trip Relay Contact rating:
AC: 8 A, 250 Vac; DC: 8 A, 35 Vdc
NE1 Trip Relay Contact rating:
AC: 8 A, 250 Vac; DC: 8 A, 35 Vdc
NE2 Trip Relay Contact rating:
AC: 8 A, 250 Vac; DC: 8 A, 35 Vdc
Alarm Relay Contact rating:
AC: 8 A, 250 Vac; DC: 8 A, 35 Vdc
CAN Bus
Connection:Screw terminals,2-wire with COM
(limp back function)
Protocol:
CANopen derivative
RS232
Connection:
Customized plug, 4-wire (non-isolated)
Function:
Configuration, Debugging or
firmware update
Protocol:
ANSI terminal
RS485
Connection:
Screw terminals, 2-wire (isolated)
Protocol:MODBUS-RTU
Frequency Control
Next S6100
SHAFT GENERATOR
(GRID)
Next S6000 / S6100
EMC
Marine Tests Connections Mounting
Weight Dimensions
91
EN 50081-2:1993, EN 50263: 1999
EN 60945:1997, IACS E10:1997
Plug-in screw terminals
(spring terminals available as option)
Screw mounting (4 pcs. 4.2 x 12 mm)
1,150 g
H 145 mm (5.7”)
W 190 mm (7.5”)
D 64.5 mm (2.5”)
www.littelfuse.com/s6100
9
GENERATOR CONTROL
Wiring Diagram
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Reliable measurement, high noise immunity
Primary Supply
+24 Vdc (-30%/+30 %) Isolated, 500 mA
Backup Supply
+24 Vdc (-30%/+30 %) Isolated, 500 mA
Environmental Temp Range –15°C to +70°C
Gen. Phase-Phase Voltage (GPPV) 63.0-690.0 Vac (-2 % /+2 %) 3-phased
63-32 kV AC
Gen. Indicated Voltage (GIV) CT Secondary Current (CTSC) 1 A or 5 A (consumption 25 mW or
125 mW) 3-phased
Gen. Rated Frequency (GRF) 40.0-500.0 Hz
0.5-3,000.0 A / 500-30,000 A
Gen. Maximum Current (GMC) •
•
Sync On
BENEFITS
3-phase true RMS
measurement
Specifications (S6000)
•
Large consumer inhibit
Features
Engine Control
Engine Control
M2000 Basic Engine Control......................................................................93
M0600 Shutdown Unit...............................................................................94
M2500 Advanced Engine Control..............................................................95
M2600 Shutdown Unit...............................................................................96
For More Information…
and to download our
Engine Control Brochure, visit
www.littelfuse.com/enginecontrol
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
92
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Engine Control
Basic
M2000 Series
Engine Control
Description
The M2000 Engine Control controls start and stop of the
engine, monitors and protects the engine during start and
operation, and simultaneously indicates the engine and alarm
status on the front of the unit. It has 9 shutdown/alarm inputs.
It is controlling the cranking, fuel valve and stop solenoid of
the engine. It is possible to configure the unit to perform up
to 6 start attempts, with user configurable crank and rest
periods. When the engine fires, cranking will be disconnected
by activating the crank disconnect input from a tacho relay or
from a direct measurement from a magnetic pick up. When
stopping the engine, a generator circuit breaker trip is available
for genset applications. A stop delay can be configured for
cooling down the engine before stop. M2000 includes cable
check of all sensor inputs. Basic configuration can be set by
dip-switches on the rear of the unit.
Extended configuration is possible using a PC. Easy installation
is ensured by means of clamping fittings, and plug-in
connection terminals. The M2000 includes an RS485 interface
enabling MODBUS RTU communication. The M2000 has been
designed and tested for use in harsh environments.
Wiring Diagram
1 LOCAL
START
17
2 AUTO
START
OUTPUTS
3 MODE
27
Features & Benefits
4
Features
8 Alarm/shutdown
inputs
Cable monitoring on
sensor inputs
Speed detection from
magnetic pick-up
INPUTS
15
M2000
ENGINE CONTROLLER
16 CIRCUIT
CHECK
+
29
–
31
24 V
32
Accessories
Fail safe system
10
No tacho relay required
Type-approved by marine
classification societies
Applicable in marine control and alarm systems
RS485 Modbus RTU
Communication with HMI and SCADA systems
Specifications
Voltage Supply
12-24 Vdc±30% (8-32 Vdc)
Consumption
Max. 180 mA
Inputs
7 normally open contacts; 1 tacho voltage;1 pick-up
Tacho Input
Square or sine wave between 0 Vdc and
supply voltage
Pick-up Input
Square or sine wave, range 2.5 Vac to 33 Vac
Tolerance, Freq. Meas.±2%
Frequency Range
50 Hz to 10 kHz
Outputs
11 open collector outputs, max. 150 mA per channel
230 Vac/2 A; 30 Vdc/2 A, 30 W
Siren Relay Contact
Tolerance, Delays ± 2%
LED Flash Frequency Slow flashing light: 1.25 Hz ±10%
Quick Flashing Light 5 Hz ±10%
Programming 16 dip-switches or via RS232 interface
Communication RS485 interface
Protocol MODBUS-RTU
Baud Rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Operating Temp. –20°C to +70°C
Humidity 95% RH at 20°C
Vibration Test 4 g RMS according to IEC 60068-2-64
Approvals Certified by major marine classification societies
50 hours before final test
Burn-in Weight 0.4 kg
Dimensions H 144 mm (5.7”); W 144 mm (5.7”); D 35 mm (1.4”)
Panel Cut-out H 138 mm (5.4”); W 138 mm (5.4”)
Protection Degree-Front IP54 or IP32 (see Type Description)
M0500 Tacho Detector
Reads engine speed from frequency of the
generator output voltage. The reading is
converted to a square wave signal and this
signal is provided on a dedicated output.
K3452 RS232 Cable
For configuration from PC.
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
control power
M2000.0130
12 V–24 Vdc, IP54 at front.
Accessories
Requirement
Page
M0500
Optional
121
K3452
Optional
121
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
93
www.littelfuse.com/m2000
ENGINE CONTROL
28
30
BENEFITS
Monitoring of e.g. oil pressure, coolant
temperature and engine speed
Engine Control
Advanced
M0600 Series
Shutdown Unit
Description
The M0600 Shutdown Unit is a back-up protection device
designed for marine engines. It is ensuring safety shutdown
of the engine in case normal primary shutdown fails. The
unit works as a stand-alone protection unit, and is for DIN-rail
mounting. Alternatively it can be mounted directly on the
back of the M2000 Engine Controller.
Together with Engine controller units M2000 it can be
used to build a complete control, alarm and safety system
for marine engines. The unit has inputs for overspeed, low
oil pressure and one more user defined parameter, which
could be e.g. high water temperature. It also has an input to
indicate that the engine is running and one to indicate that
the engine is stopping.
The monitoring of low oil pressure is only active when the
engine is running with a few seconds delay after detection
of the running signal. This time delay can be defined via
programming switches. A normally open (NO) output relay
can give a closing signal which can be used to stop the
engine via it’s stop coil, and a normally closed (NC) relay can
open in order to stop the engine via the fuel valve. The length
of the relay activation time can be defined via programming
switches.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
M0600
(Shut-Down Unit)
OVS
SPA
SENSOR
INPUTS
LOP
10
RUN
The M0600 is type approved by major marine classification
societies.
ENGINE CONTROL
STP
Input terminals
Overspeed
1. OVS
2. SPA
Spare
3. LOP
Low Oil Pressure
4. RUN
Running (Crank Disconnect)
5. STP
Stop (Engine Stop)
6. + 24 V Supply Voltage (+)
Supply Voltage (-)
7. – Supply Voltage (-)
8. – +24 V
SHUTDOWN
–
–
NO
COM
NC
+ –
24 V
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Delay for Spa
Features & Benefits
Delay for LOP
Features
BENEFITS
Runs independantly, as a back-up for the M2000
M0600.0010
100 msec.
500 msec.
Stand-alone unit
M0600.0020
1.5 sec.
1.5 sec.
Combines with M2000
Provides complete redundancy
Mountable on
rear of M2000
Flexibility of use; Also DIN-rail mountable
www.littelfuse.com/m2600
94
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Engine Control
Advanced
M2500 Series
Engine Control & Monitoring Unit
Description
The M2500 is designed for control and monitoring of engines
in marine applications such as auxiliary generators, emergency
generators and propulsion engines. The unit allows manual
(local) and remote (automatic) start of the engine and will
monitor all engine parameters.
Engine parameters can be monitored via digital and analog
sensor inputs. Cable monitoring is available on all sensor
inputs. Twelve programmable output relays are available for
configuration of common warnings, alarms or shutdowns.
Additionally there are pre-defined outputs for common alarms,
shutdowns and status indications. The LED display provides
an easy overview on the engine status. The front label next to
the LEDs is an exchangeable paper label, thus the text can be
in any language. A large graphical display provides indication of
measurements, alarms, shutdowns and an event log.
Features & Benefits
Features
9 digital alarm/shutdown inputs
8 Analog
measurement inputs
Cable monitoring on
sensor inputs
Cable monitoring on
solenoid outputs
Large graphical display
SD card
USB mass-storage device
RS485 Modbus RTU
Communication with the engine ECU is possible via SAE CAN
J1939. RS485 MODBUS is available for communication with
external equipment such as alarm systems or PLCs. Easy and
user friendly configuration of the unit by the front panel or
remotely by PC/ USB interface. The configuration is pin code
protected. The unit includes an SD card slot for downloading
or uploading the configuration via an SD card. A copy of the
engine log is automatically saved on the SD card. The M2500
unit carries the CE label and has been approved by the major
marine classification societies. Together with the optional
M2600 Shutdown Unit, M2500 can form a complete engine
control, alarm and safety system.
Monitoring and indication of analog measurements
Fail safe system
Fail safe system, no need of separate cable
monitoring module
Easy overview of engine condition and operation
Storage of copies of log and configuration files,
programmable from SD card
Applicable in marine control and alarm systems
Easy access to log and configuration files.
Programming software installed on the module.
Communication with HMI and SCADA systems
Specifications
Operating Temp. Humidity Vibration EMC
Enclosure
Primary Supply
Backup Supply Accessories
M2600 Shutdown Unit
Safety shutdown device for protection of
marine engines. Speed detection from
magnetic pickup or digital input.
All Relays except where otherwise specified
Relay Response Time 20 ms (worst case)
Contact Set(s)
1 normally open
Contact Rating
AC: 1 A, 250 Vac; DC: 1 A, 35 Vac
K2502 SD card
Included with the M2500.
K1025 USB A to B cable
Run/ Stop Solenoid relay Relay Response Time 20 ms (worst case)
Contact Set(s) 1 normally open
Contact Rating: AC: 8 A, 250 Vac; DC: 8 A, 35 Vdc
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
control power
M2500.0010
12-24 Vdc
Accessories
Requirement
Page
M2600.0010
Optional
121
K2502
Included
121
K1025
Optional
121
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
–15°C to +70°C
95%
DNV vibrations class B
IEC 60945
IP44 (panel front only)
+24 Vdc (-30 %/+30 %)
+24 Vdc (-30 %/+30 %)
System fault output relay (Siren) Relay response time 20 ms (worst case)
Contact Set(s) 1 change over
Contact Rating: AC: 1 A, 250 Vac; DC: 1 A, 35 Vdc
Dimensions H 137 mm (6.2”); W 209 mm (8.2”);
D 39 mm (1.5”)
95
www.littelfuse.com/m2500
10
ENGINE CONTROL
Type-approved by marine
classification societies
BENEFITS
Monitoring of e.g. oil pressure, coolant
temperature and engine speed
Engine Control
Advanced
M2600 Series
Shutdown Unit
Description
The M2600 Shutdown Unit is a back-up protection device
designed for marine engines. It is ensuring safety shutdown
of the engine in case normal primary shutdown fails. Together
with Engine controller units M2000 or M2500 or other
engine controllers it can be used to build a complete control,
alarm and safety system for marine engines. Alternatively
it can work as a standalone primary shutdown unit in
applications where shutdown functionality is not included
in the start/stop device of the engine. The M2600 design is
based entirely on discreet logic, thus meeting requirements
to safety shutdown devices from the marine classification
societies.
All inputs and outputs of the M2600 have corresponding LED
indication clearly showing whether they are active or not.
The unit furnishes 10 digital shutdown inputs. One is predefined for overspeed and another for emergency stop. All
inputs are dry contacts. Output relays are provided for control
of the fuel valve and the stop solenoid when stopping the
engine in normal conditions. Another output relay is provided
for emergency shutdown. Additionally the unit provides an
output for circuit breaker trip for use with gen-sets. Engine
speed (rpm) can be detected from magnetic and inductive
pick-ups connected to dedicated inputs. Alternatively the
speed can be detected from digital inputs. M2600 provides
cable monitoring on all sensor inputs and for the shutdown
relay output. Configuration is made solely with the dipswitches and rotary switches on the unit.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
PRIMARY +24 V
PRIMARY
SECONDARY +24 V
41
39
40
COM
15
38
14
FUEL OIL
LEAK
SIREN RELAY
37
13
LUBE OIL
PRESS
36
12
11
10
COOLANT
LEVEL
?
COOLANT
TEMP
PICK UP
EMERGENCY
STOP
7
8
9
6
5
4
S4
OVERSPEED
TEST
S3
SD RESET
S2
SIREN RESET
S1
3
2
1
INPUTS
STOP SOLENOID
34
35
FUEL VALVE
33
32
SHUT DOWN
31
C/B TRIP
ALARM
30
29
28
CABLE BREAK
27
SHUTDOWN
COM
26
STOP ERROR
25
RUNN NG
M2600
(Shut-Down Unit)
OVERRIDE
ENGINE CONTROL
10
24
23
22
SECONDARY SUPPLY
PRIMARY SUPPLY
OUTPUTS
21
SECONDARY
Features & Benefits
Specifications
Features
BENEFITS
10 digital shutdown inputs
with cable monitoring
Monitoring of e.g. oil pressure, coolant
temperature and engine speed
Speed detection
via magnetic or
inductive pick-up
No tacho relay required
LEDs for status indication
Easy overview of engine condition and
operation
Cable monitoring on
fuel valve and
stop solenoid output
Fail safe system, no need of separate cable
monitoring module
Configuration by
DIP switches
Easy installation and configuration
Operating Temp. –15°C to +70°C
95%
Humidity Vibration DNV vibrations class B
EMC
IEC 60945
Enclosure
IP30
Primary Supply
+24 Vdc (-30 %/+30 %) <3 W
Backup Supply +24 Vdc (-30 %/+30 %) <3 W
Connection
Screw terminals
Type
Magnetic (2-wire), NPN and PNP (3-wire)
Rated Frequency
25.0-25,000 Hz
9 Digital Sensor InputsNormally open contacts to COM (default) or
normally closed contacts to COM.
Optional cable monitoring.
All Relays except where otherwise specified
Relay Response Time 20 ms (worst case)
Contact set(s)
1 normally open
Contact rating
AC: 1 A, 250 Vac; DC: 1 A, 35 Vac
Run/ Stop Solenoid relay Relay Response Time 20 ms (worst case)
Contact Set(s) 1 normally open
Contact rating: AC: 8 A, 250 Vac; DC: 8 A, 35 Vdc
System fault output relay (Siren) Relay response time 20 ms (worst case)
Contact set(s) 1 change over
Contact rating: AC: 1 A, 250 Vac; DC: 1 A, 35 Vdc
Dimensions H 157 mm (6.2”); W 210 mm (8.3”);
D 52 mm (2.0”)
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
Requirement
M2600.0010
Optional
www.littelfuse.com/m2600
96
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Engine Diagnostics
Engine Diagnostics
E5000 EngineEye...................................................................................98-99
For More Information…
and to down load our EngineEye
Brochure, visit
www.littelfuse.com/engineeye
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
97
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Engine Diagnostics
Advanced
e5000 Series engineeye
Cylinder Pressure Analyzer
Description
The EngineEye is a reliable and robust tool for engine
diagnostics. The system consists of a handheld Cylinder
Pressure Analyzer for collection of measurements, a pressure
sensor, an optional Top Dead Center (TDC) sensor and an
optional crank angle sensor.
1
1 E5000 Handheld Diagnostic Unit
The collected data is shown on the display and can be saved
and analyzed with the PC software. Operation is intuitive
and requires no training. The unit is menu-driven and will be
recognized as a mass-storage device on a PC. The EngineEye
is designed with ease-of use in mind.
2 E5100 Pressure Sensor
2
Due to a unique sensor technology based on a GaPO4 crystal
with excellent linearity and extremely low thermal drift, the
new system allows for long term pressure readings. The
sensor may be left measuring on the open indicator cock for
hours.
u
E5200 TDC Sensor
Detection of top dead center for TDC correction.
Ordering Information
ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS
11
Ordering
Number
description
E5000.1000
EngineEye Basic (E5000.0010 + E5100.0010)
E5000.2000
EngineEye Advanced
(E5000.0020 + E5100.0010 + E5200.0010)
E5000.3000
EngineEye Professional
(E5000.0030 + E5100.0010 + E5300.0010)
E5100.0010
Pressure Sensor with 1.5 m armored cable
E5200.0010
Inductive TDC Sensor+Junction Box + Extension Cable
(10 m armored)
E5300.0010
Crank Angle Sensor+ Crank Angle Band +
Junction Box + Extension Cable
3 E5300 Crank Angle Sensor
The crank angle can be
3
measured with a special crank
angle sensor-belt with high
resolution. The unique design is
easy to cut and adapt and thus
applicable for all shaft diameters.
The crank angle sensor belt
installation can easily be made by
ships’ crew themselves, reducing
installation costs.
With the EngineEye, operators can:
Work safely due to insulated grip
Tune and balance the engine during operation
Work with intuitive software on large display—
even with gloves
Run the engine with optimal settings of the
operation parameters
Analyze software data (incl. TDC & ISO correction)
and e-mail readings to the head office
Easily install the advanced sensor-belt on all
shaft diameters
Expect reduced costs for maintenance
g
g
g
g
Accessories
3
g
E5250 Crank Angle Band
Separate crank angle band (2.98 m).
g
g
4
wwww.littelfuse.com/e5000
E5220 Break-out Box
For TDC/Crank Angle Sensor.
98
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Engine Diagnostics
Advanced
Features & Benefits
Technical Data
Basic Advanced Professional
E5000
E5000,
E5000, E5100,
& E5100
E5100
E5200 & 5300
& E5200
Features
Calibration-check integration
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connecting sensor ports
1
2
5
Pressure graph
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
USB
Color LCD
PC software included
Upgradable
Temperature compensation
MIP mode
*
Misfire analysis
pmax bar graph
•
•
•
•
p/alpha
*
dp/alpha
*
p/V
*
pmax
•
p/time
•
•
Crank-angle sensor
Maximum engines (memory)
5
10
20
Maximum cylinders/engine (memory)
20
20
20
Maximum number of strokes (memory)
30
30
30
BENEFITS
High-temperature resistant
pressure sensor
Possibility of prolonged measurements
without overheating
Sensor belt for crank
angle measurement
Easy installation even in case
of retrofit
Large LCD display
on handheld unit
Operation is intuitive and requires
no training
USB mass-storage device
Automatic sensor
recognition on handheld
device
Crank-angle sensor
Very simple download of engine
measurements from handheld device
to the PC software
After connection of sensors the
handheld devices detects the sensor
type automatically without any
manual configuration.
TDC and ISO correction in PC software
Specifications
Pressure Range
0-250 Bar
Pressure Accuracy 1%
Temperature Range –50 to +350˚ C
Sensor Technology GaPO4
Speed Range 30-2000 RPM
Weight (E5000) 1.4 Kg
Dimensions (E5000)
H 150 mm (5.9”)
W 260 mm (10.2”)
D 55 mm (2.2”)
*Possible with a crank angle sensor E5300.
11
ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS
Pressure sensor
Features
Usage Diagram
2
1
4
3
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
99
www.littelfuse.com/e5000
Alarm Monitoring
ALARM MONITORING
M1000 Alarm Monitor..............................................................................101
M3000 Analog Alarm Annunciator..........................................................102
M4200 Alarm Monitor..............................................................................103
M4500, M4600, M4700 Alarm Indicators...............................................104
HMI Operator Panels.................................................................................105
For More Information…
or to download our Process Alarm
Solutions Brochure, visit
www.littelfuse.com/alarmmonitoring
www.littelfuse.com
100
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Alarm Monitoring
Monitoring
M1000 Series
Alarm Monitor
Description
The M1000 is an alarm panel with 10 digital inputs. Inputs from
a dry contact (normally open [NO] or normally closed [NC])
will cause the corresponding LED to flash. Simultaneously a
common alarm output and a siren output will be activated as
well as an individual output. The unit has separate indications
of first alarm, following alarms and acknowledged alarms. It
also has dedicated inputs for remote reset and blocking. The
unit can be configured for cable monitoring and monitoring of
its own supply and insulation level.
Multiple M1000 units can be interconnected to form a large
scale alarm system. In this situation functions are available
for synchronizing the flashing of the LEDs and enabling
global indication of first alarm for all connected units. Alarm
related parameters like time delays, reset functions and other
features can be configured through 18 programming switches.
The M1000 can also be configured via the RS232 interface.
A standard ANSI/VT100 terminal is used as programming
tool. The M1000 is equipped with a 2-wire RS485 interface
supporting MODBUS-RTU communication.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
SUPPLY
+
–
28
1
29
OPEN
COLLECTOR
ALARM OUTPUTS
INPUT
CONTACTS
10
M1000
(Alarm Monitor)
11 TEST
12 RESET
17
26
30
SIREN
13 BLOCK
Specifications
31
32
BENEFITS
10 configurable
digital inputs
Supports both NO and NC input contacts
11 open collector outputs
Allows external control and remote indication
1 siren relay output
Direct connection of alarm siren
Special indication of
first alarm
Provides clear alarm overview in
larger systems
Multiple units can be
connected as one system
Modular and scalable solution
Voltage and insulation
monitoring
Dimming of LEDs
Replaces voltage and insulation monitoring
relay on the DC system
Suitable for bridge consoles
Type-approved by marine
classification societies
Applicable in harsh environments
Configuration by
DIP switches or PC
Easy installation and configuration
Protection Degree
at Front
RS485 Modbus RTU
Communication with HMI and
SCADA systems
Features & Benefits
IP54 (see Type Description)
Ordering Information
Ordering
Number
control
power
Function
M1000.0040
48-110 Vdc
IP54 front
M1000.0080
12-24 Vdc
IP54 front
M1000.0220
12-24 Vdc
Internal siren, IP54 at front
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
101
www.littelfuse.com/m1000
12
ALARM MONITORING
Features
Voltage Supply
12-24 Vdc-30%/+30% (8-32 Vdc)
48-110 Vdc-30%/+40% (33-155 Vdc)
Max. Power
Consumption
180 mA
–10°C to +70°C (also available for –40°C to +70°C)
Ambient Temp.
Siren Relay Contact 220 Vac/2 A; 30 Vdc/2 A, 30 W
Max. 150 mA per channel
Output
Resistance in
Sensing Cable
Max. 1000 W
Insulation Monitor 25 kW±8 kW (50 kW±10 kW for M1000-11-XXC)
4.5 kV 1/ 50 μsec.
Impulse Test
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2 and EN61000-2-6
Programming
16 dip-switches or via RS232 interface
Communication
RS485 interface
Weight
0.4 kg
DimensionsH 144 mm (5.7”); W 144 mm (5.7”);
D 35 mm (1.4”)
Panel Cut-outH 138 mm (5.4”); W 138 mm (5.4”)
Alarm Monitoring
Monitoring
M3000 Series
Analog Alarm Annunciator
Description
The M3000 Analog Alarm Annunciator has 24 inputs that can
be configured individually for dry contact (NO or NC) inputs or
analog inputs. Analog inputs can read measurements through
4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc or 0-24 Vdc transmitters. Up to 48 alarms
can be configured with individual reference to any of the 24
inputs. An alarm is activated and indicated when the input
value exceeds a preset critical low or high level. The alarm can
be related to any of the 24 LEDs and any of the 14 outputs.
Several alarms may activate the same LED and/or output. The
M3000 has a common alarm output, a siren output, as well as
dedicated inputs for remote reset and blocking.
Configure the unit from a PC through the built-in RS232
interface or the front panel. It also comes equipped with
an RS485 interface supporting MODBUS-RTU and with
configuration software. It features a spreadsheet-like graphical
interface enabling flexible configuration of all the parameters
in the unit. The M3000 also offers configuration of average
deviations alarms. This feature is used in monitoring of the
exhaust gas temperatures of diesel or gas engines. The
average temperature from a number of cylinders is calculated.
If the temperature value of one of the cylinders deviates from
the average of the remaining cylinders by more than a preset
± offset, a deviation alarm will be activated.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
11 IN 1
12 IN 2
101
INPUT
GROUP 1
OPEN
COLLECTOR
OUTPUTS
13 IN 3
114
14 GND
AL. OUT 115
SIREN 116
81 IN 1
82 IN 2
INPUT
GROUP 8
83 IN 3
84 GND
120
+
121
–
122
ALARM MONITORING
12
M3000
RS232
(Analog Alarm
Annunciator)
24 V
Accessories
B 130
RS485
A
A 131
COM 132
DIM
Features & Benefits
M1500 PT100 6-way Transmitter
Six current transducers in one box for use with
DIN60751 3-wire PT100 temperature sensors. The
output signals are 4-20 mA current, which can be
easily fed into the M3000. Each sensor input can
be configured for 3 different temperature ranges.
Features
BENEFITS
Specifications
24 inputs
One unit for both, digital and analog sensors
48 alarms
Individual reference to any of the 24 inputs allows
easy configuration of group and individual alarms
Programmable
10-character LCD text
Each alarm is indicated as clear text
24 LEDs with
indication of new and
acknowledged alarms.
First incoming alarm can be identified easily
14 open
collector outputs
Provide ON/OFF control and simple connection to
remote displays
RS485 interface
For field-bus communication with PLC or HMI
RS232 link
Allows easy programming with PC-based
software
Voltage Supply
24 Vdc ±30%
Consumption
Max. 400 mA
Sensor Inputs24
Input Types
20 mA, 10 Vdc and 24 Vdc
Alarms48
Alarm Delays 300 msec. to 10 days
Outputs
14 on/off open collector outputs, each controlled
by one or more alarms. Max. 150 mA per output
General Alarm Output Max. 150 mA
Siren Control
Max. 150 mA
LEDs 24
LCD Display
2 x 16 characters with background light
Communication RS485 interface
Protocol
MODBUS-RTU
Operating Temp. –20°C to +70°C
95% RH at 20°C
Humidity
4 g RMS according to IEC 60068-2-64
Vibration Test EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1, EN50081-2,
EN50082-2 and EN61000-2-6
Approvals
Certified by major marine classification societies
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Weight
0.8 kg
DimensionsH 144 mm (5.7”); W 144 mm (5.7”); D 70 mm (2.7”)
Panel Cut-outH 138 mm (5.4”); W 138 mm (5.4”)
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
control power
M3000.0010
24 Vdc
accessories
requirement
Page
M1500
24 Vdc
118
www.littelfuse.com/m3000
Protection Degree at Front IP54
102
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Alarm Monitoring
Monitoring
M4200 Series
Alarm Monitor
Description
The M4200 Alarm Monitor provides a cost effective solution,
with the possibility of monitoring eight individual sensors.
The inputs can accept NO or NC contacts. Each input can
be programmed to control both of the two alarm relays for
group alarm outputs. All inputs will, in default mode, activate
the alarm relay and the siren relay. The delays for the inputs
can be individually selected between 25 milliseconds and
999 seconds.
Cable monitoring provides extra security to the alarm
system. It is possible to adjust the brightness and color of
the LEDs. Configuration can be done either by dip switches
on the back of the unit or by PC.
Simplified Circuit Diagram
Features & Benefits
+
SUPPLY
–
1
OPEN
COLLECTOR
OUTPUTS
ALARM
INPUT
CONTACTS
19
22
SYNC 23
8
9 +REF OUT
10 GND
11 RESET
M4200
(Alarm Monitor)
ALARM1
12 TEST
28
SIREN
ALARM2
31
32
+
26
–
Programmable LED color
change
Flexible adjustment according to
application
Cable monitoring on
sensor inputs
Health monitoring of the inputs with an
alarm in case a sensor is lost
Compact dimensions
Fits limited spaces
N-G continuity alarm
Easy configuration of group and individual
alarms
Special indication of cable
break or short circuit
Sensor monitoring included
30
14 BLOCK 2
15 GND
24
BENEFITS
27
29
13 BLOCK 1
Features
33
POWER
SIREN
34
35
12
Specifications
Ordering Number
control power
M4200.0010
24 Vdc
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
103
www.littelfuse.com/m4200
ALARM MONITORING
Voltage Supply
8.4-60 Vdc; 8.4-50 Vac
Power Consumption
Max. 180 mA
Ambient Temp.
–15°C to +70°C
Relay Output
(Load Capacity)
Max. 250 Vac/6 A
Open Collector Outputs Max. 60 Vdc/700 mA per output
Min. Input Delay
25 ms
Resistance in
Sensing Cable 1000 Ω (full length)
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Maritime Application IEC 60945
Industrial Application EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5,
EN 61000-4-6
Weight
0.222 kg
DimensionsH 96 mm (3.8”); W 96 mm (3.8”); D 20 mm (0.8”)
Panel Cut-outH 92 mm (3.6”); W 92 mm (3.6”)
Protection Degree
at Front
IP54
Ordering Information
Alarm Monitoring
Alarm Indication
M4500, M4600, & M4700 Series
Alarm Indicators
Description
The M4500, M4600 and M4700 Indicator Panels are intended
for status indication of any process providing on/off outputs.
The panels contain 6, 8 or 20 channels, respectively.
An input through a dry contact will light the corresponding LED.
M4600
M4700
These panels are an ideal solution for local or remote indication
of the output signals from, for example, a PLC or from alarm
monitors such as the M1000. The 20 channel M4700 is available
in a version with built-in alarm and siren relays.
M4500
+ DC
CHAN.10
CHAN. 3
CHAN. 2
CHAN. 1
Simplified Circuit Diagram
L AC N
2
3
10
1
2
3
10
11
12
13
REF.
A 1
B
15
16
ALARM
RELAY
14
SIREN
RELAY
11
CHAN. 20
CHAN. 13
CHAN. 12
CHAN. 11
12
M4700.0120/0130/0140 Connection Diagram
Ordering Information
ALARM MONITORING
12
Ordering Number
control power
input reference
M4500.0010
M4500.0020
M4500.0030
M4500.0040
M4500.0050
M4500.0060
M4600.0010
M4600.0020
M4600.0030
M4600.0040
M4600.0050
M4600.0060
M4600.0070
M4700.0010
M4700.0020
M4700.0030
M4700.0040
M4700.0050
M4700.0060
M4700.0070
M4700.0080
M4700.0090
M4700.0100
M4700.0110
M4700.0120*
M4700.0120*
M4700.0130†
M4780.0010 ‡
24 Vdc/Vac
48 Vdc/Vac
12 Vdc/Vac
24 Vdc/Vac
48 Vdc/Vac
12 Vdc/Vac
24 Vdc/Vac
48 Vdc/Vac
12 Vdc/Vac
110 Vdc
24 Vdc/Vac
48 Vdc/Vac
12 Vdc/Vac
24 Vdc/Vac
48 Vdc/Vac
12 Vdc/Vac
110 Vdc
24 Vdc/Vac
48 Vdc/Vac
12 Vdc/Vac
110 Vdc
230 Vac
110 Vac
230 Vac
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
230 Vac
24 Vdc
+24 Vdc
+48 Vdc
+12 Vdc
0 Vdc
0 Vdc
0 Vdc
+24 Vdc
+48 Vdc
+12 Vdc
+110 Vdc
0 Vdc
0 Vdc
0 Vdc
+24 Vdc
+48 Vdc
+12 Vdc
+110 Vdc
0 Vdc
0 Vdc
0 Vdc
0 Vdc
+24 Vdc
+24 Vdc
0 Vdc
+24 Vdc
+24 Vdc
+24 Vdc
24 Vdc
Features & Benefits
Page
M0845.0010
M0845.0020
M0846.0010
M0846.0020
M0847.0010
M0847.0020
123
123
123
123
123
123
*With common alarm relay, siren relay and built-in siren.
†Inverted reference. With common alarm relay, siren relay and built-in siren.
‡ Modbus Indicator Panel, 20 channels, 24 Vdc, common alarm relay and built in siren.
www.littelfuse.com/m4500 www.littelfuse.com/m4600
Features
BENEFITS
Clamping fittings and
plug-in terminals blocks
Easy installation
RS485 communication
available
Remote display for alarm panels or PLCs
Alarm and siren relay
available
Audible remote alarm
Specifications
Accessories Description
Front cover for M4500 with handle IP54
Front cover for M4500 with key IP54
Front cover for M4600 with handle IP54
Front cover for M4600 with key IP54
Front cover for M4700/ M4780 with handle IP54
Front cover for M4700/ M4780 with key IP54
M4780 is a versatile 20 channel indicator panel which can
be used for monitoring of dry contacts and signal states
transmitted through a common 2-wire RS485 communication
bus using the MODBUS-RTU protocol. This unit is a
combination of a traditional indicator panel with dry contact
inputs and a MODBUS indicator panel. M4780 can also work
as an alarm monitor using two internal relays for group alarms
and control of an external siren. An internal siren for local use
is built-in. Via the MODBUS-RTU a PLC can read the state of
the LEDs and the inputs on the M4780. This feature makes
the M4780 a cost effective 20 channel digital input device with
indications in PLC systems.
Voltage Supply
24 Vdc ±25%
Inputs
M4500: 6; M4600: 8; M4700: 20
Extra Push-Button M4500/M4600: 250 Vac, 0.5 A
Alarm & Siren Relays M4700: Normally open (NO) contact
Contact Data
M4700: AC=250 V, 1.2 A, 125 VA
DC=30 V, 1 A, 30 W
Operating Temp.
–10 to +70°C
EMC
CE according to EN50081-1, EN50082-1,
EN50081-2, EN50082-2
Burn-in
50 hours before final test
Weight
M4500 0.2 kg, M4500 230 Vac supply, 0.3 kg
M4600 0.3 kg, M4500 110 V and 230 Vac supply, 0.4 kg
M4700.01xx 0.5 kg (with 230 Vac supply, 0.7 kg)
Dimensions
M4500: H 72 (2.8”); W 72 (2.8”); D 67 mm (2.6”)
M4600: H 96 (3.8”); W 96 (3.8”); D 67 mm (2.6”)
M4700: H 144 (5.7”); W 144 (5.7”); D 67 mm (2.6”)
Panel Cut-out
M4500: H 68 (2.7”); W 68 (2.7”)
M4600: H 92 (3.6”); W 92 (3.6”)
M4700: H 138 (5.4”); W 138 (5.4”)
Protection Degree
IP31
at Front www.littelfuse.com/m4700 104
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Alarm Monitoring
Operator Interface
H4000 HMI Series
Operator Panels
Description
The HMI operator panel is a touch-screen solution for SCADA
solutions, designed for applications like engine control and
supervision systems, power management systems and alarm
systems. They can be integrated with products such as the
M2500, Engine Controller, Generator Controllers and Alarm
Panels.
The clear, high-resolution screen provides a high level of
details on images, charts, meters and alarms.
The SELCO HMI solutions support a broad variety of
communication buses, MODBUS-RTU, and can work as
gateways between different bus protocols such as Ethernet
to MODBUS. The operator panel is configured with a software
tool.
Available in three sizes: H4000 6,5”, H4100 10,4”, H4200 15,1”.
The units are marine approved.
Features & Benefits
BENEFITS
Specifications
Clear, high-resolution
screen
High level of details (images, charts,
meters and alarms)
Wide range of
communication interfaces
Compatible with many
communication protocols
Sun-readable versions
Clear image even in direct sunlight
Type-approved by marine
classification societies
Approved for marine alarm systems
Front Panel Dimension H 4000: H 219 mm (8.6”); W 154 mm (6.0”);
D 6 mm (0.2”)
H4100: H 302 mm (11.9”); W 228 mm (9.0”);
D 6 mm (0.2”)
H4200: H 398 mm (15.7”); W 304 mm (12.0”);
D 6 mm (0.2”)
Mounting Depth
H 4000: 56 mm (2.2”),156 mm including clearance
H 4100: 58 mm (2.3”),158 mm including clearance
H 4200: 60 mm (2.4”),160 mm including clearance
IP 66
Front Panel Seal
IP 20
Rear Panel Seal
Serial Port RS422/ RS485
RS232C
Serial Port Shielded RJ 45
Ethernet USB Host type A (USB 1.1),
max output current 500 mA Device type B (USB 1.1)
CF-Slot Compact flash, type I and II
Flash Memory
for Application
12 MB (incl. fonts)
Power Consumption at Rated Voltage
H4000: Normal: 0.4 A; Maximum: 0.9 A
H4100: Normal: 0.5 A; Maximum: 1.0 A
H4200: Normal: 1.2 A; Maximum: 1.7 A
DisplayTFT-LCD, 64K color. CCFL backlight lifetime at
the ambient temperature of +25˚C: >50,000 h.
H4000: 640 x 480 pixels
H4100: 800 x 600 pixels
H4200: 1024 x 768 pixels
Ordering Information
Ordering Number
description
H4000.0010
HMI Panel 6,5”
H4000.0020
HMI Panel 6,5”, sun readable
H4100.0010
HMI Panel 10,4”
H4100.0020
HMI Panel 10,4” sun readable
H4200.0010
HMI Panel 15,1”
H4200.0020
HMI Panel 15,1” sun readable
H4900.0010
Programming Software
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Active Area of Display
Power Supply
Ambient Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity 105
H4000: 132.5 mm (5.2”) x 99.4 mm (3.9”)
H4100: 211.2 mm (8.3”) x 158.4 mm (6.2”)
H4200: 304.1 mm (12.0”) x 228.1 mm (9.0”)
+24 Vdc (20-30 Vdc)
Horizontal installation: 0˚C to +40˚C
–20˚C to +70˚C
5-85 % non-condensed
www.littelfuse.com/h4200
12
ALARM MONITORING
Features
Accessories
software
Software....................................................................................................107
For More Information…
on Relay and other Software, visit
www.littelfuse.com/relaysoftware
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
106
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Accessories
Software
Software
Protection Relays and Alarm Systems are supplied with
free software. The software simplifies programming and
allows the user to save setpoint files and reuse them for
similar applications.
The software gives the ability to change parameters and
see the impact on the protection time current curves. It
also allows another device curve to be entered to view
simple coordination.
Software
Product
SE-COMM-RIS
Relay Interface
Software
Features
Accessory For
Provides remote access to metering, control, data logging, and programming
features. Setpoints can be accessed individually, downloaded as a file, and
protective curves can be plotted. Metered data can be observed or logged
for later study.
MPU-32
MPS
FPU-32
FPS
Firmware
Update Utility
Used to update relay firmware to add new features.
MPU-32
MPS
FPU-32
FPS EL731
SE-MON330
Used to receive data from the SE-330. It displays relay set points and measured
values, and features data logging of information at a selectable interval.
SE-330
SE-330HV
SE-330AU
PGW-6150
Provides access to the settings, measurements, configurations, and reports
recorded in the relay. Allows changes to operation parameters and to work offline,
and creating a library of settings for future applications.
PGR-6150
PGW-8800
Provides access to basic and advanced settings over a USB connection.
No installation required.
PGR-8800
SE-FLASH
Relay Interface Software
Relay Interface Software
Relay Interface Software
Virtual Motor
Protection Relay
VMPS
Virtual Motor
Protection System
VFPU
Virtual Feeder
Protection Relay
MPU-32 Tutorial
MPU-32 Online
Self-Training Tutorial
H4900
Programming Software
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Allows the user to scroll through the MPU-32 Motor Protection Relay menu.
MPU-32
Allows the user to scroll through the MPS Motor Protection System menu.
MPS
Allows the user to scroll through the FPU-32 Feeder Protection Relay menu.
FPU-32
Online Self-Training tutorial for MPU-32 programming.
MPU-32
SOFTWARE
VMPU
13
S
For configuring the operator panel.
107
H4000
H4100
H4200
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Accessories
mount adapters
Description/ Overview.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 109
Panel Mount Adapters.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 110
DIN-Mount Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 111
Watertight Covers.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 111
Enclosures/Control Panels.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 111
For More Information…
on Retrofits, Panel Mount Adapters and more
accessories, visit
www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
108
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Accessories
Retrofits–Panel Mount Adapters
Pma series
Panel Mount Adapters
Description
Example Shown: PMA-3
A variety of protection relay retrofit adapter plates are
available for the products listed below. These adapter plates
simplify the process of updating electromechanical or poorly
functioning existing relays. Consult factory if you have a
specific product to replace that is not featured. Adapters are
available in either plate style for panel mounting or drawout
style depending on the relay being replaced.
Motor, feeder and ground-fault protection upgrades are
available for electromechanical or solid state relays that are
nearing the end of their life.
Features & Benefits
Features
Mounting
Multiple adapter sizes
BENEFITS
Fits in existing mounting holes and panel openings
Plate style or drawout style adapters are available
to fit various outdated relays
Adapter Plates
Relay to replace
AB Bulletin 1406
Example of a panel mount adapter (PMA-3). Relay is for
illustrative purposes only and must be purchased separately
from adapter plate. For more information on our complete
offering of panel mount adapters see page 110.
PANEL MOUNT
new RELAY
PMA-14
MPS
FPL-GFRM
PMA-6
SE-701/SE-704
GE S1
PMA-9
MPU-32/FPU-32
GE Lodtrak III
PMA-10
MPU-32
GE Multilin 169, 269, or 369
PMA-13
MPS
PMA-16
MPU-32
FPU-32
PMA-24
MPS
GE Multilin P4A
PMA-15
MPU-32/FPU-32
GEC/MCGG
PMA-3
SE-701/SE-704
GE & Westinghouse FT-11
PMA-12
MPU-32
P&B Golds
Contact Factory
FPU-32
WEstinghouse co9 & Co11
Contact Factory
FPU-32
For a complete list of the Littelfuse Panel Mount Adapter Plates please see page 110.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
109
www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories
14
MOUNTING ADAPTERS
PMA-16
GE Multilin 469
Accessories
Panel-Mount Adapters
panel-mount adapters
Panel Mount Adapters
Product
Used when replacing the AB Bulletin 1406.
PMA-3
Adapter Plate
Used when replacing GEC/MCGG ground-fault relays.
Requires PMA-55 or PMA-60.
PMA-4
Used when replacing the Multilin 139/239.
MPU-32
PMA-6
Adapter Plate
Used when replacing FPL-GFRM ground-fault relays.
Requires PMA-55 or PMA-60.
SE-701
PMA-7
Used when replacing the GE Lodtrak II.
MPU-32
PMA-8
Used when replacing an Atkinson Omser II with an SE-130-Series Monitor.
SE-134C SE-135
PMA-9
Adapter Plate
Used when replacing relays in the GE S1 Case.
Requires PMA-55 or PMA-60.
MPU-32 FPU-32
PMA-10
Used when replacing the GE Lodtrak III.
MPU-32
PMA-12
Used when replacing GE and Westinghouse FT-11 relays.
MPU-32
PMA-13
Used when replacing the GE Multilin 169, 269, or 369.
MPS
PMA-14
Used for rough cutouts and when replacing the AB Bulletin 1406.
MPS
PMA-15
Used for rough cutouts and when replacing the GE Multilin P4A.
MPU-32 FPU-32
PMA-16-RTDB
The PMA-16 mounting plate is used when replacing the GE Multilin 169, 269,
and 369 relays. The PMA-16-RTDB is a mounting bracket for the optional
MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module.
MPU-32 FPU-32
PMA-17
Used when replacing Sprecher & Schuh Cet 4.
MPU-32
PMA-18
Used when replacing Sprecher & Schuh Cet 3.
MPU-32
PMA-21
Used when replacing an ABB RACIF.
FPU-32
PMA-23
Custom mounting plate for FPU-32 to replace 3 Westinghouse C0 relays.
FPU-32
PMA-24
Used when replacing the GE Multilin 469.
PMA-55
Used to panel mount the SE-601 and SE-701.
SE-601
PGR-4300
SE-701
SE-704
PMA-60
Used to panel mount the relay; IP 53 and NEMA 3 rating, tamper resistant.
SE-601
PGR-4300
SE-701
SE-704
MPU-32-SMK
Used to surface mount the MPU-32 or FPU-32.
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
PMA-16
Adapter Plate
Mounting Bracket
Adapter Plate
MOUNTING ADAPTERS
Accessory For
PMA-2
Adapter Plate
14
Features
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate
Surface-Mount Kit
MPU-32
SE-704 SE-701
MPS
MPU-32 FPU-32
Note: Relays are not included with the PMA-Series Panel Mount Adapters.
www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories
110
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Accessories
DIN-Mount Adapters, Watertight Covers & Enclosures
din-Mount adapters & Watertight covers
din-mount adapters
Product
AC700-SMK
Features
DIN-rail and Surface-mount adapter for back-plane mounting.
Mount Adapter
D0050
DIN-Rail Adapter Clip
Plastic clip allowing DIN-rail mounting of the PGR-8800 Arc-Flash
Relay.
Accessory For
EL731
PGR-8800
watertight covers
Product
MPU-16A-Y92A-96N
Watertight Cover
SE-IP65CVR-G
Watertight Cover
SE-IP65CVR-G2
Watertight Cover
SE-IP65CVR-M
Watertight Cover
SE-MRE-600
Moisture-Resistant
Enclosure Kit
M0845
Watertight Cover
M0846
M0847
Watertight Cover
Watertight cover for outdoor applications.
Accessory For
MPU-32
FPU-32
Watertight cover. Tamper-resistant. IP65 protection.
SE-134C
SE-135
SE-330 SE-330AU
SE-330HV SE-400
Watertight cover. Tamper-resistant. IP65 protection.
SE-145
Watertight cover. Tamper-resistant. IP65 protection.
MPS
FPS
Protects the connection terminals from snow and rain in
outdoor applications.
ER-600VC
ER-1000HV
Front cover with handle IP54 (-0010)
Front cover with key IP54 (-0020)
M4500
Front cover with handle IP54 (-0010)
Front cover with key IP54 (-0020)
M4600
Front cover with handle IP54 (-0010)
Front cover with key IP54 (-0020)
M4700
M4780
14
ENCLOSURES
Product
NGRM-ENC
NGR Monitor Control Panel
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Features
Accessory For
NEMA 4 painted steel control panel, complete with the SE-325 or SE330, and a fused 600/480:120 V PT for relay control power. Suitable
for indoor or outdoor mounting, CSA certified. When NGR Monitor is
back-plane mounted, 22-mm NEMA 4 indicators and reset button are
included. Please contact factory for additional information.
SE-325
SE-330
111
www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories
MOUNTING ADAPTERS
Watertight Cover
Features
Accessories
Current Transformers
CT Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
CT200, EFCT, SE-CS, and PGC-6000 Series.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
PGC-5000 Series.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
For More Information…
on Current Transformers, visit
www.littelfuse.com/relayct
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
112
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Accessories
Current Transformers (CTs)
CT SELECTION GUIDE
resistance
grounding
Trailing cable
protection
GROUND FAULT
PROTECTION
product
MOTOR & pump
PROTECTION
Page #
No CTs required
1-20 mA
–
PGR-3100
No CTs required
Indication only
–
PGR-3200
No CTs required
Warnings at 30 kΩ & 50 kΩ,
Alarm at 10 kΩ
–
SE-502
No CTs required
5 ± 0.9 mA
–
CT-200 Series
10-198 A
114
SE-701/SE-703
EFCT Series
50 mA-4.95 A
114
SE-CS30 Series
300 mA-29.7 A
114
SE-704
SE-CS30 Series
10 mA-5 A
114
EL731
EFCT Series
30-5,000 mA AC and DC
114
SE-105/SE-107
CT200 Series
0.5-4 A
114
SE-134C/SE-135
SE-CS10 Series
0.5-12.5 A
114
SE-CS10 Series
0.5-12.5 A
114
SE-CS40 Series
2.0-50 A
114
CT200 Series
12-200 A
114
EFCT Series
100 mA-5 A
114
SE-145
SE-330
SE-CS30 Series
600 mA-30 A
114
SE-325
CT200 Series
0.5-4 A
114
PGR-6150
No phase CTs required <25 A,
Optional SE-CS30 Series Ground-Fault CT
0.4-150 A
115
CT200 Series
10-200 A
114
EFCT Series
50 mA-5 A
114
SE-CS30 Series
300 mA-30 A
114
MPS*
CT200
10-200 A
114
EFCT Series (5-A Primary)
50 mA-5 A
114
SE-CS30 Series (30-A Primary)
300 mA-30 A
114
MPU-32-X69X-PMA16
Existing CTs can be used or same as MPU-32.
MPS-469X-PMA24
Existing CTs can be used or same as MPS.
PGR-6800
No CTs required <91 A
N/A†
–
CT200 Series
10-200 A
114
EFCT Series
50 mA-5 A
114
SE-CS30 Series
300 mA-30 A
114
CT200
10-200 A
114
FPS*
EFCT Series (5-A Primary)
50 mA-5 A
114
SE-CS30 Series (30-A Primary)
300 mA-30 A
114
PGR-8800 ‡
CTs are optional
N/A
–
Note: See page 141 for additional information on CT selection. See page 156 for CT sizing chart.
*Phase CTs should be selected with a primary rating of 100-300% of rated current to maintain specified accuracy. CTs with a 1-A or 5-A secondary are accepted.
†Trip levels are model specific, see ordering information on page 51.
‡Select a CT with a primary rating approximately equal to the system’s rated current. CTs with 5-A secondary current are accepted.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
113
www.littelfuse.com/relayct
15
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
FPU-32*
FEEDER
PROTECTION
GROUND-FAULT Trip Level
(or insulation level)
SE-601
MPU-32*
arc-flash
PROTECTION
GROUND-FAULT CT
Accessories
Current Transformers
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current Transformers
Product
CT200 (PGC-2056)
Current Transformer
CT200L (PGC-2089)
Current Transformer
EFCT-26 (PGC-3026)
Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
EFCT-1 (PGC-3082)
Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
EFCT-2 (PGC-3140)
Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
EFCT-1FC (PGC-31FC)
Flux Conditioner
SE-CS10-2.5 (PGC-4064)
Current Sensor
SE-CS10-4 (PGC-4108)
Current Sensor
SE-CS10-6 (PGC-4160)
Current Sensor
SE-CS10-8 (PGC-4210)
Current Sensor
SE-CS30-26 (PGC-5025)
Ground-Fault Current Transformer
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
15
SE-CS30-70 (PGC-5060)
Ground-Fault Current Transformer
SE-CS30-4 (PGC-5095)
Ground-Fault Current Transformer
SE-CS30-5 (PGC-5130)
Ground-Fault Current Transformer
SE-CS30-8 (PGC-5200)
Ground-Fault Current Transformer
SE-CS40-6
Current Sensor
www.littelfuse.com/relayct
Features
Inner Diameter
Accessory For
SE-330 SE-105/107
FPS
SE-701
MPU-32
FPU-32
MPS
SE-325 PGR-8800
Detects phase current or ground-fault
current. (200-A primary)
56 mm
(2.20")
Detects phase current or ground-fault
current. (200-A primary)
89 mm
(3.50")
Sensitive current transformer used to
detect ground-fault current. (5-A primary)
26 mm
(1.02")
Sensitive current transformer used to
detect ground-fault current. (5-A primary)
82 mm
(3.23")
Sensitive current transformer used to
detect ground-fault current. (5-A primary)
140 mm
(5.50")
Fits in the EFCT-1 window to reduce
saturation and prevent false operation
due to large surge currents.
70 mm
(2.75")
Detects ground-fault current.
64 mm
(2.50")
SE-134C
SE-135
SE-145
Detects ground-fault current.
108 mm
(4.25")
SE-134C
SE-135
SE-145
Detects ground-fault current.
160 mm
(6.31")
SE-134C
SE-135
SE-145
Detects ground-fault current.
210 mm
(8.25")
SE-134C
SE-135
SE-145
Current Transformer for low-level
ground faults, flux conditioner
is standard. (30-A primary)
25 mm
(0.98")
Current Transformer for low-level
ground faults, flux conditioner
is standard. (30-A primary)
60 mm
(2.36")
Current Transformer for low-level
ground faults, flux conditioner
is standard. (30-A primary)
95 mm
(3.74")
SE-704
SE-701
PGR-6100
Current Transformer for low-level
ground faults, flux conditioner
is standard. (30-A primary)
130 mm
(5.12")
SE-704
SE-701
PGR-6100
Current Transformer for low-level
ground faults, flux conditioner
is standard. (30-A primary)
200 mm
(7.87")
SE-704
SE-701
PGR-6100
MPU-32
MPS
FPU-32
FPS
MPU-32
MPS
FPU-32
FPS
MPU-32
MPS
FPU-32
FPS
MPU-32
MPS
FPU-32
FPS
MPU-32
MPS
FPU-32
FPS
Detects ground-fault current
160 mm
(6.31”)
SE-135
SE-145
114
SE-701
SE-107
PGR-8800
SE-330
SE-701
SE-105
MPS
FPS
MPS
FPU-32
EL731
MPU-32
FPU-32
MPU-32
FPS
SE-330
MPS
MPU-32
SE-701 FPU-32
FPS
EL731
SE-701
MPU-32
EL731
MPS
FPU-32
FPS
EFCT-1
SE-704
SE-330
SE-701
PGR-6100
SE-704
SE-330
SE-701
PGR-6100
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Accessories
Current Transformers
PGC FAMILY, PGG FAMILY
Current Transformers
Product
PGC-6035
Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
PGC-6060
Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
PGC-6080
Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
PGC-6110
Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
PGC-6210
Ground-Fault Current
Transformer
Features
Inner Diameter
Accessory For
Current transformer for measuring
ground-fault current.
35 mm
(1.38")
PGR-6150
Current transformer for measuring
ground-fault current.
60 mm
(2.36")
PGR-6150
Current transformer for measuring
ground-fault current.
80 mm
(3.15")
PGR-6150
Current transformer for measuring
ground-fault current.
110 mm
(4.33")
PGR-6150
Current transformer for measuring
ground-fault current.
210 mm
(8.27")
PGR-6150
NOTE: Contact factory for additional CT offerings.
15
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
115
www.littelfuse.com/relayct
Accessories
additional accessories
Ground-Reference Modules.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 117
High-Tension Couplers.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 117
Protection Relay Testers.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 117
Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 118
Remote Indication & Meters.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 118-119
Sensing Resistors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 119
Terminations & Adapters.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 120-121
Control & Diagnostic Accessories.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 121
ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES
16
For More Information…
on Additional Accessories, visit
www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories
A
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
116
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Accessories
Ground-Reference Modules, High-Tension Couplers, Relay Testers
gr modules, high-tension couplers, Relay testers
GROUND-REFERENCE MODULES
Product
SE-GRM024
Ground Reference
Module
SE-GRM048
Ground Reference
Module
SE-GRM125
Ground Reference
Module
SE-GRM250
Ground Reference
Module
SE-GRM500
Ground Reference
Module
SE-GRM780
Ground Reference
Module
SE-GRM1000
Ground Reference
Module
Features
Accessory For
Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 24 Vdc bus.
SE-601
Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 48 Vdc bus.
SE-601
Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 125 Vdc bus.
SE-601
Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 250 Vdc bus.
SE-601
Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 500 Vdc bus.
SE-601
Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 780 Vdc bus.
SE-601
Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 1000 Vdc bus.
SE-601
high-tension couplers
Product
PGH-5000
High Tension Couplers
PGH-6000
High Tension Couplers
Features
Accessory For
Allows 5-kV systems to be connected to relay.
PGR-6100
PGR-3200
Allows 6-kV systems to be connected to relay.
PGR-6100
PGR-3200
16
SE-100T
Ground-Fault Relay Tester
SE-400
Ground-Fault-Relay Test Unit
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Features
Accessory For
Tests the current pickup level ground-fault protection. Tests
the entire ground-fault circuit.
Any Relay on Substations, MCCs,
Central Distribution Panels,
Switchboards, and Test Benches
Tests the current pickup level, time delay and coordination
of ground-fault protection. Tests the entire ground-fault
circuit.
Any Relay on Substations, MCCs,
Central Distribution Panels,
Switchboards, and Test Benches
117
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES
Protection relay testers
Product
A
Accessories
Input Modules, Remote Indication
Input modules, REMOTE INDICATION
INPUT MODULES
Product
MPS-RTD
Temperature Input Module
MPS-DIF
Differential Current Module
MPU-CIM
Current Input Module
SIO-RTD
Temperature Input Module
M1500
PT100 6-way Transmitter
PGA-LS10
Point Sensor
PGA-LS20
Fiber-Optic Sensor
A0200/A0300
Light Sensor
Features
Accessory For
Provides 8 programmable inputs to connect Pt100, Ni100, Ni120,
and Cu10 RTDs.
MPU-32
MPS
Adds motor differential protection, compatible with core balance
and summation current transformer connections.
MPU-32
MPS
Interface between current transformers and MPU-32 or
FPU-32 series relays. Reduces potential for open CT hazard.
MPU-32
FPU-32
Data-acquisition system for measuring temperatures with
resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) and for monitoring
4-20 mA analog-output devices in industrial environments.
Six current transducers in one box for use with DIN60751 3-wire
PT100 temperature sensors. The output signals are 4-20 mA current,
which can be easily fed into the M3000. Each sensor input can be
configured for 3 different temperature ranges.
M3000
Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a
2-m half-sphere. Local LED continually displays sensor health or
trip state.
PGR-8800
Used to detect light and coordinate with current detection
to eliminate nuisance tripping.
PGR-8800
Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a
2-m halfsphere. Available in both 180˚ and 360˚.
D0900
Remote Indication & Meters
Product
RK-105
Remote Indication
and Reset Assembly
RK-105I
Remote Indication
Assembly
ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES
16
A
RK-102
Industrial Remote Indication
and Reset Kit
RK-132
Industrial Remote Indication
and Reset Kit
RK-325
Remote Indication
and Reset Assembly
RK-325I
Remote Indication
Assembly
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Features
Accessory For
Panel-mounted remote indication and reset with NEMA 1 rating.
SE-105
SE-107
Panel-mounted remote indication with NEMA 1 rating.
SE-105
SE-107
Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm
mounting, with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating.
SE-105
SE-107
Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm
mounting, with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating.
SE-134C
SE-135
SE-145
Panel-mounted remote indication and reset with NEMA 1 rating.
SE-325
Panel-mounted remote indication with NEMA 1 rating.
SE-325
118
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Accessories
Remote Indication, Sensing Resistors
REMOTE INDICATION, sensing resistors
Remote Indication & Meters
Product
RK-302
Remote Indication
and Reset Kit
RK-332
Remote Indication
and Reset Kit
PGB-6130
Remote Indication
and Reset Assembly
PGB-6800
Remote Indication
and Reset Assembly
PGA-0500
Analog % Current Meter
PGA-0510
Analog Ohm Meter
E2323 & E2324
Megaohmmeter &
Kiloohmmeter
M8100
Synchroscope
Features
Accessory For
Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm
mounting with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating.
SE-325
Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm
mounting with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating.
SE-330
SE-330AU
SE-330HV
Remote indication of overcurrent, phase unbalance,
phase loss, phase sequence, and overtemperature.
Remote reset included.
PGR-6130
Remote indication of overcurrent, undercurrent, phase unbalance,
phase loss, and phase sequence. Remote reset included.
PGR-6800
Panel-mounted analog meter displays ground-fault current
as a percentage of the set point.
SE-601
PGR-4300
PGR-6100
SE-701
SE-703
SE-704
Panel-mounted analog ohmmeter displays insulation resistance
from 0 Ω to infinity.
PGR-3200
PGR-6100
Flush-mounted units designed for connection with the T3200 for
instrument readings.
T3200
Flush-mounted units provide illuminaated indication of the phase
and frequency difference between voltages on two separate AC
systems.
T5000 T4500
C6200 FlexGen
S6000 Sigma
Sensing Resistors
Product
ER-600VC (PGE-600V)
Sensing Resistor
SE-MRE-600
Enclosure
ER-5KV (PGE-05KV)
Sensing Resistor
ER-5WP (PGE-05WV)
Sensing Resistor
Sensing Resistor
ER-25KV (PGE-25KV)
Sensing Resistor
ER-35KV (PGE-35KV)
Sensing Resistor
ER-72KV (PGE-72KV)
Sensing Resistor
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Used on systems up to 1 kV. (Continuous duty)
Used in outdoor enclosures. (ER-600VC ordered separately)
Accessory For
SE-330 SE-325
SE-330AU
ER-600VC
Used on systems up to 5 kV. (Continuous duty)
SE-330 SE-325
SE-330AU
Used on systems up to 5 kV, includes weather-protected
terminals for use in outdoor enclosures. (Continuous duty)
SE-330 SE-325
SE-330AU
Used on systems up to 15 kV. (Non-continuous duty)
SE-330
SE-330HV
SE-325
SE-330AU
Used on systems up to 25 kV. (Non-continuous duty)
SE-330
SE-330HV
SE-325
SE-330AU
Used on systems up to 35 kV. (Non-continuous duty)
Used on systems up to 72 kV. (Non-continuous duty)
119
SE-330
SE-330HV
SE-330AU
SE-330HV
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
16
ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES
ER-15KV (PGE-15KV)
Features
A
Accessories
Terminations, Adapters
terminations and adapters
Terminations AND ADAPTERS
Product
1N5339B
Termination Device
SE-TA6-SM
Stud-Mount Termination
Assembly
SE-TA6
Termination Assembly
SE-TA6A
(PGA-0T6A)
Termination Assembly
SE-TA6A-WL
Termination Assembly
SE-TA6ASF-WL
Small-Format Termination
Assembly with Wire Leads
SE-TA12A
Termination Assembly
SE-TA12ASF-WL
Small-Format Termination
Assembly with Wire Leads
SE-TA12A-WL
Termination Assembly
SE-TA12A
SE-TA12B
Termination Assemblies
PPI-600V
Parallel Path Isolator
RK-13
Relay Interface Module
ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES
16
A
SE-485-DIN
Industrial RS-485 to RS-232
Converter
SE-485-PP
Port-Powered Serial
Converter
CA-945
Serial Connector Adapter Kit
SE-ICUSB232
USB to RS-232 Converter
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Features
Accessory For
5 W axial-lead ground-check termination. Included with SE-105 and
SE-107.
SE-105
SE-107
50 W ground-check termination that is robust and compact for
submersible pumps. Wire lead simplifies installation.
(Replacement for 1N4553B)
SE-105
SE-107
50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and
screw terminals.
SE-105
SE-107
Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with
convenient mounting holes and screw terminals.
SE-105
SE-107
SE-134C
Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with
convenient mounting holes and screw terminals.
SE-105
SE-107
SE-134C
Temperature compensated 12 W ground-check termination, ideal
for use in cable-coupler end caps and submersible pumps. Mounting
holes and wire leads.
SE-105
SE-107
SE-134C
Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with
convenient mounting holes and screw terminals.
SE-135
SE-145
Temperature compensated 12 W ground-check termination, ideal
for use in cable-coupler end caps and submersible pumps. Mounting
holes and wire leads.
SE-135
SE-145
Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with
convenient mounting holes and screw terminals.
SE-135
SE-145
Used together to allow an SE-134C to monitor a splitter box and two
cables.
SE-134C
Parallel ground-path rejection for ground-check monitors. Eliminates
intermachine arcing and prevents stray DC currents from flowing in
a monitored ground wire.
SE-105 SE-107
SE-134C SE-135
Separate ground-fault and ground-check indication contacts for the
SE-105, and separate ground-fault and resistor-fault contacts for the
SE-325. Used to provide output to a PLC and operate standard pilot
lights. Complete with conformally coated circuit boards.
SE-105 SE-107
SE-325
MPS
FPS
Industrial network quality RS-485 to RS-233 serial converter.
DIN-rail mounted, 24 Vdc required.
Converts an RS-485 signal to an RS-232 signal. Used for set-point
programming and updating flash memory. 115.2 kbit/s maximum
transfer rate.
Connects an RJ45 to a 9-pin serial connector. Includes 1.5 m cable
and plug-in adapter.
Connects a 9-pin serial cable to a USB port.
120
MPU-32
FPU-32
MPS
FPS
MPU-32
FPU-32
SE-330
SE-330AU
SE-485-PP
CA-945
SE-330HV
SE-485-DIN
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Accessories
Adapters, Controls/Diagnostic Accessories
adapters & Controls/Diagnostics
Terminations AND ADAPTERS
Product
A0033
Features
Accessory For
Extension cable for the A0200 and A0300 sensors.
D0900
AC700-CUA
Optical network-interface and firmware-upgrade communication
adapter. Field-installed.
EL731
D0400
Junction box without indication, for parallel connection of more than
2 sensors for one relay. Designed to connect up to 8 sensors.
D0900
D0500
Junction box with indication, for parallel connection of more than
2 sensors for one relay. Designed to connect up to 8 sensors.
D0900
USB Cable with A/Mini-B plug (2 m).
E5000
Detector Cable
Communications Adapter
Junction Box (No Indication)
Junction Box (Indication)
E5540
USB Cable
G0100
Connects to RS232 port. Includes blank front-plate labels and
permanent pen for texting scales.
Programming Kit
K 3452 &K3450
RS232 Cable
K1025
USB A-B Cable
T4910
Potentiometer with Cable
G2000 G3000 G3300
For configuration from PC.
M2000
USB A to B cable.
M2500
For external power factor setting. External contact between
terminals 12 (COM) and 28 (PF ON). Included.
T4900
Accessories for Controls & Diagnostics
Product
E5520
Break-out Box
E5330
Charger
E5200
TDC Sensor
E5300
Crank-Angle Sensor
K2502
SD Card
Tacho Detector
M2600
Shutdown Unit
Accessory For
Break-out Box For TDC/Crank Angle Sensor.
E5000
Charger with USB Plug 110/240 Vac (incl. EU/UK/US adapter).
E5000
Detection of top dead center for TDC correction.
E5000
The unique, high-resolution design is easy to cut and adapt and thus
applicable for all shaft diameters. Can easily be installed by crew.
E5000
Included with the M2500.
M2500
Reads engine speed from frequency of the generator output voltage.
The reading is converted to a square wave signal and this signal is
provided on a dedicated output.
M2000 M2100
Safety shutdown device for protection of marine engines.
Speed detection from magnetic pickup or digital input.
M2500 M2600
NOTE: Refer to Terminations and Adapters table above for additional accessories.
16
ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES
M0500
Features
A
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
121
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Custom Products
CUSTOM PRODUCTS
Portable Power Centers............................................................................123
Mining Machine Controls.........................................................................124
Soft Starters..............................................................................................125
Power Take-off Panels..............................................................................126
Custom Buildings.......................................................................................127
For More Information…
and to download our
Custom Products Brochure, visit
www.littelfuse.com/customproducts
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
122
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Custom Products
portable power centers
Portable Power Center
Description
Littelfuse Startco is the leading Canadian manufacturer
of custom-built, portable mine power centers.
Littelfuse Startco portable mine power centers are
skid-mounted, metal-enclosed, and typically used in
underground mines. The extremely rugged enclosure
is mine-duty NEMA-12 casing, tub type, flat bottom,
and typically features a dry-type power transformer,
three-pole medium-voltage load interrupter switch,
secondary power-distribution breakers, and applicationspecific controls and protection. Each Littelfuse Startco
power center is HIPOT and High Voltage tested, and is
fully tested and inspected before shipping.
Typical Application
g
Underground mining
Features & Benefits
Features
Sandblasted & finished with
polyester powder coat
SE-325/SE-330
NGR Monitor
SE-105/SE-107 Ground-Fault
Ground-Check Monitor
BENEFITS
Corrosion resistant, long life in harsh environments
To detect grounding-resistor failure;
meets CSA M421-00
To protect portable trailing-cable fed equipment;
meets CSA M421-00
Plated steel hinges, latches,
and hardware
Long trouble-free life for heavy-duty use
Stainless steel hardware
available for wet or humid
environments
Corrosion resistant, long trouble-free life for
heavy-duty use
Key-interlocked system,
padlockable
With the use of a ground-check relay, provides
remote start/stop capabilities to control mobile
electric equipment
To keep unauthorized personnel out of hazardous
compartments
Wired-glass or Lexan
viewing windows
Long trouble-free life for heavy-duty use
Combination starter
17
CUSTOM PRODUCTS
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
123
www.littelfuse.com/customproducts
Custom Products
mining machine controls
Miner Control Console
Description
Littelfuse Startco builds very rugged and high-quality control
consoles for portable mining machines. These consoles
typically include Littelfuse MPU-32 or MPS Motor Protection
Relays, rugged industrial automation equipment, and custom
Littelfuse Startco keypads.
Miner Controls In Use
Custom-Built Panels
17
Description
CUSTOM PRODUCTS
Littelfuse Startco can assemble custom panels, complete
with ground-fault and motor protection relays as required.
www.littelfuse.com/customproducts
124
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Custom Products
soft starters
Solid-State Starter
Description
Littelfuse Startco Starters are designed for starting squirrelcage induction motors in single or parallel operation on pumps,
fans, conveyor belts, centrifuges, and other high-inertia loads.
The Littelfuse Starters are an extremely rugged design that
incorporates the SE-3SCR-LM Load Manager and Littelfuse
motor protection.
Features & Benefits
Features
SE-3SCR-LM
Load Manager
MPU-32 or MPS
Motor Protection
BENEFITS
Provides starter control, load sharing,
motor shedding
Prevents catastrophic failure due to
unhealthy load conditions
Provides smooth starts to eliminate belt
Controlled starting through
water hammer, or other damage to
current or tachometer feedback tearing,
load
Continuously-rated SCR and
power module
SCR is not bypassed during running
conditions providing longer useful life in
heavy-duty applications
Typical Applications
g
g
g
Pumps, fans, centrifuges, and other high-inertia loads
Multiple-motor conveyor drives
Heavy-duty use
17
CUSTOM PRODUCTS
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
125
www.littelfuse.com/customproducts
Custom Products
SEL-PTO ground-fault panel
Power Take-Off Panels
Description
The Littelfuse Startco SEL -PTO is a custom product that typically
incorporates the SE-105/SE-107 Ground-Fault Ground-Check
Monitor, overload protection, breaker, motor starter, and doormounted indication into a rugged wall-mount or free-standing
enclosure. The SEL -PTO offers a convenient way to connect
portable equipment to an electrical distribution system.
Typical Applications
The Littelfuse Startco SEL -PTO can be used in any installation that
uses portable cables. The SEL -PTO can also be used by a main
supply to add overcurrent protection and NGR monitoring.
Features & Benefits
Features
Overload protection
BENEFITS
To detect unhealthy conditions and prevent
catastrophic equipment failure
SE-105/SE-107
Ground-Fault
Ground-Check Monitor
To protect portable trailing-cable fed equipment;
meets CSA M421-00
Combination starter
With the use of a ground-check relay, provides
remote start / stop capabilities to control mobile
electric equipment
CUSTOM PRODUCTS
17
www.littelfuse.com/customproducts
126
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Custom Products
Custom Buildings
Electrical/Modular Buildings & Substations
Description
Electrical/Modular Buildings for:
g
Motor Controls
g
Switchgear
g
PLCs
g
Substations
g
Monitoring Equipment
g
Etc.
Substations
g
Fixed
g
Portable (skid/wheel/trailer)
Key Features of Building Design
g
10 gauge steel walls
g
Continuous welding—max strength, no water entry for rust
g
Inside walls as required
g
Insulation to spec
g
A
ll 3-D designed
17
CUSTOM PRODUCTS
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
127
www.littelfuse.com/customproducts
Overview
OVERVIEW
Glossary of Terms......................................................................................129
Ground Fault Protection............................................................................132
Motor Protection.......................................................................................137
Arc-Flash Protection.................................................................................139
CT Application...........................................................................................141
Resistance Grounding Conversion............................................................142
Generator Control......................................................................................144
Engine Control...........................................................................................145
Engine Diagnostics...................................................................................146
Alarm Monitoring......................................................................................147
Wiring Diagrams............................................................................... 148-155
ANSI/IEEE Device Numbers.....................................................................156
For More Information…
and to download our
Protection Relay Overview, visit
www.littelfuse.com/technicalcenter
NGR and CT Sizing Charts........................................................................156
Marine Certifications................................................................................156
Quick Reference Guides.....................................................................157-158
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
128
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Overview
Glossary of Terms
Active Power–Measured in kW. In a diesel generator
application, it is the power produced by the engine.
CT Saturation Compensation –A feature in which a
protective relay can recognize that a CT is saturated and
compensate for the condition in order to maintain service.
Alarm Level–A setting on a protection relay at which an LED
or output contact operates.
Data Logging–Collecting and storing information in a
format that can be reviewed for trending, troubleshooting, and
reporting.
Alarm Relay Contact–An output of a relay that acts as a
switch and is typically connected to a visual or audible alarm.
DFT–See Discrete Fourier Transform.
Analog Output–A discrete, continually variable 0-1 mA,
Differential Module –An accessory for the MPU-32 Motor
4-20 mA, or 0-5 Vdc signal from a protection relay used to pass
information to a device or controller.
Protection Relay and MPS Motor Protection System to add
phase-differential protection.
Apparent Power–The vector sum of the active and reactive
Digital Harmonic Filter–The use of digital signal-
power.
processing techniques such as a discrete fourier transform to
eliminate the measurement of harmonic components. With
regard to ground-fault detection, this allows for a setting below
the background noise level.
Asynchronous Motor–A motor in which the speed of the
rotor is not the same as the connected system frequency.
Auxiliary Generator–Creates the main power supply on
a ship. Usually driven by diesel engines and in some cases by
gas engines or turbines.
Discrete Fourier Transform–A mathematical algorithm
used to extract a single frequency, such as the fundamental
frequency, from a signal.
AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) –The voltage
regulator will control the alternator voltage and keep it at set
point (e.g. 400 V). The AVR often includes a remote voltage
setting input. Via this input the voltage set point can be
adjusted by external equipment such as reactive load sharers
or power factor regulators.
Droop –See Speed Droop and Voltage Droop.
Earth Leakage –See Leakage Current.
Earth-Fault Current Transformer–A current transformer
used to measure low-level ground-fault current.
Base Load–An operational mode of generators running in
Fail-Safe Mode (also known as Undervoltage or
UV) –An output relay is energized during normal (not tripped)
parallel with the utility. In this mode, a fixed amount of load
is being generated, while local load fluctuations are being
covered by the utility.
operation. If the protection relay loses supply voltage, the
system will trip or alarm. (Also see Non-Fail-Safe.)
Charging Current–System charging current is the current
that will flow into the grounding connection when one phase
of an ungrounded system is faulted to ground. Although not
physically connected to ground, electrical conductors and
the windings of all components are capacitively connected
to ground. Consequently, a small current will flow to ground
from each phase. This current does not occur at any particular
location; rather, it is distributed throughout the system just
as the capacitance to ground is distributed throughout the
system.
Fault Current–A current that flows when a phase conductor
is faulted to another phase or ground.
Feeder–All circuit conductors between the service
equipment or other power-supply source and the load or
branch-circuit overcurrent device.
Feeder Protection–Overcurrent or overvoltage devices
installed on a feeder circuit to interrupt the supply in the event
of a fault.
Flux Conditioner–A ring of magnetically permeable
Conformal Coating–A Silicone coating used to protect
material inserted in an earth-fault current transformer window;
used to reduce local saturation.
circuit boards from pollutants, corrosion, mildew, etc.
Core-Balance Current Transformer –See Earth-Fault
Fundamental Frequency–In an alternating-current power
Current Transformer.
Current Transformer (CT) –A transformer that produces a
system, the frequency of the generated voltage. In North
America this is typically 60 Hz (60 cycles per second).
CT Verification–A continuous check of CT continuity to
Governor–The governor or speed regulator will keep the
speed of the engine at set point (i.e. 1500 rpm). In generator
application the governor often includes a remote speed setting
input. Via this input the speed set point can be adjusted by
external equipment such as synchronizers or load sharers.
current in its secondary circuit in a known proportion to current
in its primary circuit.
verify connection.
CT Saturation–A condition that occurs when a CT cannot
maintain a secondary current proportional to a relatively large
primary current.
Ground Check Conductor–An insulated conductor in
CT Local Saturation–A condition where the magnetic
flux is not evenly distributed throughout the CT. A resulting
secondary current could be induced when no ground fault is
present; it may lead to the false operation of a protective relay.
This could occur if conductors are not centered in a
CT window.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Ground-Check Loop –A circuit that includes a ground-check
conductor, a ground-check termination device, and a ground
conductor.
129
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
18
OVERVIEW
a trailing cable used to assist in monitoring continuity of the
ground conductor. Typically designed to be the smallest
conductor, it is the first to break connection when cable
couplers are disconnected.
Overview
Glossary of Terms
Ground-Check Termination–A device installed at the load
Insulation resistance change can be monitored to predict
failure.
Ground-Continuity Monitor–A protection relay that
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection–A method
by which time-to-trip of a protective device, such as an
overcurrent or ground-fault relay, decreases as the magnitude
of the fault increases.
end of a ground-check loop.
continuously monitors a ground-check loop and trips if the loop
opens or shorts.
Ground Fault–An unintentional contact between a phase
conductor and ground or equipment frame. The words
“ground” and “earth” are used interchangeably.
ISO Correction–Performed in engine diagnostics to
be able to compare measurements taken under different
environmental conditions. For this, the atmospheric data is
collected together with the measurements on the engine.
Ground-Fault Current–A current that returns to the supply
neutral through a ground-fault and ground-return path.
Isochronous Mode –Generators can operate in droop
mode or isochronous mode. Isochronous mode means there
is no droop (0%) and the generator speed remains constant
regardless of generator load.
Ground-Fault Current Transformer–See Earth-Fault
Current Transformer.
Ground-Fault Relay–A protection relay designed to detect
a phase-to-ground fault on a system and trip or alarm when
the condition exceeds its pickup setting for longer than its time
delay.
Leakage Current–Low-level ground-fault current, typically
Ground-Fault Protection–The use of a ground-fault relay
or indication system in order to interrupt the supply or alarm
personnel in the event of a ground fault.
System that allows high currents to flow during a ground
fault. Typically, 100 A and higher is considered Low-Resistance
Grounding. (Also see High-Resistance Grounding.)
Ground Reference Module –A resistor network that limits
LSIG Protection–An acronym for Long-time, Short-time,
measured in milliamperes (mA).
Low-Resistance Grounding–A Resistance-Grounding
ground-fault current and provides a system reference for a DC
ground-fault relay.
Instantaneous overcurrent, and Ground-fault protection; a
term often used to describe protection required for a powerdistribution feeder, or a protection relay with these functions.
Harmonic Filter–A device or method to remove or ignore
non-fundamental frequency components of a signal.
Motor Protection–Technology designed to ensure that a
motor operates within its rated thermal capacity in order to
maximize its service life.
Harmonic Frequency–Harmonic-frequency components
(voltage and current) are multiples of the fundamental
frequency and, in a power system, can be considered noise.
Harmonic-frequency components are often present with the
use of adjustable-speed drives.
Neutral-Grounding Resistor (NGR) –A current-limiting
resistor connecting the power-system neutral to ground.
N.C. Contact (Normally Closed Contact) –A relay
contact that is closed when the relay is not energized.
High-Resistance Grounding–Using a neutral-grounding
resistor to limit the current to a low level. Typically, HighResistance Grounding limits ground-fault current to 25 A or
lower. (Also see Low-Resistance Grounding.)
N.O. Contact (Normally Open Contact) –A relay contact
that is open when the relay is not energized.
Non-Fail-Safe Mode (also known as Shunt Trip or
SH) –An output relay is energized and contacts change state
High Tension Coupler–An accessory used to isolate
system voltage from a protective relay.
when a trip occurs. If the protective device loses supply
voltage, the system can continue to operate but will not be
protected. (Also see Fail-Safe Mode.)
I2t (I squared t) –Thermal capacity, or used thermal capacity.
With regard to motor protection, thermal capacity is used
to measure and describe motor heating in terms of current
(I). This method is more accurate than temperature sensing
because of temperature-sensor placement and the time delay
inherent in temperature measurement.
Non-Volatile Memory–Data is retained when power is
removed.
Nuisance Trip –A false operation of a protective relay.
IEEE Device Numbers –The devices in switching
OVERVIEW
18
Peak Shaving–An operational mode of generators running
equipment are referred to by numbers, according to the
functions they perform. These numbers are based on a
system which has been adopted as standard for automatic
switchgear by the IEEE. This numbering system is used
on connection diagrams, in instruction literature, and in
specifications.
in parallel with the utility. In this mode, a fixed amount of load
is being either imported from, or exported to, the utility, while
local load fluctuations are being covered by the generators.
Phase Current–Current present in a phase conductor.
Phase-Current Transformer–A current transformer
Insulation Monitoring–Monitoring the resistance from
installed so that current from one phase conductor flows in
its primary winding. With regard to motor protection, feeder
protection, and metering in a three-phase system, three
current transformers are typically used to measure phase
currents.
phase to ground to detect insulation breakdown on a system.
Insulation Resistance –A measurement of the ability of an
insulator, such as a cable jacket, to prevent current flow when
a voltage is applied; typically measured in megaohms (MΩ).
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
130
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Overview
Glossary of Terms
RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) –A device
that experiences a linear change in resistance with a change
in temperature. It is used to provide temperature metering.
Common RTDs are 100 Ω platinum, 100 Ω nickel, 120 Ω nickel,
and 10 Ω copper.
Phase-Differential Protection–Protection designed to
detect low-level winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground
failures in an ac motor.
Phase Voltage –The voltage measured between a phase
conductor and ground, or another phase.
Sensitive Ground-Fault Protection–Protection
designed to accurately detect low-level ground-fault current.
Power factor (cosφ) –The relation between the active power
[kW] and apparent power [kVA].
Shaft Generator–Coupled to, and driven by the main
Primary Rating (for CTs)–The current rating of the primary
propulsion engine on a ship. Advantage of this setup is
reduced fuel consumption than what could be achieved with
auxiliary engines. Even though a ship has a shaft generator it
still needs auxiliaries as well.
side of a current transformer. For example, the first number in
the ratio 500:5 is the primary rating. 500 A of primary current
flowing through the CT will produce 5 A of current out of the
secondary terminals.
Solidly Grounded System–An electrical system in which
the neutral point of a wye-connected supply transformer is
connected directly to ground. (Also see Resistance-Grounded
System, Ungrounded System.)
Pulsing Ground-Fault Systems –Modulating the
ground-fault current on a resistance-grounded system using
a contactor to short out part of the NGR elements (or to open
one of two NGRs connected in parallel). This technique is
used to locate ground faults by tracing the pulsing ground-fault
current to the source of the fault.
Speed Droop –The frequency reduction between no-load
situation and operation, and full-load in generator applications.
A typical droop adjustment is 3%.
Online or Offline Monitoring–Monitoring system
parameters such as insulation integrity when the system is
energized or de-energized, respectively.
Synchronous Generator–A generator in which the rotor
speed is the same as the connected system frequency.
Open-CT Hazard–An open-circuited CT secondary which
can develop a dangerously high voltage when primary current
is present.
TDC (Top Dead Center) –The position of the piston when it
is farthest from the crankshaft in a reciprocating engine.
Reactive Power–Measured in kVAR. The power used
this, it is necessary to compensate for the elastic twist in the
crankshaft and the delay in the indicator valve.
TDC Correction–Used to find the exact TDC position. To do
for magnetization of asynchronous alternators, motors and
transformers, coils etc. The amount of reactive power has no
effect on the torque of the prime mover (e.g. diesel engine).
Therefore the reactive power has no effect on the engine. It is
however very important for the alternator, as the total load on
the alternator is the vector sum of active and reactive load.
Time Delay–A setting on a protection relay that determines
the time between the fault detection and relay operation.
Trailing Cable –A power cable used to supply electrical
power to mobile equipment. They typically contain three
phase conductors, two ground conductors, and a pilot wire
(also known as a ground-check conductor).
Relay (1) –An electrical switch that opens and closes a
contact (or contacts) under the control of another circuit.
Typically an electromagnet.
Trip Level–A setting on a protection relay at which an LED or
output contact operates.
Relay (2) –A device that receives inputs, compares them to
Trip Relay Contact–An output of a relay that acts as a
set points, and provides outputs based upon that comparison.
switch and is typically connected to an undervoltage-release or
shunt-trip coil of a circuit breaker.
Relay Operating Mode –Method of operation used for
undervoltage or shunt-trip breakers. (Also see Fail-Safe Mode,
Non-Fail-Safe Mode.)
Trip State –The state of the output contact during a relay trip.
True RMS –“Root-Mean-Square” calculation used to derive
Resistance-Grounded System–An electrical system in
which the transformer or generator neutral is connected to
ground through a current-limiting resistor. (Also see Solidly
Grounded System, Ungrounded System.)
an average current or voltage value in a waveform.
Ungrounded System–An electrical system in which no
point of the system is intentionally grounded, such as a deltaconnected supply transformer.
Reverse Power–An active power [kW] fed into a generator
that thus is working as an electric motor, turning the prime
mover. As this would damage the prime mover (e.g. an
internal combustion engine), reverse power relays are used in
applications where generators run in parallel with each other or
with the utility. These relays detect the amount and direction of
the power, and in case of excessive reverse power, disconnect
the generator breaker.
Voltage Droop –The voltage reduction between no-load
situation (reactive loads [kVAR]) and operation, and full-load in
generator applications. A typical droop adjustment is 3%.
Zero-Sequence Current Transformer–See Earth-Fault
Current Transformer.
OVERVIEW
Ride-Through Time –The amount of time a protection relay
can maintain operation during a supply voltage loss.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
18
131
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Overview
Introduction
I. Introduction to Protection Relays
I. Intro to Protection Relays
What is a protection relay?
Inputs and Settings
Processes
g Outputs
g
What is a Protection Relay?
g
A protection relay is a smart device that receives inputs,
compares them to set points, and provides outputs. Inputs can
include current, voltage, resistance, or temperature. Outputs can
include visual feedback in the form of indicator lights and/or an
alphanumeric display, communications, control warnings, alarms,
and turning power off and on. A diagram is shown below.
How do protection relays solve electrical problems?
Stage 1 – Early stages of a failure
Stage 2 – During a failure
g Stage 3 – After a failure
g
g
II. Relay Application
CURRENT
Ground-Fault Protection
VOLTAGE
Definition of Ground Fault
g DC Systems
g Ungrounded AC Systems
g Solidly Grounded Systems
g Resistance-Grounded Systems
g System Capacitive Charging Current
g Resistor Monitors
g Ground-Continuity Monitors
g
INSULATION
TEMPERATURE
PICK-UP LEVELS
Arc-Flash Protection
Overview
Arc-Flash Safety Standards
g Arc-Flash Mitigation
g Arc-Flash Relays
g Selection Criteria
g
g
REMOVE
POWER
A relay needs information from the system to make a
decision. These inputs can be collected in a variety of ways.
In some cases, the wires in the field can be connected
directly to the relay. In other applications, additional devices
are needed to convert the measured parameters to a format
that the relay can process. These additional devices can be
current transformers, potential transformers, high-tension
couplers, RTDs, or other devices.
Current Transformers
Lead Length
g CT Installation
g
g
IV. Resistance Grounding Conversion
V. Generator Control
Settings
Synchronizing
g Load Sharing
g
Many protection relays have adjustable settings. The user
selects settings (pick-up levels) that allow the relay to make a
decision. The relay compares the inputs to these settings and
responds accordingly.
VI. Engine Control
OVERVIEW
COMMUNICATIONS
Inputs
III. CT Application
Engine Controllers
Shut-down Units
Processes
Once the inputs are connected and the settings are made,
the relay compares these values and makes a decision.
Depending on the need, different types of relays are available
for different functions.
VII. Engine diagnostics
VIII. Alarm MONITORING
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
WARNING
ALARM
Protection relays can be either electromechanical or
electronic/microprocessor-based. Electromechanical relays
consist of mechanical parts that require routine calibration
to stay within intended tolerances. Microprocessor-based
or electronic relays provide quick, reliable, accurate, and
repeatable outputs. Using an electronic or microprocessorbased relay instead of an electromechanical design provides
numerous advantages including improved accuracy, additional
functions, reduced maintenance, smaller space requirements
and lower life-cycle costs.
Overview
g Common Motor Problems and Solutions
g Motor Protection and the NEC®
18
SETTINGS
OUTPUTS
FIGURE 1
g
g
PROTECTION
RELAY
TIME
Motor Protection
g
VISUAL
INDICATION
INPUTS
132
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Overview
Ground-Fault Protection
Outputs
As an example, if a facility is continually resetting circuit
breakers, replacing fuses, or repairing equipment and cannot
locate the problem, they may be experiencing overcurrents. If
this is the case, the user can install a protection relay that has
an overcurrent feature. The relay measures the current (input)
and allows the user to program limits (settings). The settings
typically are more sensitive than the fuses or circuit breakers.
Once these limits are exceeded, the relay will operate an
internal switch (relay contacts). The user has the option to
use the switch to turn on a light (alarm indication) or remove
power (trip) before greater problems occur. The user can use
the alarm indication to help identify the faulty equipment prior
to the traditional fuse or circuit breaker clearing the fault.
A relay can have several ways of communicating that a
decision has been made. Typically the relay will operate a
switch (relay contact) to indicate that an input has surpassed
a setting, or the relay can provide notification through visual
feedback such as a meter or LED. One advantage of many
electronic or microprocessor-based relays is an ability to
communicate with a network or a PLC.
As an example, a thermostat can be evaluated using
the diagram in Figure 1. The input that is measured is
temperature and the input device is the temperature sensor.
The user sets the desired temperature setting (pick-up
level). The relay measures the existing air temperature and
compares it to the setting. The outputs can be used to
provide controls (turning an air conditioner or furnace on and
off) and visual indication on the thermostat display.
II. Relay Application
Ground-Fault Protection
How Do Protection Relays Solve
Electrical Problems?
The primary purpose of grounding electrical systems is
to provide protection against electrical faults. However,
this was not common practice until the 1970’s. Until then,
most commercial and industrial systems were ungrounded.
Although ungrounded systems do not cause significant
damage during the first ground fault, the numerous
disadvantages associated with ground faults resulted in
a change to the grounding philosophy. There are other
advantages for a grounded system, such as reduction of
shock hazards and protection against lightning.
Similar to how the thermostat solves the problem of
automating the control of the air conditioner or furnace in
a home, protection relays can solve electrical problems.
The purpose of the protection relay is to detect a problem,
ideally during its initial stage, and to either eliminate or
significantly reduce damage to personnel and/or equipment.
The following stages illustrate how an electrical problem
develops:
Electrical faults can be divided into two categories: phase-tophase faults and ground faults. Studies have shown that 98%
of all electrical faults are ground faults (Source: Woodham,
Jack, P.E. “ The Basics of Grounding Systems” May 1,
2003 <http://www.ecmweb.com/mag/electric_basics_
grounding_systems_2/index.html>). While fuses can protect
against phase-to-phase faults, additional protection, such as
protection relays, are typically required to protect against
ground faults.
Stage 1: When conductors with good insulation are
exposed to fault initiators such as moisture, dust, chemicals,
persistent overloading, vibration or just normal wear, the
insulation will slowly deteriorate. Such small changes will not
be immediately obvious until the damage is severe enough to
cause an electrical fault. Relays can detect that a problem is
developing by identifying slight deviations in current, voltage,
resistance, or temperature. Due to the small magnitude
in change, only a sophisticated device such as a sensitive
protection relay or a monitor can detect these conditions and
indicate that a problem may be developing, before any further
damage occurs.
Definition of Ground Fault
A ground fault is an inadvertent contact between an energized
conductor and ground or the equipment frame. The return
path of the fault current is through the grounding system
and any equipment or personnel that becomes part of that
system. Ground faults are frequently the result of insulation
breakdown. It’s important to note that damp, wet, and
dusty environments require extra diligence in design and
maintenance. Since contaminated water is conductive, it
exposes degradation of insulation and increases the potential
for hazards to develop.
Stage 2: As the problem becomes more severe, further
changes take place such as insulation breakdown,
overheating, or overvoltage. Since the change from
normal to abnormal is great, traditional devices can be
used to interrupt power. Protection relays can also be
used to provide additional protection by detecting the fault
contributors (overheating, overvoltage, etc.) not possible
with fuses and circuit breakers.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
18
OVERVIEW
Stage 3: At this point, the problem has occurred and caused
damage. Different types of protection relays and monitors
can reduce or eliminate damage because they detect
problems in advance of traditional devices.
133
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Overview
Ground-Fault Protection
Table 1 shows the leading initiators of electrical faults.
Leading Initiators of Faults
Exposure to moisture
Shorting by tools, rodents, etc.
Exposure to dust
Other mechanical damage
Exposure to chemicals
Normal deterioration from age
% of all Faults
22.5%
18.0%
14.5%
12.1%
9.0%
7.0%
GROUND REFERENCE MODULE
L1
L2
TABLE 1
RECEPTACLE
BLACK
FIGURE 3
l FAULT
120 V
WHITE
Ungrounded AC Systems
TOASTER
15 A
Ungrounded AC systems, as shown in Figure 4, were used
where continuity of power was critical. For example, chemical
plants or refineries involving processes that cannot be
interrupted without extensive dollar or product loss may have
an ungrounded system. However, experience has proven
that these systems are problematic and are being replaced
with resistance grounded systems. Two major problems with
ungrounded systems are transient overvoltages and difficulty
locating ground faults.
GREEN
FIGURE 2
As an example, in the toaster circuit above, the black or hot
wire is shorted to the metal casing of the toaster. When the
circuit closes, all or part of the current is channeled through
the toaster frame and then through the green ground wire.
When sufficient current flows (typically 6 x 15 A = 90 A), the
circuit breaker will open. A protection relay could be installed
to detect currents as low as 10 mA, which would open the
circuit breaker at a significantly lower level, hence, much
quicker than the traditional circuit breaker.
PHASE C
PHASE A
PHASE B
DISTRIBUTED
SYSTEM
CAPACITANCE
Although the example above shows a solidly grounded singlephase circuit, the philosophy is the same on three-phase
circuits discussed later. Relays and monitors are specifically
designed to look for the leading initiators shown in Table 1 by
detecting low-level changes in current, voltage, resistance or
temperature.
FIGURE 4
g
DC Systems
g
Direct current (DC) systems have positive and negative buses.
If either bus is intentionally grounded, then it is referred to
as a grounded system. If neither bus is grounded, then it is
referred to as an ungrounded DC system. A ground fault on a
DC system may cause damage to the source as well as in the
field.
OVERVIEW
18
g
If the system is ungrounded, then it is possible to use a
ground-fault relay by installing a ground-reference module
between the two buses to establish a neutral point (see
Figure 3). The ground-fault relay uses this neutral point as a
reference to detect low-level ground faults.
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
g
134
An ungrounded system has no point in the system that is
intentionally grounded (other than the normal bonding which
is always present to connect the non-current-carrying metal
parts to ground). Grounding occurs only through system
capacitance to ground (as shown in Figure 4).
Continuity of operation occurs because the system can
operate with one phase faulted to ground.
An intermittent or arcing fault can produce high transient
overvoltages to ground. These voltages are impressed
on the phase conductors throughout the system until
the insulation at the weakest point breaks down. This
breakdown can occur at any point in the electrical system,
causing a phase-to-ground-to-phase fault.
Although a ground fault can be detected or alarmed on the
system, it is difficult to determine the location of the fault.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Overview
Ground-Fault Protection
There are two methods used to detect ground faults on
ungrounded systems. One method is to monitor the voltages
between the phases and ground. As a ground fault develops,
the faulted phase will collapse to ground potential, causing
an indicator light to dim. The indicator lights on the unfaulted
phases become brighter.
Figure 6 illustrates an example of the dangers associated
with solidly grounded systems. In this example, a ground
fault occurs and the overcurrent protection is set at 600 A.
600 A / 3 P
A second method to detect a ground fault is to measure
the insulation resistance. As the insulation deteriorates, a
relay continuously monitoring the insulation resistance can
alarm at different levels for predictive maintenance. A visual
indicator or meter can also be used.
ARCING
FAULT
EQUIPMENT FRAME
OR BARE COPPER
Solidly Grounded Systems
FIGURE 6
Due to the problem of ungrounded systems, a shift in
philosophy occurred and designs moved from ungrounded
to grounded systems. In most cases, the type of grounding
system chosen was solidly grounded. A solidly grounded
system is a system of conductors in which at least one
conductor or point is intentionally grounded (usually the neutral
point of transformer or generator windings). The problem
with the direct connection is that ground-fault current can be
excessive, causing Arc-Flash hazards, extensive equipment
damage, and possible injury to personnel. A solidly grounded
system cannot continue to operate with a ground fault.
Assume that this ground-fault is not a bolted fault, but an
arcing fault due to an insulation breakdown or a partial
reduction of clearances between the line and ground.
Because of the arc resistance, fault current may be as low
as 38% of the bolted-fault level. This can be in the range of
a normal load or a slight overload.
The fault current may be low enough that the overcurrent
device (600-A circuit breaker) does not sense a fault, or may
pick it up but not trip for a long time.
The energy being supplied by the source is concentrated
at the arc and could cause severe equipment damage very
quickly. This energy release could cause a fire that in turn,
could damage the premises and present an extreme hazard
to personnel.
g
g
g
PHASE C
NEUTRAL
PHASE A
Aside from converting this solidly grounded system to
resistance grounding, the best way to prevent damage is
to detect low-level ground leakage prior to it becoming a
ground fault. In order to accomplish this, the protection relay
must be able to sense a low-level ground leakage without
nuisance tripping.
PHASE B
GROUND
FIGURE 5
g
g
g
g
In modern facilities, equipment often generates noise or
harmonics that can interfere with a protection relay’s ability
to function properly. For example, the noise or harmonics
may be higher than the desired ground-fault relay settings,
causing the relay to falsely operate when there is no fault on
the system. The protection relay must be able to filter out
noise or harmonics to provide reliable protection.
In a solidly grounded system, the wye point (or neutral) of
the power source is connected solidly to ground and offers
a very stable system that maintains a fixed phase-to-ground
voltage.
The high ground-fault current is easy to detect with fuses,
circuit breakers, or protection relays, allowing for selective
tripping (tripping the faulted feeder and not the main feeder).
When a ground fault occurs, high point-of-fault damage can
quickly result since the energy available to the ground fault
is only limited by the system impedance (which is typically
very low).
Due to excessive ground-fault current and Arc-Flash
Hazards, the faulted feeder must be removed from service.
This does not allow for continuous operation during a
ground fault.
Resistance-Grounded Systems
Resistance grounding solves the problems commonly
associated with both ungrounded systems and solidly
grounded systems. The name is derived from the addition
of a resistor between the system neutral and ground (as
shown in Figure 7). The specifications of the resistor are userdetermined to achieve a desired ground-fault current, which
must be greater than the system capacitive charging current
(explained later in this section).
18
OVERVIEW
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
135
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Overview
Ground-Fault Protection
NEUTRAL
PHASE C
C
PHASE A
A
PHASE B
B
xC
A
xC
xC
IA + IB + IC = 0
GROUND
FIGURE 7
g
g
g
g
g
FIGURE 8
ransient overvoltages can be eliminated by correctly sizing
T
the neutral-grounding resistor (NGR) to provide an adequate
discharge path for the system capacitance.
Continuity of operation with one ground fault is typically
allowable when ground-fault current is <−10 A.
The NGR limits the available ground-fault current. This
eliminates or minimizes point-of-fault damage (Arc-Flash
Hazards) and controls the ground-fault voltage.
Pulsing current can be used to locate ground faults when
ground-fault current is <−10 A. Pulsing current is created by
using a shorting contactor to short out half of the resistance,
causing the ground-fault current to double (usually one cycle
per second). A hand-held zero-sequence meter is used to
detect the fluctuating ground-fault current, and locate the
ground fault.
The only disadvantage of resistance grounding is that if the
resistor fails, the system will become ungrounded. Resistor
monitoring is recommended to protect against this.
Even if the distributed capacitance is not balanced, the
ammeter will read zero because all the current flowing
through the CT window must return through the CT window.
System charging current is the current that will flow into the
grounding connection when one phase of an ungrounded
system is faulted to ground (see Figure 9). It can be
measured as shown below if appropriate precautions are
taken:
g
g
If the fault occurs on the supply side of the CT, the sum
of the currents in the CT window is not zero.
Ammeter A will read the sum of the capacitive currents in
the unfaulted phases. This value is the charging current of all
the equipment on the load side of the CT.
lC
lA
A protection relay for resistance-grounded systems is used
to detect a ground fault and to monitor the neutral-to-ground
connection. It can be used to provide alarms or to trip the
feeder from service upon the detection of a ground fault.
The relay can provide a pulsing circuit that can be used to
locate the ground fault. The relay can also alarm or trip if the
neutral-to-ground path fails. For systems 5 kV and less, highresistance grounding can be used. High-resistance grounding
typically limits the resistor current to 10 A or less. By doing
so, the ground fault can remain on the system, given that the
system is rated for the voltage shift.
For systems above 5 kV, neutral-grounding resistors are typically
rated for 25 A or more, and ground-fault current is cleared within
10 s.
lB
x
A
xC
xC
OVERVIEW
IA + IB + IC = 0
FIGURE 9
A single-line diagram of a three-feeder, resistance-grounded
system with a fault on feeder 3 is shown in Figure 10.
A CT (A1 and A2) on unfaulted feeders will detect the
charging current of that feeder.
A CT (A3) on a faulted feeder will detect the sum of the
resistor current (IR) and the charging currents (I1 +I2) of the
unfaulted feeders.
g
g
System Capacitive Charging Current
18
xC
Although not physically connected to ground, electrical
conductors and the windings of all components are
capacitively connected to ground. Consequently, a small
current will flow to ground from each phase. This current
does not occur at any particular location; rather, it is
distributed throughout the system just as the capacitance
to ground is distributed throughout the system. For analysis,
it is convenient to consider the distributed capacitance as
lumped capacitance, as shown in Figures 5, 6, 7, and 8.
A1
A2
l1
l2
1
2
3
lR
A3
FIGURE 10
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
136
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Overview
Motor Protection
Selective coordination in a resistance-grounded system can
be achieved if the pick-up setting of each ground-fault relay is
greater than the charging current of the feeder it is protecting.
If the pick-up setting of a ground-fault relay is less than the
charging current of the feeder it is protecting, it will trip when
a ground fault occurs elsewhere in the system. This is known
as sympathetic tripping. Sympathetic tripping can be avoided
by choosing a relay pickup setting larger than the charging
current from the largest feeder. If the relative size of the
feeders can change, or if the advantage of using one operating
value for all ground-fault relays in a system is recognized,
then it is prudent to select a pick-up setting for all ground-fault
relays that is larger than the system charging current.
Motor Protection
In order to eliminate transient overvoltages associated with
an ungrounded system, it is necessary to use a grounding
resistor with a let-through current equal to or larger than the
system charging current.
Overload and Overtemperature
Overview
Motors are a significant investment and often run critical
processes. Motor protection relays are used to protect the
windings from damage due to electrical faults and thermal
overloads. Adequate motor protection not only prevents
motor damage, but also ensures optimal process efficiency
and minimal interruption. Cost recovery for protection is
achieved by extending the life of the motor, preventing motor
rewinds and reducing downtime.
Common Motor Problems
Insulation breakdown is a common reason for motor failure.
Windings in the motor are insulated with organic materials
including epoxy and paper. Insulation degradation occurs
when winding temperature exceeds its rating. The National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) states that the
time-to-failure of organic insulation is halved for each 8 to
10°C rise above the motor insulation-class rating. This point is
illustrated in Figure 11.
What is the minimum acceptable NGR current? Select a pickup setting for the ground-fault relays that exceeds the largest
feeder charging current and multiply the operating value by
an acceptable tripping ratio. Use the greater of this value or
system charging current and select the next-largest available
standard let-through current rating.
Solution: An I2t Thermal Model provides thermal-overload
protection of motor windings during all phases of operation. By
integrating the square of the current over time, a thermal model
can predict motor temperature and react much quicker than
embedded temperature devices. A thermal model takes into
consideration the motor service factor, full-load current and class.
A dynamic thermal model adjusts the time-to-trip depending on
how much motor thermal capacity has been used. Figure 12
illustrates the adjustment in trip time for different current levels at
different levels of used thermal capacity (I2t).
Resistor Monitors
As discussed in the resistance-grounded systems section, a
failure in the neutral-to-ground path will lead to a dangerous
situation. Some examples of failure are stolen wires, loose
connections, corrosion, and broken resistor elements. The
resistor monitor continuously monitors the path from system
neutral to ground for a problem. When a problem occurs, the
monitor provides an alarm.
Ground-Continuity Monitors
A dynamic thermal model allows accurate protection of a
motor and allows operations to get the maximum work out
of a motor without sacrificing available life. If the motor is
hot (high % used thermal capacity) it will trip more rapidly
during an overload than if the motor is cold (0% used thermal
capacity). In the event of a stall condition, when available
motor torque is lower than the torque required by the load,
the motor can be de-energized before it overheats.
Ground-check monitors are used to detect problems in
equipment ground conductors. The cable powering mobile
equipment typically has an extra wire, or pilot wire, routed
with the phase conductors. A monitor uses this pilot wire to
send a signal to a terminating device in the equipment, where
the signal is sent back on the cable ground conductor to the
monitor. The monitor continuously monitors this loop for open
or short circuits, indicating that a problem has occurred. The
monitor provides an alarm for this condition.
Many old-technology electronic thermal overloads do not
take into consideration the values of load current below
the full-load current (FLA) pick-up value. Modern overload
relays should model currents above and below the FLA
pick-up current to achieve maximum output of the motor and
maximum life of insulation.
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
On larger induction motors, blockage or loss of ventilation
can cause motor hot spots that current-based protection
cannot detect without the use of temperature sensors.
Resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) are inexpensive
devices installed between the stator windings during
manufacturing and may be included on motor-end bearings.
137
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
18
OVERVIEW
As an example, portable loads are grounded via single or
multiple conductors in a trailing cable. A ground fault on a
portable load will cause fault current to flow through the
ground conductors and all other ground-return paths. A
hazardous touch voltage can develop when the ground
conductor opens and a ground fault develops, assuming there
is not enough current to trip a ground-fault relay. If the portable
equipment has rubber tires or is not in good contact with
earth, then a person who touches the equipment under fault
conditions will become part of the ground-return path.
Overview
Motor Protection
100 000
10000
8000
10
7
50 000
6000
5000
4000
(YEARS)
5
CLASS F
10 000
2000
1000
800
1
5000
600
500
400
(MONTHS)
5
300
T I ME - T O - T R I P ( S E C O ND S )
200
1000
1
20
10
5
100
50
(DAYS)
AVERAGE MOTOR LIFE (HOURS)
2
500
SERVICE FACTOR 1 00 TO 1 25
SHOWN AT 1 15
3000
TIME TO TRIP DECREASES
AS USED I 2 t INCREASES
100
80
60
50
40
30
0% USED I 2 t (cold)
20
25% USED I 2 t
50% USED I 2 t
75% USED I 2 t
10
8
3
6
5
4
2
3
1
2
10
1
0 8
5
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0
100
200
300
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
160
150
140
130
120
110
100
1
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
MOTOR CURRENT (%FLA)
HOTTEST TEMPERATURE (°C)
FIGURE 12
FIGURE 11
An RTD has a linear change in resistance over its rated
temperature range. Using information from an RTD, motorprotection relays can provide protection for loss-of-ventilation,
loss-of-cooling, or high-ambient-temperature.
protection is typically set above locked rotor current and has
a minimal delay time. Overcurrent protection may be used to
trip a breaker instead of a starter due to the high fault levels.
Jam protection is set below overcurrent and has a slightly
longer delay time. Jam protection prevents motor heating
that would otherwise lead to an overload trip. Jam protection
is enabled after the motor is running to avoid tripping on
starting current. Undercurrent is set below full-load current to
detect loss of load.
The RTD temperature reading can also be used as an input
to the thermal model to improve protection. When hotmotor compensation is enabled, the maximum stator-RTD
temperature is used to bias the thermal model by increasing
used I2t when the RTD temperature is greater than the
thermal-model temperature.
Under and Overvoltage
Overvoltages cause insulation stress and premature
breakdown. Undervoltages, such as those caused by
brownouts, can lead to increased motor heating. Torque
developed by an electric motor changes as the square of the
applied voltage. A 10% reduction in voltage results in a 19%
reduction in torque. If the motor load is not reduced, the
motor will be overloaded.
Overcurrent, Jam and Undercurrent
Overcurrent faults, also referred to as short circuits, can
cause catastrophic motor failures and fires. Overcurrents can
be caused by phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, and phase-toground-to-phase faults.
A mechanical jam, such as a failed bearing or load, can cause
stalling and locked-rotor current to be drawn by the motor,
resulting in overheating.
OVERVIEW
18
Solution: Under and overvoltage protection are features
found in higher-end motor protection relays. Voltage
protection can be used proactively to inhibit a start.
Undercurrent protection is loss-of-load protection and is
required by some codes as a safety measure. A water pump
that cavitates can be dangerous. The water typically provides
pump cooling. Without the cooling water, case temperature
can reach an extremely high value. If valves are opened under
these conditions and cold water is allowed to reach red-hot
metal parts, the resulting steam pressures can destroy the
pump and pose a serious personnel hazard.
Ground Faults
Ground faults are the most common fault and can lead to more
serious problems. Ground-fault protection, described elsewhere
in this text, is an important consideration in motor loads.
Solution: The motor protection relay should be able to
detect low-level ground-fault current when used on a
resistance-grounded system.
Solution: A multifunction motor protection relay has multiple
trip and alarm settings for current protection. Overcurrent
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
138
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Overview
Arc-Flash Protection
requirements and many additional functions can be met with
the use of a multifunction motor protection relay.
High-Resistance Winding Faults
Winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground failures inside the
motor are difficult to detect using the phase and ground-fault
CTs due to low magnitudes of current.
Article 430.32 (A)(4) requires the use of a protection device
having embedded temperature detectors that cause current
to the motor to be interrupted when the motor attains a
temperature rise greater than marked on the nameplate in an
ambient temperature of 40°C for motors larger than 1500 hp.
Solution: Differential protection in high-end motor protection
relays use multiple CTs to compare the current entering and
leaving the winding. If there is a difference in currents then
leakage is occurring. This sensitive protection is used on very
large or critical motors.
The NEC defines minimum requirements and is intended to
provide protection from fire. Protection relays can provide
many enhancements above simple fire protection.
Current and Voltage Imbalance, Phase Loss,
Phase Reverse
Communications
Network communications can be added to a motor protection
relay to allow remote metering of currents, voltages and
temperatures. Data logging is a useful feature for troubleshooting
and comparing event sequences with process stages. Analysis of
information can often show operational issues.
Older motor protection devices did not consider current
imbalance and today it is often overlooked. Imbalance
increases negative-sequence current which causes additional
rotor heating.
Phase loss is also referred to as single phasing. When a
phase loss occurs, negative-sequence current is equal to the
positive-sequence current and imbalance is 100%. In this
condition, one motor winding attempts to do the work of
three, inevitably leading to overheating.
Arc-Flash Protection
The Consequences
of Arc Flash
Phase reversal causes the negative-sequence current and
voltage to be greater than the positive-sequence current
and voltage. Voltage-based protection is advantageous to
prevent a start with incorrect sequence. In some applications
attempting to spin the motor backwards will result in damage
to the load. An example of this is certain impeller designs in
downhole pumps.
Arcing and arc flashes are uncontrolled, intense, luminous
discharges of electrical energy that occur when electric
current flows across what is normally an insulating medium.
The most common cause of arc faults is insulation failure.
These failures may be caused by defective or aging insulation
material, poor or incorrect maintenance, dust, moisture,
vermin, and human error (touching a test probe to the wrong
surface or a tool slipping and touching live conductors).
Solution: Modern motor protection relays use digital
signal analysis to measure true-sequence components.
These sequence components are used for thermal model
calculations and take the extra heating into consideration.
Voltage imbalance which drives current imbalance can be
used as a start inhibit. Sequence components are also used
for calculating imbalance, phase loss and phase reversal.
Arc-Flash events are dangerous, and potentially fatal, to
personnel. According to OSHA, industrial Arc-Flash events
cause about 80% of electrically-related accidents and fatalities
among qualified electrical workers. Even if personnel injuries
are avoided, Arc Flash can destroy equipment, resulting in
costly replacement and downtime.
Motor Jogging
Arc-Flash Safety Standards
NEMA-designed motors are rated for two starts from cold and
one start from hot per hour. Motor jogging refers to excessive
starts and can cause overheating. The motor may not get up to
full speed and the forced air cooling is not effective.
NFPA 70E, Handbook for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
outlines the practices and standards that companies should
follow to protect workers and equipment from Arc Flash
and other electrical hazards. It specifies practices designed
to make sure that an electrically safe work condition exists.
In Canada, CSA Z462, Workplace electrical safety, specifies
safe workplace practices. There are also various provincial
regulations pertaining to electrical safety.
Solution: Since the thermal model accurately tracks the
motor’s used thermal capacity at all times, including during
starts and between starts, the starts-per-hour feature may
not be required.
It is included for compatibility with protection relays that do
not have dynamic thermal-modeling capability.
Motor Protection and the NEC®
The NEC requires the motor to be protected by overload
devices against excessive heating due to overload and failure
to start (Article 430 Section III). Article 430, Section IV also
specifies the use of devices to protect against overcurrents
such as short circuits and grounds. Both of these NEC®
®
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
139
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
18
OVERVIEW
The NFPA 70E and the CSA Z462 hold both employers
and their employees responsible for creating a workplace
for electrical workers that is not just safe but puts in place
the best possible processes and procedures that are fully
understood, practiced and enforced for optimal results. Using
Arc-Flash relays is one way to protect the functional reliability
of the distribution board and at the same time comply with
the requirements of NFPA 70E and CSA Z462.
Overview
Arc-Flash Protection
Arc-Flash Mitigation
used. The breaker will typically take an additional 35-50 ms
to open, depending on the type of breaker and how well it is
maintained.
NFPA 70E goes into great detail on procedures to avoid electrical
shock and Arc-Flash events. Sometimes, though, it’s necessary
to work on live circuits. For these cases, NPFA 70E specifies
approach distances and use of personal protection equipment
(PPE).
The electronic output to turn on is a function of the type
of output relay used. Solid-state outputs (for example,
insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs)) are much faster
than electromechanical relays and can operate within 200
microseconds.
Current limiting fuses or current-limiting circuit breakers help
protect against arc flashes. They allow only a certain amount of
energy to pass before they open a circuit. Because an Arc Flash
can draw a fraction of bolted-fault current, circuit breakers cannot
be relied upon to distinguish between the arcing current and a
typical inrush current.
Trip Reliability
Reliable tripping is the most important characteristic of an ArcFlash relay, because this ensures mitigation of an arcing fault.
Two aspects of reliability should be considered: trip redundancy
and system-health monitoring.
High-resistance grounding (HRG) is another technique for
protecting against arc flashes. If a phase faults to ground, then
the resistance limits current to just a few amps; not enough
to cause downtime by tripping the overcurrent protection
device, and not enough to allow an Arc Flash. It is important to
remember that while resistance grounding prevents Arc Flash
from phase-to-ground shorts, it has no effect on phase-to-phase
shorts.
Redundant Tripping. Arc-Flash relays should offer a redundant
tripping feature, which means it has both primary and secondary
trip path logic. The primary path is controlled by the internal
microprocessor and its embedded software, and works by
activating the coil of the primary trip relay.
The redundant path typically uses a discrete solid-state device
that does not go through the microprocessor. Any failure in the
primary (microprocessor) path will cause the unit to automatically
switch to its redundant path, which activates a shunt-trip relay
without delay when a sensor input is above the light detection
threshold.
Another way to mitigate the dangers of arc flashing is by
redesigning the switchgear. Switchgear cabinets can be designed
to contain and channel energy away from personnel during an
Arc Flash.
Arc-Flash relays
An often overlooked advantage of a solid-state trip path
compared to a microprocessor-based circuit is the reaction time
when the relay is first powered up. Wiring mistakes, tools left
in hazardous locations, and the regular stresses of powering
up all contribute to the risk of an Arc Flash on power up. A
microprocessor can require 200 ms or more before it is able to
start scanning the optical sensors. However, a solid-state trip
path can detect an Arc and send a trip signal in as little as 2 ms.
In addition, there are fail- safe features that alert operators when,
for example, the microprocessor fails.
Arc-Flash relays are microprocessor-based devices that use
optical sensors to detect the onset of a flash. The sensors are
strategically placed in various cubicles or drawers inside the
switchboard.
Installing an Arc-Flash relay to rapidly detect developing arc
flashes greatly reduces the total clearing time and the amount
of energy released through an arcing fault. In turn, there is less
damage to equipment and fewer and less severe injuries to
nearby personnel.
Health monitoring. Health monitoring makes sure the system
is in good operating condition and should extend from the light
sensors to the output of the Arc-Flash relay trip circuitry. Health
monitoring starts on the sensors. A signal is sent from the relay
to the light sensors, where a test light is detected by the sensor
and sent back to the relay. In the case of a fiber-optic sensor,
this also verifies the entire length of the fiber is not pinched
or broken. On-sensor health indication is critical in preventing
maintenance work on equipment where protection is not
working. It also has the added benefit of providing rapid fault
location.
Arc-Flash Relay Selection Criteria
When selecting an Arc-Flash relay, there are six important criteria:
1. Reaction time
2. Trip reliability
3. Avoidance of nuisance tripping
4. Sensor design and installation
5. Ease of use
Reaction Time
OVERVIEW
18
Since light is the earliest detectable indication that an Arc Flash is
occurring, Arc-Flash relays use optical light sensors to detect the
arc that is forming. The output of the light sensor is hard-wired to
the Arc-Flash relay, which trips a circuit that interrupts the energy
supply in the Arc.
Following the path of a trip signal from the sensor, internal
monitoring must also include the primary and redundant trip
circuit. Low voltage across the IGBT indicates a wiring fault or
an error in the trip coil, and a high voltage is a sign of an error in
the IGBT switch, both of which are also reported and logged.
The IGBT is also thermally protected against overloads, and will
turn off if it overheats. However, the thermal protection has a
100 ms delay before acting, meaning that even a dangerously
overheated coil will attempt to signal a trip before resuming
thermal protection.
The response time of an Arc-Flash relay is approximately
1-5 ms at light intensities of about 10,000 lux or higher. Within
that timeframe, the optical sensor output can actuate a switch
or circuit breaker to cut off current feeding the arc. The overall
current clearing time depends on the protection strategy used
and the performance of the external switch or circuit breaker
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
140
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Overview
CT Application
Avoidance of Nuisance Tripping
III. CT Application
A typical Arc-Flash Relay system has an integrated three-phase
current measurement function that detects and reacts to
short circuit and overcurrent conditions. Although this is not a
requirement for the system to operate, this option will increase
the reliability of the system (minimize unwanted tripping).
Current Transformers (CTs)
A current transformer is defined as a transformer that
produces a current in its secondary circuit that is in
proportion to current in its primary circuit.
If the microprocessor logic receives an input from a light sensor,
it checks for a rapidly rising input from the current transformers.
Two conditions need to be fulfilled before the trip is sent to the
circuit breaker: a certain current flow that exceeds the normal
operating current of the system (the threshold level is adjustable
from 10-1000% of the full load current) and a signal from the
arc-flash sensor, implying that the sensor has reacted to a highintensity light source.
Although there are other types of CTs, only the window (or
ring) type will be discussed here. Window-type CTs get their
name from their design that consists of a ring-shaped core.
This core is formed by a single length of strip ferromagnetic
material tightly wound to form the ring-shaped core.
Sensor Design and Installation
Arc-Flash relay installations utilize multiple fixed-point light sensors
near vertical and horizontal bus bars where arcing faults are apt to
occur in feeder switchgear
cabinets. Sufficient
A
numbers of sensors should B
be installed to cover all
C
accessible areas, even if
policy is to only work on
de- energized systems. At
least one sensor should
PGR-8800
have visibility to an arc fault
(Arc-Flash Protection Relay)
L1
if a person blocks another
L2
sensor’s field of view.
Light sensors may also be
installed in other electrical
cabinets and on panels that
are subject to routine maintenance and repairs.
5 A SECONDARY PHASE CT’s
CTs
(Recommended)
PGA LS10
(Point Sensor)
A CT operates on a principle of flux balance, as shown
in Figure 1. If the primary winding is energized with the
secondary circuit open-circuited, the transformer becomes
an iron-cored inductor. The primary current generates a
magnetic flux in the core as shown (flux direction can be
determined by the right-hand rule). When the secondary
winding is connected to a burden or is short circuited, current
flows through the secondary winding creating magnetic flux
in the core in opposition to the magnetizing flux created by
the primary current. If losses are ignored, the secondary flux
balances exactly to the primary flux. This phenomenon is
known as Lenz’s Law.
PGA LS20
(Fiber Optic Sensor)
T1
PRIMARY FLUX
T2
SECONDARY FLUX
24 Vdc Battery
Backup
Optional)
A fiber-optic sensor, which have a 360° field of view for detecting
light, allows more flexible positioning of the light sensing
locations, as the fiber-optic strands can be looped throughout an
enclosure or panel to cover challenging component layouts.
SECONDARY
WINDING
PRIMARY
WINDING
Easy to Use Hardware and Software
FIGURE 1
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
141
Lead Length
The secondary lead resistance of CTs cannot be ignored,
particularly with low Volt-Amperes (VA) CTs. For example,
let’s look at an electronic overload relay.
The relay’s CT input impedance or burden (Z­B) = 0.01 Ω
The maximum current (I) = 10 A
The CT rating (P) = 5 VA
Now let’s solve for the maximum length of #14 AWG leads
that will result in a rated accuracy for a 10 A secondary
current. Solving for maximum total impedance (ZT):
P = I²ZT
18
OVERVIEW
Another important factor to consider is ease of use. Some relays
may require field assembly, calibration, or advanced configuration
before installing. It is critical to consider those extra steps and the
capabilities of the operators who will be using the devices. Often,
very complicated devices can be misused because of incorrect
setup or configuration, which
can defeat the purpose of the
device altogether. A few ArcFlash Relays have software
that provides event
logging. To make
troubleshooting
easier, this
software should
record the specific
Examples of Arc-Flash
sensor that
Relay light sensor
initiated the fault in
installation in switchgear.
the data records.
ZT = P / I² = 5 / 10² = 0.05 Ω
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Overview
Converting to a Resistance-Grounded System
IV. RESISTANCE-GROUNDING CONVERSION
Solving for the maximum lead resistance (Z W):
Z T= Z W +Z B
Z W= 0.05-0.01 = 0.04 Ω
If we look up the #14 AWG resistance we find it equals
2.6 ohms/1000 ft
Therefore, lead length = Z W / #14 AWG resistance
Maximum lead length = (0.04 x 1000) / 2.6 = 15.4 ft
Convert Ungrounded to Resistance-Grounded
Systems
Resistance grounding protects a system against transient
overvoltages caused by intermittent ground faults and
it provides a method to locate ground faults. (Transient
overvoltages and inability to locate ground faults are the most
common safety issues with ungrounded systems.)
CT Installation
Conversion of delta-connected or wye-connected sources
with inaccessible neutrals require a zigzag transformer to
derive an accessible neutral for connection to a neutral
grounding resistor (NGR). The neutral is only used for the
NGR and not for distribution. During normal operation
the only current that flows in the zigzag transformer is an
extremely small magnetizing current. When one phase is
grounded, the NGR and the zigzag transformer provide a path
for ground-fault current to flow.
A CT should not be operated with its secondary opencircuited. If the secondary is opened when primary current is
flowing, the secondary current will attempt to continue to flow
so as to maintain the flux balance. As the secondary circuit
impedance increases from a low value to a high value the
voltage across the secondary winding will rise to the voltage
required to maintain current flow. If the secondary voltage
reaches the breakdown voltage of the secondary winding, the
insulation will fail and the CT will be damaged. Furthermore,
this situation presents a personnel shock hazard.
Figure 1
When a ring-type CT is used to monitor a single conductor or
multiple conductors, the conductors should be centered in
the CT window, as shown below in Figure 2, and should be
perpendicular to the CT opening.
In some applications it is difficult or impossible to install the
primary conductor through the CT window (example: existing
bus bar structure). For these applications a split core CT is
sometimes used. Performance of split core CTs may be less
than that of solid core CTs.
A
A
B
C
B
B
SPACER
C
Design Note 1: A zigzag conversion requires a three-phase
connection to the existing power system, typically at the
main transformer or switchgear. See Figure 1.
A
C
Incorrect
Design Note 2: The resistor let-through current must be
greater than the system capacitive charging current
(see Section I).
Correct
FIGURE 2
OVERVIEW
18
Design Note 3: Protection, coordination, and annunciation
systems depend on the integrity of the NGR. NGR monitoring
with an SE-330 or SE-325 is recommended.
CT characteristics are normally specified at a single frequency
such as 50 or 60 Hz. Therefore the question arises: What
happens when CTs are used with variable frequency
drives (VFDs)? For CTs that are linear to approximately
10x rated primary current at 60 Hz, the Volts/Hertz ratio
is approximately constant. That is, for all other conditions
held the same at 6 Hz, the CT will be linear to only 1x rated
current and at 30 Hz the CT will be linear to 5x rated current.
For a standard silicon-steel-core CT, the upper bandwidth
frequency is approximately 5 kHz.
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
142
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Overview
Ungrounded, Solidly Grounded and Resistance-Grounded Systems
UNGROUNDED SYSTEM
Advantages
Disadvantages
• Operation possible with one faulted phase
• Ground faults are difficult to locate
• Transient overvoltages damage equipment
PHASE C
PHASE A
PHASE B
DISTRIBUTED
SYSTEM
CAPACITANCE
SOLIDLY GROUNDED SYSTEM
Advantages
Disadvantages
• Eliminates transient overvoltages
• Selective tripping possible
• Costly point-of-fault damage
• Cannot operate with a ground fault
• Ground-fault Arc-Flash hazard
• Increased Arc-Flash risk
PHASE C
NEUTRAL
PHASE A
PHASE B
GROUND
RESISTANCE-GROUNDED SYSTEM
Advantages
Disadvantages
• Reduced point-of-fault damage and Arc-Flash risk
• Eliminates transient overvoltages
• Simplifies ground-fault location
• Continuous operation with a ground fault
• Selective tripping possible
• No ground-fault Arc-Flash hazard
• Failure of the neutral-grounding resistor renders currentsensing ground-fault protection inoperative
PHASE C
NEUTRAL
PHASE A
18
OVERVIEW
PHASE B
GROUND
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
143
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Overview
Generator Control
V. GENERATOR CONTROL
Convert Solidly Grounded to
Resistance-Grounded Systems
Synchronizing
Resistance grounding protects a system against Arc-Flash
Hazards caused by ground faults and provides a method for
continuous operation or an orderly shutdown procedure.
(Ground faults are estimated to be 98% of all electrical faults.)
To connect a synchronous alternator to a live bus bar in an AC
system, the following conditions have to be satisfied:
Voltage difference of incoming generator and bus bar must
be within acceptable limits
Frequency difference of generator and bus bar must be
within acceptable limits
There must be phase accordance between generator and
the bus bar
Phase sequence must be the same (Same phase rotation)
g
Since the neutral point of the power source is available, the
solid connection between neutral and ground is replaced with
a grounding resistor. This resistor limits ground fault current to
a pre-determined value, typically 5 A for 480 V systems (the
system capacitive charging current is usually less than 3 A).
By limiting the ground-fault current to 5 A or less, there are no
Arc-Flash Hazards associated with ground faults. This allows for
continuous operation during the first ground fault.
g
g
g
Voltage Adjustment
The voltage of the generator is controlled by the AVR
(Automatic Voltage Regulator) of the alternator. This device
compares the alternator voltage with a set point and adjusts
the voltage accordingly. The AVR controls the alternator
voltage by controlling the excitation of the alternator.
During a ground fault on a resistance-grounded (RG) system,
a voltage shift occurs (the same shift experienced on
ungrounded systems). The faulted phase collapses to ~0 V,
the non-faulted phases rise to line-to-line voltage with respect
to ground, and the neutral point rises to line-to-neutral voltage
with respect to ground.
Some synchronizing systems allow voltage matching. A
synchronizer with voltage matching gives a remote voltage
set point to the AVR. The advantage of this is that such a
system can synchronize to a bus bar that runs with a slightly
different voltage than adjusted on the AVR.
Frequency Adjustment
The frequency of the generator is controlled through the
speed of the prime mover (e.g. a diesel engine or a turbine).
The speed of the engine is controlled by a governor (speed
regulator). The governor compares the engine speed with its
speed set point and adjusts accordingly. On a diesel engine
this is done through control of the fuel supply.
In order to match the generator frequency according to the
bus frequency, the synchronizer gives a remote speed set
point to the governor.
Figure 2
Design Note 1: An NGR conversion for a solidly grounded
system requires a neutral connection to the existing power
system, typically at the main transformer or switchgear. See
Figure 2.
Phase Accordance
As the voltages of the synchronous alternator are sinus
shaped, it is not enough just to meet speed and voltage.
There must be phase accordance as well (phase
deviation = 0˚).
Design Note 2: The voltage shift requires equipment to be
fully rated at line-to-line voltage with respect to ground. This may
require TVSSs, VFDs, meters, etc. to be reconfigured or replaced.
Design Note 3: The voltage shift also restricts neutral
OVERVIEW
18
distribution. The neutral typically cannot be distributed due to its
potential rise during ground faults. Single-phase line-to-neutralvoltage loads must be served by a 1:1 isolation transformer or
converted to line-to-line loads.
U Generator
U Bus bar
Design Note 4: The resistor let-through current must be greater
than the system capacitive charging current (see Section I).
Design Note 5: Protection, coordination, and annunciation
systems depend on the integrity of the NGR. Monitoring with
an SE-330 or SE-325 NGR Monitor is recommended.
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Phase Deviation
144
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Overview
Engine Control
When these conditions are met, the breaker is closed. When
doing static synchronizing, there is no guarantee that the
incoming generator takes load immediately. Typically this type
of synchronization is used with electronic governors or ECUs,
as they react quickly.
Phase Rotation
Last but not least, the phase rotation between incoming
generator and bus bar must be the same. This is simply a
question of correct wiring.
If the us bar phase order is L1, L2, L3, it should be the same
on the generator.
Dynamic Synchronization
In case of dynamic synchronization, the incoming generator
is connected at a slightly higher speed than the bus bar
frequency. The purpose of this is to make sure the generator
takes load immediately.
There are two different synchronization schemes—static
synchronization and dynamic synchronization.
Static Synchronization
Under static synchronization, the prime mover is adjusted so
that the difference between generator and bus bar is within a
pre-adjusted window, typically max. 0.2 Hz to 1 Hz frequency
deviation and max. +/-5˚ to +/-15˚ phase deviation.
The speed of the engine is adjusted slightly higher than the
bus bar frequency, and as soon as frequency, phase deviation
and voltage are within the permitted range, the breaker is
closed.
Load Sharing
Under dynamic synchronization, it is necessary to observe
the circuit breaker make time (the time the breaker needs
from receipt of close command until the contacts are
closed). This is typically between 50 ms to 300 ms. The close
command is then issued earlier (C/B make time) than phase
accordance.
Load sharing typically refers to active load [kW] load sharing
unless specified otherwise.
The purpose of load sharing is to make sure that in a
generator parallel application, all generators run with the
same rating (percentage of their nominal power).
Load sharing between generators is done by controlling
the speed of the prime mover through the governor. Each
generator gets a load sharer. The load sharer measures
voltage (directly or through measurement transformers) and
current (through C/Ts) and calculates the power or active
current of the generator. It compares the power output of its
generator with the power output of the other generators. To
do this, it gets a load signal from the other generators either
as an analog signal (parallel lines) or through a bus. In case
the load of the generator is lower than the load of the other
generators, the load sharer gives a speed increase
command and vice versa.
VI. Engine CONTROL
Engine Controllers
Engine Controllers are used for automatic start, stop and
monitoring of internal combustion engines. They offer
possibilities for local and remote start and stop.
The start procedure is controlled with regard to crank times,
number of start attempts and detection of ignition speed.
After startup of the engine, the device will monitor the
engine with regards to alarms and shut downs. Alarms are
indication only, while shut downs will stop the engine.
It is important to note that while running in parallel, the speed
(frequency) of all connected generators is identical. The active
load [kW] difference between parallel running generators
cannot be seen by their speed, but by the torque on the
shaft. In order to keep the frequency constant, it is therefore
necessary to decrease fuel supply on the engine that is to
reduce load, while the other increases the fuel supply in
order to accept more load. This is the job of the load sharers.
Typical alarms are low oil pressure, high cooling water
temperature or low cooling water level. Typical shut downs
are emergency stop or overspeed (engine turning with too
high rpm).
18
OVERVIEW
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
145
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Overview
Engine Diagnostics
The decision whether an event is to be handled as an alarm
or a shut-down depends on the application and the applicable
standards and rules. The alarms and shutdowns are
monitored through a number of input signals. These can be
digital inputs, analog inputs or a bus protocol (typically CAN
J1939). Stop procedure is controlled with regard to
stop times.
Pressure Over Time
All variants of the EngineEye system, including the Basic
variant, are able to record the cylinder pressure over time
(p/t – Indicator diagram).
From the pressure curve (Indicator diagram), the operator is
able to determine key values like the compression, combustion
and maximum pressure for the work cycles that were
analyzed. These values together with the general shape of the
curve, aids determining the overall condition of the engine.
START & STOP
I
CRANK
OPERA O
2
2
S AR FAI
3
OVER PEED
M
3
A
MAGNETIC
PICK UP
(speed detect
OW OI PRESSURE
5
FUEL
VALVE
5
HIGH WA ER E P
6
6
8
8
MIP measurement
(pressure + TDC or crank angle sensor)
9
9
0
0
STOP
SOLENOID
The figure below shows the presentation of a single cylinder
p/t measurement as it appears in the PC analysis software.
T RT
T P
T
R
T
T
P WER
N
CO
RO
ER
SHUTDOWN
ALARMS
When the EngineEye system is installed with a TDC or Crank
angle sensor (CAS) it is able to deduct the piston position and
present p/V diagrams, also known as the power card diagram.
With this information the system is able to calculate the mean
indicated pressure (MIP) and the power delivered by the
individual cylinders.
Shut-Down Units
Shut-Down Units are used as safety backup in marine engine
applications. The marine classification societies demand the
safety system to be independent from the control system
(Engine Controller). The shut-down unit will monitor the
engine, and in case of an abnormal condition, shut down
the engine. Shut-downs are monitored through a number of
digital shut-down inputs.
PRESSURE VS ANGLE
120
VII. Engine Diagnostics
60
40
20
360
Angle (˚)
460
560
660
Ignition
The TDC sensor is a low resolution crank angle system with
just one pulse over one revolution of the crank shaft indicating
TDC of cylinder 1.
For a diagram of EnginEye System Components, see page 99.
The CAS system, on the other hand, is a high resolution
system with a much higher number of pulses per revolution.
The Actual number depends on the circumference of the CAS
belt. The point where the belt is assembled is adjusted such
that it marks TDC of cylinder 1. The higher angle resolution
results in higher precision calculations.
Measurements
Analysis of the Measurements­—PC Software
The measurements taken with the EngineEye system, fall into
two categories; recorded measurements and live data.
The handheld device is connected to the computer via USB,
and the measurements are copied to the PC software.
The PC software will calculate the cylinder power for each
cylinder and show a comparison of the cylinder pressures for
cylinder balancing.
Comparing new measurements against historic data makes it
possible to detect early signs of wear and plan maintenance.
OVERVIEW
80
0
When both pressure readings and crank angle information
is available (EngineEye Advanced and Professional variants)
further parameters indicative of the engine performance can
be deducted.
18
100
Pressure at Top Dead
Center (pcompression)
Pressure (bar)
Maintenance programs for larger internal combustion
engines include periodically monitoring the combustion
process. This is done by taking pressure readings (Indicator
diagrams—Pressure over time) on the individual cylinders
and analyzing them. Analyzing the pressure readings alone
may give the engineer a good indication of whether the
cylinder is performing as expected or not. And if not, it may
point the engineer towards what the problem might be.
Maximum Cylinder
Pressure (pmax)
Measurement: MS Good hope >>Main Engine>>2011.04.27T11:30:00
The recorded measurements are kept on the handheld for
safe keeping—Even when copied into the PC software. The
Pressure over time and MIP measurements are examples of
recorded data.
Condition Monitoring
The data provided by the EngineEye can be used for condition
monitoring of the engine. Worn off piston rings or problems
with the fuel injection can be found at an early stage. Thus the
owner can take preventive action and service the engine at a
The live data is not stored, but shown live on the display and
include cylinder balancing and misfiring.
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
146
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Overview
Alarm Monitoring
time of his choice,
before wear and tear
becomes a problem
for the reliability of
the engine.
also called fail safe principle, as a disconnection of the input
generates an alarm.
Analog Sensors
Analog sensors do not only give condition information to
the alarm monitor like above digital sensors, but they send
measurements to the alarm monitor. The alarm level is defined in
the alarm monitor.
Engine Balancing
The data provided by
the EngineEye can be
Cylinder misfire on the handheld display.
used for improving
engine efficiency. This
is done by so called
“Engine Balancing”,
where the timing
of the fuel injection
on each cylinder is
adjusted.
A wide range of signals exist, such as thermocouples, RTDs ,
pressure transducers, voltage or current signals. In many cases
an intermediate transmitter converts the measurement into
some standardized signal like 4-20 mA.
Sensor Monitoring
Sensor monitoring is used in order to make sure that the sensor
stays connected to the alarm monitor and is healthy.
Balancing the engine
makes it run more
smoothly whereby
Balancing feature on the handheld display.
the power that was
previously lost due to imbalance is instead used for propulsion.
Below is an example of a “Cylinder parade” produced by the
EngineEye PC software­—it is basically the pressure reading of
each cylinder put in a queue for comparison.
Digital Sensors
With digital sensors this is usually being done by parallel (NO
sensor) or serial (NC sensor) resistors. In these applications a
small current is flowing from the alarm monitor through the
resistor and sensor to sensor reference. In case the sensor gets
disconnected, the current is interrupted and the alarm monitor
issues a sensor fail alarm. The resistors must be mounted as
close to the sensor contacts as possible.
For engine balancing the engine is adjusted according
the measurements. After that the cylinder pressures are
measured again and compared with each other. Adjustment
and measurement are repeated until the result is satisfactory.
Analog Sensors
When using a 4-20 mA signal, the sensor is monitored through
the current signal. In case the current is lower than 4 mA, a
sensor fault alarm will be issued. No external resistors are
necessary for this.
VII. alarm monitoring
Alarm monitors are used in many applications where input
signals from digital or analog sensors have to be monitored.
Applications could be level alarm systems, engine monitoring,
pump control and many others.
M1000
+
Cable
R1
When designing an alarm system the first question is always
what kind of sensors are to be used.
Input
NO
R2
Digital Sensors
Digital sensors are basically on/ off switches (e.g. a level switch).
The alarm level is not defined in the alarm monitor, but in the
alarm sensor.
M1000
+
R1
Normally Open sensor (NO, Form A):
Input
Normally-open contacts connect the circuit when activated;
the circuit is disconnected when the contact is inactive.
The input of the alarm monitor is considered active when
the sensor connects the circuit.
NC
R2
Alarm Monitors/Indicator Panels
Normally-closed contacts disconnect the circuit when
activated; the circuit is connected when the contact is
inactive. The input of the alarm monitor is considered
active when the sensor disconnects the circuit. This is
Indicator panels are used for remote indication of alarms. They
can be used as slave panels for the alarm monitors. In most
cases they only display the input conditions on their front LEDs.
147
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
18
OVERVIEW
Alarm monitors are used in the process. The sensors are directly
connected to the alarm monitor. The alarm monitor generates
the alarm or the control functions. Alarms must in most cases be
manually acknowledged.
Normally closed sensor (NC, Form B):
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Cable
Wiring Diagrams
Ground-Fault Protection
Ground-Fault Protection
SE-601
POWR-GARD®
GROUND REFERENCE
MODULE
DC Ground-Fault Protection
ANALOG %
CURRENT METER
SE-GRM SERIES
PGA-0500
(required)
+
Ungrounded
DC System
(optional)
RESET
S
4
5
6
7
8
+
ANALOG
OUTPUT
DC GROUND-FAULT MONITOR
SE-601 SERIES
GF
9
PGR-3100 & PGR-3200
10
11
13
14
GF
15
16
CONTROL POWER
Ungrounded Ground-Fault Detection
A
B
C
A
B
C
PHASE
CONDUCTOR
(<1300 V)
CONTROL
POWER
2
5
6
10
11
12
13 14 15
N 240 VDC
10 kΩ
ALARM
RELAY
50 kΩ
WARNING
RELAY
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM
GROUND FAULT INDICATION SYSTEM
PGR-3200 SERIES
PGR-3100 SERIES
ANALOG
OUTPUT
+
18 19
WARNING
RESET
OVERVIEW
18
21
22
ALARM
RESET
25 26 27 28 29
30
ANALOG
OHM METER
HIGH-TENSION
COUPLER
PGA-0510
(optional)
PGH FAMILY
(required >1300 V)
PHASE
CONDUCTOR
(>1300 V)
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
148
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Wiring Diagrams
Ground-Fault Protection
Ground-Fault Protection
SE-701
SE-502
AC Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-Fault Ground-Continuity Detection
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER/
NEUTRAL
GENERATOR
CONDUCTOR
120/208 V
CONTROL
POWER
1
2
16
17
PGA-0500
(required)
20
8
ANALOG %
CURRENT METER
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
(optional)
28
RESET
TRIP
GF
GC
GROUND-FAULT
GROUND-CONTINUITY DETECTOR
1
SE-502
2
3
4
5
6
7
GROUND-FAULT
CT
8
+
ANALOG
OUTPUT
GROUND-FAULT RELAY
SE-701 SERIES
12
10
13
REMOTE
RESET
5
6
GF
TRIP
ALTERNATE
GROUND-SENSING
LEAD
9
10
11
12
13
GF
TRIP
14
15
16
CONTROL POWER
SE-704
LINE 1
AC Ground-Fault Detection
OPTIONAL
NETWORK
COMM
14 L1
AC/DC SENSITIVE
EARTH-LEAKAGE RELAY
ANALOG %
CURRENT METER
GROUND-FAULT CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
SE-CS30 SERIES
EL731
PGA-0500
(required)
(optional)
K1
2
3
4
5
6
FAULT
18
CT WIRING
8
+
11 S21
13
14
NC 17
TC 5
TC
RTD/PTC TB 4
TB
7 S12
GF
TRIP
TA 3
TA
15
CONTROL POWER
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
16
DC-90 HZ CT
13 RST
TC
RTD
t˚
+t˚
TB
TA
ANALOG
OUT
AB 2
+–
TERMINATION
AA 1
12 GND
149
18
SUPPLY
6 SH
REMOTE
RESET
PTC
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
OVERVIEW
12
20-15000 HZ CT
9 SH2
8 S11
11
26
10 S22
SE-704 SERIES
10
24
25
GROUND-FAULT RELAY
9
23
K3
ANALOG
OUTPUT
GF
TRIP
21
22
7
16
20
K2
1
AC & DC GroundFault Detection
L2/N 15
GND
19
RESET
EL731
LINE 2/N
Wiring Diagrams
Trailing Cable Protection
trailing cable Protection
SE-105 & SE-107, SE-134C & SE-135, and SE-145
Ground-Fault Ground-Check Montoring
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
GROUND-FAULT
GROUND-CHECK
MONITOR
CONTROL
POWER
CT200
(required)
CONTROL
POWER
CT1
A
CT2
B
L1
L2
1
SE-134C, SE-135
RESET
GC TEST
FAILSAFE
2
SE-105, SE-107
GROUND-CHECK
CABLE
6
13
14
LATCH
GC
15
4
5
11
12
3
GROUND-FAULT GROUND-CHECK MONITOR
9
10
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
16
SE-CS10
17
CT
VERIFICATION 18
(required)
19
+
SW CI
GROUND
FAULT
GROUND-CHECK
TERMINATION
GI
GC
-or-
RK-102, RK-105
-or- RK-105I
(optional)
22
SE-TA12A Series
GROUND-CHECK CABLE
REMOTE KIT
21
SE-TA6A Series
G
TRIP B
(required)
GROUND-CHECK
TERMINATION
20
23
24
1N5339B,
SE-TA6 -orSE-TA6-SM
(required)
TRIP A
7
8
25
26
GROUND
CHECK
27
28
CONTROL
POWER
1
57
2
56
CABLE A
CURRENT SENSOR
SE-CS10 or
SE-CS40
3
REMOTE
RESET
GROUND-CHECK
TERMINATION
SE-TA12A
(required)
CABLE A
GROUNDCHECK
5
GROUND-FAULT
GROUND-CHECK
MONITOR
6
SE-145 SERIES
4
55
54
SE-TA12A
(required)
53
CABLE B
GROUNDCHECK
SE-CS40
7
52
GROUND-CHECK
TERMINATION
CABLE B
CURRENT SENSOR
SE-CS10 or
CABLE C
CURRENT SENSOR
SE-CS10 or
SE-CS40
10
41
11
GC
A
Trailing Cable and
Coupler Illustration
42
40
GROUND-CHECK
TERMINATION
SE-TA12A
(required)
CABLE C
GROUNDCHECK
Ground Conductor
38
14
GC
B
15
39
37
35
GC
C
8
36
34
9
18
12
13
COMMUNICATIONS MODULE
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP C
TRIP A
22
32
TRIP B
ETHERNET
TRIP C
Ground-Check Conductor
OVERVIEW
16
17
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
18
19
20
21
23
33
28
29
25
26
150
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Wiring Diagrams
Resistance-Grounding
resistance grounding
SE-325
Neutral-GroundingResistor Monitoring
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CT200
(Required)
CONTROL
POWER
CT1
A
CT2
B
L1
L2
NEUTRAL-GROUNDING-RESISTOR MONITOR
SE-325
SW
GI
+
RI
SW
GI
+
RI
R
G
R
SENSING RESISTOR
REMOTE INDICATION
AND RESET ASSEMBLY
ER SERIES
(Required)
(Optional)
RK-302, RK-325 -or- RK-325I
G
N
POWER SYSTEM
NEUTRAL (X0)
SE-330, SE-330Hv
Neutral-GroundingResistor Monitoring
CONTROL
POWER
UNIT
HEALTHY
1
2
RESET
3
POWER SYSTEM
NEUTRAL (X0)
15
NEUTRAL-GROUNDINGRESISTOR MONITOR
SE-330 SERIES
SENSING RESISTOR
ER SERIES
R
6
R
7
G
16
17
+24 Vdc 18
ANALOG
OUTPUT
4-20 mA
(required)
N
12
13
PULSE
ENABLE
+ 19
20
0 V 21
G
TRIP OR
PULSING
22
23
18
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
EFCT FAMILY
EFCT
9
1A
10
5A
11
COMMON
GROUND
FAULT
25
26
OVERVIEW
(required)
24
8
27
RESISTOR
FAULT
28
29
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
151
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Wiring Diagrams
Motor and Pump Protection
MOtor and pump Protection
PHASE
CONDUCTOR
(<1,300V)
PGR-6100
Ground-Fault
Protection
and Insulation
Montoring
CONTROL POWER
2
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
INSULATION
RESISTANCE
14
15
GROUND
FAULT
MOTOR GROUND-FAULT & INSULATION RELAY
PGR-6100 SERIES
ANALOG OUTPUTS
0-1 0-1
mA mA
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
RESET ACTIVE
RESET ACTIVE
GROUND
FAULT
INSULATION
RESISTANCE
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
SE-CS30 SERIES
24
25
26
27
29
30
MODE OF
OPERATION
ANALOG %
CURRENT METER
ANALOG
OHM METER
PGA-0500
PGA-0510
(optional)
28
(optional)
HIGH-TENSION
COUPLER
PGH SERIES
(required >1300 V)
(required)
PHASE
CONDUCTOR
(>1,300V)
PGR-6130 & pgr-6150
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
PGC-6000 SERIES
Motor Protection
(optional)
3 PHASE CTs
BUILT INTO RELAY.
EXTERNAL CTs
CONTROL
REQUIRED FOR
POWER
FLA >25 A.
3 PHASE CTs BUILT INTO RELAY
TEMPERATURE
INPUT
+
3
L1 L2/N
DIGITAL
INPUTS
ELECTRONIC OVERLOAD RELAY
PGR-6130 SERIES
4
5
6
GF
CT
7
8
PTC
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
PGR-6150 SERIES
PTC
L1 L2/N
8
OVERVIEW
18
7
6
5
4
3
+
K1
12
FEEDER
TO MOTOR
TEMPERATURE
INPUT
CONTROL
POWER
FEEDER TO MOTOR
REMOTE INDICATION AND RESET ASSEMBLY
PGB-6130
14
RS-485
K2
11
22
24
21
–
+
10
9
OPERATOR INTERFACE
PGR-6150-OPI
(optional)
(optional)
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
152
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Wiring Diagrams
Motor and Pump Protection
MOtor and pump Protection
MPU-32 & MPS
Motor Protection
MPS-OPI
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
(recommended)
PHASE CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
(required)
(recommended)
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
PHASE CURRENT
TRANFORMERS
MPS-RTD
INPUT MODULE
(optional)
MPU-CIM
MPS-RTD
RTD MODULE
(optional)
(required)
(required)
MPS-DIF
MPS-DIF
CURRENT INPUT MODULE
DIFFERENTIAL
MODULE
DIFFERENTIAL
MODULE
(optional)
PHASE
VOLTAGES
(optional)
TEMPERATURE INPUT
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
CIM
21
26
22
23
+
27
24
33
31
22
30
29
27
26
23
DIG IN
20
......
17
60
56
53
+
I/0 MODULE
4-20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
25
22
I/0 MODULE
52
4-20 mA
ANALOG
INPUT
MPS-CTU
CONTROL UNIT
MOTOR PROTECTION UNIT
MPU-32
RELAY 3
RELAY 2
RELAY
OUTPUTS
12
11
ANALOG
OUTPUT
4-20 mA
RELAY 1
9
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
5
......
16
RS-485
35
......
+
37
39
40
DIGITAL
INPUTS
43
......
51
CONTROL
POWER
CONTROL
POWER
Motor Differential Protection
4
1
1
4
MOTOR
2
5
MOTOR
2
5
3
6
3
6
MPS-DIF
MPU-32
MPU-32
MPS-DIF
MPS
MPS
(Differential
Current Module)
-or-
-or-
SUMMATION CONNECTION
CORE-BALANCE CONNECTION
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
153
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
18
OVERVIEW
(Differential
Current Module)
Wiring Diagrams
Pump and Feeder Protection
MOtor and pump Protection
PGR-6800
3 PHASE CTs BUILT INTO RELAY, MOTOR FEEDER IS ROUTED THROUGH RELAY
Pump Protection
PGR-6800 SERIES
PUMP PROTECTION RELAY
L1 L2/N
6
5
4
+
3
–
CONTROL
POWER
FEEDER TO MOTOR
PGB-6800
REMOTE INDICATION AND RESET ASSEMBLY
(optional)
Feeder Protection
FPU-32 & FPS
Feeder Protection
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
PHASE CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS
OPERATOR INTERFACE
PHASE CURRENT
TRANFORMERS
(recommended)
(required)
FPS-OPI
GROUND-FAULT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
(required)
(recommended)
(recommended)
RTD MODULE
CURRENT INPUT MODULE
MPU-CIM
TEMPERATURE
INPUT MODULE
SIO RTD
(required)
MPS-RTD
PHASE
VOLTAGES
(optional)
(optional)
TEMPERATURE
INPUT
13
14
15
16
17
18
33
19
CIM
21
26
22
23
+
24
27
22
30
29
27
DIG IN
23
22
20
......
17
60
56
53
+
I/0 MODULE
31
......
I/0 MODULE
52
4-20 mA
ANALOG
INPUT
CONTROL UNIT
4-20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT
25
26
FPS-CTU
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY
OVERVIEW
18
FPU-32 SERIES
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY
OUTPUTS
RELAY 1
1
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
5
......
16
35
......
37
ANALOG
OUTPUT
4 20 mA
+
39
40
DIGITAL
INPUTS
43
......
51
1
CONTROL
POWER
CONTROL POWER
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
2
RS 485
154
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Wiring Diagrams
Arc-Flash and Generator & Single-Function Protection
arc-flash protection
ARC-FLASH RELAY
PGR-8800
PGR-8800
ARC-FLASH RELAY
PGR-8800
(optional)
37
38
+
31 ..................... 36
39 ............. 45
–
Arc-Flash
Protection
ARC-FLASH RELAY
PGR-8800
(optional)
(optional)
46 47 48
49
50 51 52
STATUS
LINK
53
54 55 56
STATUS
57
59
60
STATUS
DIGITAL INPUTS
CONTROL POWER
and BATTERY
ONLINE
SERVICE
TRIPPED
TRIP COIL
ARC-FLASH RELAY
PGR-8800 SERIES
1
........
4
5
........
8
9
........
12
13
16
........
17
20
........
21
24
........
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS10
PGA-LS20
PGA-LS20
PGA-LS20
PGA-LS20
PGA-LS20
PGA-LS20
OPTICAL
SENSOR
OPTICAL
SENSOR
OPTICAL
SENSOR
OPTICAL
SENSOR
OPTICAL
SENSOR
OPTICAL
SENSOR
or
or
or
or
or
25
26
27
28
29
30
or
PHASE CT
PHASE CT
(recommended)
(recommended)
PHASE CT
(recommended)
00
generator & single-function Protection
PGR 4300
Generator
Ground-Fault Protection
CONTROL
POWER
1
POWER SYSTEM
(GENERATOR)
NEUTRAL
RESET
2
4
5
6
8
GENERATOR GROUND-FAULT RELAY
PGR-4300 SERIES
ANALOG
OUTPUT
0-1mA
+
9
GF RELAY
3P or 4P
10
11
12
14
15
16
18
OVERVIEW
ANALOG % CURRENT METER
PGA-0500
(optional)
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
155
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
Overview
NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTOR
IEEE DEVICE NUMBERS
1 - Master Element
2 - Time Delay Starting or
Closing Relay
3 - Checking or Interlocking Relay
4 - Master Contactor
5 - Stopping Device
6 - Starting Circuit Breaker
7 - Rate of Change Relay
8 - Control Power
Disconnecting Device
9 - Reversing Device
10 -Unit Sequence Switch
11 -Multi-function Device
12 -Overspeed Device
13 -Synchronous-speed Device
14 -Underspeed Device
15 -Speed - or Frequency,
Matching Device
16 -Data Communications Device
17 -Shunting or
Discharge Switch
18 -Accelerating or
Decelerating Device
19 -Starting to Running Transition
Contactor
20 -Electrically Operated Valve
21 -Distance Relay
22 -Equalizer Circuit Breaker
23 -Temperature Control Device
24 -Volts Per Hertz Relay
25 -Synchronizing or
Synchronism-Check Device
26 -Apparatus Thermal Device
27 -Undervoltage Relay
28 -Flame Detector
29 -Isolating Contactor or Switch
30 -Annunciator Relay
31 -Separate Excitation Device
32 -Directional Power Relay
33 -Position Switch
34 -Master Sequence Device
35 -Brush-Operating or Slip-Ring
Short-Circuiting Device
36 -Polarity or Polarizing
Voltage Devices
37 -Undercurrent or
Underpower Relay
38 -Bearing Protective Device
39 -Mechanical Condition
Monitor
40 -Field (over/under excitation)
Relay
41 -Field Circuit Breaker
42 -Running Circuit Breaker
43 -Manual Transfer or Selector
Device
44 -Unit Sequence Starting Relay
45 -Abnormal Atmospheric
Condition Monitor
46 -Reverse-phase or
Phase-Balance Current Relay
47 -Phase-Sequence or PhaseBalance Voltage Relay
48 -Incomplete Sequence Relay
49 -Machine or Transformer,
Thermal Relay
50 -Instantaneous Overcurrent
Relay
51 -AC Inverse Time Overcurrent
Relay
52 -AC Circuit Breaker
53 -Exciter or DC Generator Relay
54 -Turning Gear Engaging Device
55 -Power Factor Relay
56 -Field Application Relay
57 -Short-Circuiting or Grounding
(Earthing) Device
58 -Rectification Failure Relay
59 -Overvoltage Relay
60 -Voltage or Current
Balance Relay
61 -Density Switch or Sensor
62 -Time-Delay Stopping or
Opening Relay
63 -Pressure Switch
64 -Ground (Earth) Detector Relay
65 -Governor
66 -Notching or Jogging Device
67 -AC Directional Overcurrent
Relay
68 -Blocking or “Out-of-Step”
Relay
69 -Permissive Control Device
70 -Rheostat
71 -Liquid Level Switch
72 -DC Circuit Breaker
73 -Load-Resistor Contactor
74 -Alarm Relay
75 -Position Changing
Mechanism
76 -DC Overcurrent Relay
77 -Telemetering Device
78 -Phase-Angle
Measuring Relay
79 -AC Reclosing Relay
80 -Flow Switch
81 -Frequency Relay
82 -DC Reclosing Relay
83 -Automatic Selective Control
or Transfer Relay
84 -Operating Mechanism
85 -Communications, Carrier
or Pilot-Wire Relay
86 -Lockout Relay
87 -Differential Protective Relay
88 -Auxiliary Motor or Motor
Generator
89 -Line Switch
90 -Regulating Device
91 -Voltage Directional Relay
92 -Voltage and Power
Directional Relay
93 -Field Changing Contactor
94 -Tripping or Trip-Free Relay
ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS
AFD - Arc Flash Detector
CLK - Clock or Timing Source
DDR -Dynamic Disturbance
Recorder
DFR - Digital Fault Recorder
ENV - Environmental Data
HIZ -High Impedance
Fault Detector
HMI -Human Machine Interface
HST - Historian
LGC - Scheme Logic
MET - Substation Metering
PDC - Phasor Data Concentrator
PMU -Phasor Measurement Unit
PQM - Power Quality Monitor
RIO -Remote Input/Output
Device
RTU -Remote Terminal Unit/
Data Concentrator
SER -Sequence of Events
Recorder
TCM - Trip Circuit Monitor
SOTF -Switch On To Fault
TYPICAL SUFFIXES
OVERVIEW
18
A - Alarm/Auxiliary Power
AC - Alternating Current
B - Battery/Blower/Bus
BT - Bus Tie
C -Capacitor/Condenser/
Compensator/Carrier
Current/Case/Compressor
DC - Direct Current
E - Exciter
F -Feeder/Field/Filament/
Filter/Fan
G - Generator/Ground*
M - Motor/Metering
N - Network/Neutral*
P - Pump/Phase Comparison
R - Reactor/Rectifier/Room
S -Synchronizing/Secondary/
Stainer/Sump/Suction
(Valve)
T - Transformer/Thyratron
TH -Transformer
(High-voltage Side)
TL -Transformer
(Low-voltage Side)
TT -Transformer
(Tertiary-voltage Side)
U - Unit
Note: Descriptions per IEEE Std C37.2-1996
*Suffix N is preferred when the device is connected in the residual of a polyphase circuit, is
connected across broken delta, or is internally derived from the polyphase current or voltage
quantities. The suffix G is preferred where the measured quantity is in the path of ground or,
in the case of ground fault detectors, is the current flowing to ground.
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
SIZING CHART
System Voltage
(Line-to-line)
NGR Let-through Current
and Resistance
208 V
5 A / 24 Ohms
Continuous
480 V
5 A / 55 Ohms
Continuous
600 V
5 A / 69 Ohms
Continuous
2,400 V
5 A / 277 Ohms or 10 A / 139 Ohms
Continuous or 10 sec
4,160 V
5 A / 480 Ohms or 10 A / 240 Ohms
Continuous or 10 sec
13,800 V
10 A / 798 Ohms or 200 A / 40 Ohms
10 seconds
25,000 V
200 A / 72 Ohms or 400 A / 36 Ohms
10 seconds
34,500 V
200 A / 100 Ohms or 400 A / 50 Ohms
10 seconds
Note: The values shown are for any size transformer and are typical.
NOTE: The above table is for illustrative purposes only. Actual values may differ based on
a variety of individual system considerations, such as capacitive charging current and coordination study results.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
SIZING CHART
Conductor
Size
(AWG/kcmil)
12
10
8
6
4
3
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250
350
500
750
1000
Minimum CT Window Size (Inner Diameter in mm)
Number of Conductors
1
4
6
7
9
11
13
14
16
18
20
23
25
28
33
39
48
55
3
8
10
12
15
19
22
25
28
31
35
39
44
48
56
67
82
95
4
9
11
14
18
22
25
28
32
36
40
45
51
55
65
78
95
110
6
11
14
17
22
28
31
35
39
44
49
55
62
67
80
95
117
135
8
13
16
20
25
32
36
40
45
51
57
64
72
78
92
110
135
156
12
15
19
24
31
39
44
49
55
62
69
78
88
95
113
135
165
191
Installation Instructions:
When installing the PGC Family CTs, ensure the following:
1.Only the load carrying conductors pass through the center of the CT. This means L1 + N
for 1-phase and L1+ L2 + L3 for 3-phase.
2.The power conductors pass through the center of the CT and are preferably bound
together to keep the conductors uniformly spaced.
3.The power conductors pass perpendicular to the CT and, where practical, continue
perpendicular to the CT on both sides of the CT for 3”.
4.The power conductors should not be installed in a way that allows them to run along
the side edges of the CT.
5.Where practical, locate the CT away from noise-generating devices such as
transformers, frequency converters, etc.
MARINE
CERTIFICATIONS
Littelfuse Selco products are certified and in
accordance with all the significant international
standards. See page 158 for complete list of
Marine Certified Products.
ABS ABS Copenhagen Port
BV Bureau Veritas
CCSChina Classification Society
DNV Det Norske Veritas
GL Germanischer Lloyd
156
Time Rating
KRS
LRS
NKK
PRS
Korean Register of Shipping RINARoyal Institution of Naval
Architects
Lloyd’s Register of shipping
RMRSRussian Maritime Register
Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
of Shipping
Polski Rejestr Statków S. A.
RRR Russian River Register
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Protection Relays Quick Reference Guide
product
type
System*
WARRANTY
COMM
CONFORMAL
COATING
Benefits
PAGE #
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION
Trailing cable
PROTECTION
RESISTANCE
GROUNDING
157
MOTOR PROTECTION
=
Remembers trip status when power is cycled,
safely run with Ground Fault
Low-level broad-spectrum fault protection for drives on RG systems.
Fault current metering
5 years
=
Meets NEC® Article 250.21(B)
22
=
5 years
o
Meets NEC Article 250.21(B), provides 2 warnings
23
=
=
5 years
Class A GFCI level and time; Built-in HRG (<100 mA)
25
Main, feeder, or load protection, motors, generators, pumps, heating
cable, adjustable-speed drives
=
=
5 years
Wide setting range for any pickup level > 50 mA
Harmonic filtering prevents nuisance trips
26
Australian mining HRE systems
=
=
5 years
Meet AS2081.3-2002 without false trips
27
Motors, generators, pumps, irrigation systems, heating cables,
SCR-controlled heaters, semiconductor mfg. equipment
=
=
5 years
o
Detects low level arcing faults, detects CT wiring problems, up to 5 A,
noise filtering
28
Portable power cables with integrated pilot conductor.
Mining equipment, conveyors, cranes
=
=
5 years
=
Reliable ground-fault and ground-continuity detection for smaller
systems
31
Shore-to-ship power, pumps, cranes, mining cables, material handling
=
=
5 years
=
Provides reliable ground continuity verification
32
Three-way splitter boxes formine trailing cables
=
=
5 years
o
=
Reduce amount of cable to supply up to three loads, with proper ground
and ground-fault monitoring
33
RG AC
Resistance grounded systems
=
5 years
35
Resistance grounded systems
=
=
=
Detects resistor failure and ground faults
RG AC
=
=
Can be used on any system up to 72 kV and any resistor size
36
o
Detects problems when motor is energized or
de-energized, detects problems with CT wiring
42
Integral CT and standard protection in compact design
43
Integral CT, Operator Interface, and modular design
44
UG DC
DC control systems, battery charging systems,
transportation systems
SE-601
GF Relay
EL731
Earth-Leakage
Monitor
PGR-3100
GF Relay
UG AC
Older industrial facilities
PGM-3200
GF Relay
UG AC
Older industrial facilities
SE-502
GF Grnd Continuity
Monitor
SE-701
GF Relay
SG AC or
RG AC
SE-703
Earth-Leakage
Monitor
RG AC
SE-704
Earth-Leakage
Monitor Relay
SG AC or
RG AC
SE-105
SE-107
GF GC Monitor
RG AC
SE-134C
GF GC Monitor
SE-145
GF GC Monitor
SE-325
NGR Monitor
SE-330
NGR Monitor
PGR-6100
GF & Insulation
Monitor
PGR-6130
Electronic Overload
AC systems
PGR-6150
Standard Motor
Protection
MPU-32
MPS
=
AC and/or DC Variable speed drives; AC, mixed frequency, & DC systems
=
208/120 Vac 3-ph generators for entertainment production; set lighting, etc.
SG AC or
RG AC
SG AC or
RG AC
Ground-fault protection and insulation monitoring
AC systems
for motors
=
5 years
=
5 years
=
5 years
o
o
o
o
19
20
=
=
5 years
Small motors that need additional protection
(typically <75 hp)
=
=
5 years
AC systems
Premium protection for smaller and
medium sized motors (typically >50 hp)
=
=
5 years
=
Advanced Motor
Protection
AC systems
Smaller motors in critical applications and medium-sized
motors in standard applications (typically >100 hp)
=
=
10 years
=
=
Thermal modeling for better accuracy, Arc-Flash hazard reduction,
optional temp and differential monitoring
46
Advanced Motor
Protection
AC systems
Larger motors that need maximum protection
(typically >500 hp)
=
=
10 years
=
=
Thermal modeling for better accuracy, Arc-Flash hazard reduction, opt.
temp and voltage monitoring, can be used as starter control
48
Replaces GE Multilin 169, 269 & 369
=
=
10 years
=
=
Plug and play installation, match existing curves
50
Replaces GE Multilin 469
=
=
10 years
=
=
Plug and play installation, match existing curves
50
AC systems Submersible and process pump motors
=
=
5 years
Integral CT and Undercurrent to detect low-level
51
AC systems Medium voltage distribution circuits
=
=
10 years
=
=
IEEE and IEC curves, Arc-Flash hazard reduction
53
=
=
10 years
=
=
IEEE and IEC curves, Arc-Flash hazard reduction, current and voltage
protection
54
=
1 year
Trip quickly and minimize hazard of an arc flash
57
=
5 years
Trip quickly and minimize hazard of an arc flash
58
MPU-32-X69X
Retrofit Kit
MPS-469X
Retrofit Kit
PGR-6800
Pump Protection
FEEDER
PROTECTION
ARc-flash
protection
Standard Feeder
Protection
Advanced Feeder
Protection
Induction
Motors
Induction
Motors
FPU-32
D0900
Arc-Flash Relay
AC or DC
PGR-8800
Arc-Flash Relay
AC/DC
systems
FPS
No
VISUAL
CALIBRATION INDICATION
Typical Applications
AC systems
Medium voltage distribution circuits with remote
breaker control
Switchgear in wind turbines, offshore oil rigs, marine, industrial, and
power generation
Switchgear in wind turbines, offshore drill rigs,
marine and power generation
*LEGEND: UG=Ungrounded; SG=Solidly Grounded; RG=Resistance Grounded;
=
l
standard
 optional
Generator, engine controls & Protection Quick Reference Guide
product
Typical Applications
Features
G2000
G3000
G3300
T2000
T2100
T2200
T2300
T2400
T2500
Generator Ground-Fault Relay
(SG AC)
Power Relay
Frequency Relay
Voltage Relay
Reverse Power Relay
Excitation Loss Relay
Overcurrent Relay
3-Phase Short-Circuit Relay
3-Phase Dual Overcurrent Relay
Overcurrent and Short-Circuit Relay
Manufacturers, rental companies and users of
solidly grounded generators
Generator protection
Generator protection
Bus bar monitoring
Generator protection
Generator protection
Generator protection/trip on non essential loads
Generator protection
Generator Protection/trip on non essential loads
Generator protection
T2700
Power Relay
Generator protection
T2800
Earth-Fault Relay
Generator protection
T2900
3-Phase Differential Relay
Generator protection
T3000
T3100
T3200
T3300
T2600
Frequency Relay
Voltage Relay
Double Insulation Monitoring Relay
Voltage Relay
Dual Current Relay
Bus bar monitoring/non essential load trip
Bus bar monitoring
Bus bar monitoring
Bus bar monitoring
Load depending start and stop of generators
No calibration, visual indication, 5-yr warranty . No CTs, can be used on 3- and 4-pole switches,
alarms when generator becomes ungrounded
User configurable scales and setpoints
User configurable scales and setpoints
User configurable scales and setpoints. Combined over- and undervoltage relay
Works even if supply voltage drops to 50% of rated
Works even if supply voltage drops to 50% of rated
The non-essential trip function is used to reduce the chance of blackouts
Accepts high supply voltage variations – 60 to 110%
Combining two relays in same enclosure
Combining two protection functions in same enclosure
Accepts high-supply voltage variation, ensures correct operation in spite of voltage supply
fluctuations (fulfills marine class requirement)
Protects generators against earth faults
(Combined with T2200 overcurrent protection is also provided)
Protection of generators, power transmission equipment and circuit breakers against
differential currents
Combined over- and underfrequency relay
Combined over- and undervoltage relay
Insulation monitoring of AC systems. One relay monitors two separate systems.
Combining two relays in same enclosure
Simple and economic load depending start/stop device
PGR-4300
generator & SINGLE-FUNCTION
PROTECTION
00
Description
158
GENERATOR CONTROL
T4500
Auto Synchronizer
T4800
Load Sharer
T4900
VAR Load Sharer
T5000
Paralleling Relay
E7800
Motorized Potentiometer
T7900
Electronic Potentiometer
M8100
Synchroscope
Synchronization of a generator to a busbar
Load sharing between generators or parallel
operation of generators with the grid
Reactive load sharing between generators or
parallel operation of generators with the grid
Paralleling of generators
Interfacing of synchronizers and load sharers with
governors and AVRs
Interfacing of synchronizers and load sharers with
governors and AVRs
Paralleing of generators
T8400
Blackout Limiter
Paralleling of generators
C6200
S6000,
S6100, S6610
FlexGen Generator Control
Generator control and protection device
Generator protection, control and full power
management system
SIGMA Protection Module
Marine Certifications
PAGE #
N/A
63
N/A
N/A
N/A
ABS, BV, PRS, RMRS, RRR
BV, RMRS, RRR
BV, PRS, RMRS, RRR
BV, PRS, RMRS, RRR
BV, RMRS
BV, PRS, RMRS, RRR
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
BV, RMRS, RRR
73
BV, RMRS, RRR
29
ENGINE
ENGINE
CONTROL DIAGNOSTICS
ALARM
SYSTEMS
RRR
74
ABS, BV, KRS, PRS, RMRS, RRR
ABS, BV, KRS, PRS, RMRS, RRR
BV, PRS, RMRS, RRR
N/A
BV, DNV, KRS, RMRS
75
76
24
77
79
Facilitates easy adjustment during installation and commissioning
ABS, BV, DNV, KRS, PRS, RMRS, RRR
80
Includes reverse power trip
ABS, BV, DNV, KRS, PRS, RMRS, RRR
81
Power factor regulation for grid parallel operation is included.
N/A
82
Check synchronizer for enabling closure of circuit breakers
BV, PRS, RMRS
83
Resistance range from 100 ohm to 10 K ohm
RRR
84
Provides a wide selection of output ranges including PWM
N/A
85
Versions with C/B close output and dead bus closure available.
Economic solution - only one or two units for monitoring installations with several generators.
Occupying less space in the switch panel
Many operational modes are covered with the same unit
BV, GL, RMRS, RRR
86
N/A
87
ABS, BV, CSS, KRS, RMRS, RRR
ABS, BV, CCS, DNV, GL, KRS, LRS, NKK, RINA,
RMRS, RRR
88
BV, DNV, GL, LRS, NKK, PRS, RINA, RMRS, RRR
93
ABS, DNV, GL, LRS, RMRS, RRR
95
101
102
103
104
104
104
105
Covers all power management functions
M2000
Engine Control
Engine control and monitoring
M2500
Engine Control and Monitoring Unit
Engine control and monitoring
E5000
Handheld EngineEye Unit
Engine diagnostics
Possibility of changing between emergency generator mode and harbour generator mode via
external switch.
Digital and analog sensor inputs, J1939 communication.
Configuration and log read-out via SD card
MIP with large display and patented sensor, TDC and ISO correction
M1000
Alarm Monitor
Monitoring of digital alarm signals
Voltage and insulation monitoring of supply voltage
M3000
Alarm Monitor
Monitoring of digital and analog alarm signals
Calculation of average value of input signals for exhaust gas monitoring
N/A
ABS, BV, DNV, GL, KRS, LRS, NKK, PRS, RINA,
RMRS, RRR
ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, NKK, RINA, RMRS, RRR
M4200
M4500
M4600
M4700
H4000 Series
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Indicator
Alarm Indicator
Alarm Indicator
HMI Panels
Monitoring of digital alarm signals
Remote alarm indication
Remote alarm indication
Remote alarm indication
Visualisation system with touch screen
Programmable LED color, 8 channels
6 channels
8 channels
20 channels. Versions with Modbus communication available.
Applications are built to customer specification
BV, DNV, LRS, RMRS, RRR
RRR
RRR
RRR
DNV, GL, RINA
90
98
Alphanumeric Index
Alphanumeric index
Accessories
116
M4500
104
20-21
M4600
104
Adapter Cables
120-121
M4700
104
Alarm Monitors
100
M8100
AC/DC Earthed System
Arc-Flash Protection
C6200
56
Mining Machine Controls
88-89
Motor Protection
Controls & Diagnostic Accessories
121
Mounting Adapters
CT Selection Guide
113
MPS
Current Transformers
Custom Power Centers
D0900
D1000
DIN-Rail Adapters
E5000
112-115
58
84
Feeder Protection
Neutral-Grounding Resistor Package
NGR
Overview
98-99
20-21
EngineEye
MPU-32-X69X
111
EL731
Engine DiagnosIs
MPU-32
57
E7800
Engine Control
MPS-469X
122
Panel Mount Adapters
86
124
41
108
48-49
50
46-47
50
39-40
38
128-158
108
PGM-8325
35
92
PGN-1000
39
40
97
PGN-3000
98-99
PGR-2601
19
52
PGR-3100
22
1
PGR-3200
23
FlexGen
88-89
PGR-4300
63
FPS
54-55
PGR-4700
Consult Factory
FPU-32
53
PGR-4704
28
G2000
64
PGR-5330
36
G3000
65
PGR-5701
26
G3300
66
PGR-6100
42
Generator Control
78
PGR-6130
43
Generator Protection
62
PGR-6150
44-45
GFA300
63
PGR-6200
46
GFCI
60
PGR-6210
50
Find the Right Product
46
PGR-6300
48
117
PGR-6310
50
18
PGR-6800
51
105
PGR-7200
53
44
PGR-7300
54
High-Tension Couplers
117
PGR-8134
32
HMI Panels
105
PGR-8800
GFR4000
Ground Reference Modules
Ground-Fault Protection
H4000 Series
HGR
Industrial Shock-Block
Input Modules
Portable Power Centers
123
117
Power Take-Off Panels
126
94
M1000
101
M2000
93
Relay Software
M2500
95
Relay Testing Equipment
M2600
96
Remote Indication
Pump Protection
RCD300M2
M3000
102
Resistance-Grounded Systems
M4200
103
S6000
159
51
Consult Factory
107
117
118-119
34
90-91
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
INDEX
M0600
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
58
61
19
Alphanumeric Index
SB6000 Series
SE-105, SE-107
31
SE-134C, SE-135
32
SE-145
33
SE-325
SE-330, SE-330HV
SE-502
25
SE-601
19
SE-701
26
SE-703
27
SE-704
28
SIGMA
Single-Function Protection
119
61
90-91
62
Soft Starters
125
Software
107
Solidly-Grounded Systems
67
T2100
68
T2200
69
T2300
70
T2400
71
T2500
72
T2600
79
T2700
73
T2800
29
T2900
74
T3000
75
T3100
76
T3200
24
T3300
77
T4500
80
T4800
81
T4900
82
T5000
83
T7900
85
Terminations and Adapters
The Importance of Effective Motor
and Motor Circuit Protection
Ground-Fault Protection with VFDs
Selecting an Arc Flash Relay
Why NGRs Need Monitoring
Transformer Protection
Littelfuse Literature
is in the App Store!
87
30
Ungrounded AC System
20-21
Watertight Covers
Lowering the Limits for Ground-Fault Protection
Our free Littelfuse Catalogs and
Literature App keeps our products and
technical resources at your finger tips,
wherever you are. Find products and
technical specifications you need,
quickly and easily!
120-121
Trailing Cable Protection
Ungrounded DC System
Introduction to Protection Relays and Applications
24-29
T2000
T8400
INDEX
35
38
Shock-Block GFCI
An expanded Technical Application Guide, White Papers,
and a library of technical information is available online
at www.littelfuse.com/technicalcenter. Littelfuse
can help you address application and circuit protection
challenges while achieving regulatory compliance.
36-37
SE-330AU
Sensing Resistors
White Papers & Technical
Information
61
19
111
19
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
160
©2012 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls
Let us Help you Build a Safe Electrical System
Contact our protection relay and safety experts today at
1-800-832-3873 or www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
to find out what Littelfuse can do for you.
WWW.LITTELFUSE.COM/Relayscontrols
Application
Support
Littelfuse’s staff of professional engineers assists customers with the
application of protection relays and generator controls. By working
with the customer during the design phase, our engineers are able to
help identify potential issues and provide product recommendations to
resolve difficult problems. Since we are involved from the beginning,
we are also able to provide recommendations for relay settings.
Field
Support
Our experienced product and application engineers are available
to provide assistance when investigating the cause of a relay
trip, or assisting with product setup. As systems grow in terms of
power and physical size, some products and settings may need
to be adjusted. If so, our engineers are available to answer any
questions that arise when modifying these applications.
Online Tools and
Relay Software
Featuring easy to use navigation, search and selection tools as well
as in-depth product details, www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols
is a powerful resource for up-to-date technical information. In
addition, our website features various software applications, such
as relay-to-PC interface software, firmware, upgrade software,
online demos and programming tutorials.
Littelfuse products and services enhance the safety and productivity of electrical systems. Along with
protection relays, generator controls and alarm monitors, we offer current-limiting fuses to decrease
Arc-Flash exposure, and fuse holders and fuse covers to reduce incidental contact and improve safety.
g
Protection Relays
g
Generator Control and Protection
g
Alarm Annunciators and Indicators
g
Engine Control
g
Engine Diagnostics
g
Custom Power Centers
g
Fuses and Fuse Holders
WWW.LITTELFUSE.COM /RELAYSCONTROLS
F or 85 years, Littelfuse electrical safety products have helped OEM engineers, consulting
engineers and end-users select the right products to protect critical electrical equipment—
all supported by our full line of product catalogs and reference materials.
Arc-Flash Relay Brochure
L ittelfuse offers one of the fastest Arc-Flash Protection relays on the market.
The PGR-8800 can detect a developing arc flash extremely fast and send a trip signal
before any significant damage occurs.
Motor Protection Relay Brochure
L ittelfuse provides a range of multi-function motor protection
products that reliably protect small, medium and large motors.
Generator Controls and Alarm Panels Littelfuse Selco provides generator control, diagnostics
and protection products as well as alarm annunciation
and indication panels.
Fuses and Fuse Holders Catalog
L ittelfuse POWR-GARD® offers a complete circuit-protection portfolio,
including time saving indication products for an instant visual blown
fuse identification, even on de-energized systems.
To request catalogues for the entire Littelfuse portfolio of products, please contact your authorized
Littelfuse sales representative or visit our website at www.littelfuse.com/catalogs
Scan with your mobile device for
www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols.
Scan with your mobile device to
download this catalog.
©May 2012 Littelfuse, Inc. Printed in USA.
Specifications, descriptions and illustrative material in this literature are as accurate as known at the time of publication,
but are subject to changes without notice. Visit www.littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date technical information.
FORM NO. PF130N
Revision D
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising